Home

IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server 6.0.1 User's Guide

Contents

1. Code Language AFK Afrikaans SQI Albanian ARG Arabic Algeria ARH Arabic Bahrain ARE Arabic Egypt ARI Arabic Iraq ARJ Arabic Jordan ARK Arabic Kuwait ARB Arabic Lebanon ARL Arabic Libya ARM Arabic Morocco ARO Arabic Oman ARQ Arabic Qatar 62 Chapter 7 Code Language ARA Arabic Saudi Arabia ARS Arabic Syria ART Arabic Tunisia ARU Arabic United Arab Emirates ARY Arabic Yemen HYE Armenian EUQ Basque Basque BEL Belarusian BGR Bulgarian CAT Catalan CHS Chinese ZHH Chinese Hong Kong SAR ZHI Chinese Singapore CHT Chinese Taiwan HRV Croatian Croatia CSY Czech DAN Danish NLB Dutch Belgium NLD Dutch The Netherlands Z zZ English Australia English Belize Z English Canada Z English Caribbean Z English Ireland English Jamaica Z English New Zealand Z English South Africa Z English Trinidad Z English United Kingdom S S a S mes S a mes S inez ee c oA Hi al N i w al cl gt Z English United States ETI Estonian Estonia FOS Faroese Faroe Islands FAR Farsi FIN Finnish FRB French Belgium FRC French Canada FRA French France FRL French Luxembourg FRS French
2. Single choice selection lists are shown as a one line box multiple choice lists show the first five items in the list In the example if you select North and East you will be allocated participants who live in those regions but not anyone who lives in the south or west Matches Any is a special item and is often the default selection It means that you do not want to filter records using that qualification In the example Matches Any means that you will receive records for participants in any location rather than say just participants in the West You can use it to cancel previously set selections in a list Setting your qualifications Choose at least one item from each qualification list Click OK Changing your qualifications Click the Change Interviewer Qualifications button as shown below Figure 1 39 Change Interviewer Qualifications button This opens the Interviewer Qualifications dialog box the same as or very similar to the Login Info dialog box Select the qualifications you want to use for future calls and cancel any that are no longer appropriate Click OK 185 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Using an autodialer to make calls If the project you are working on uses an autodialer it will dial participants phone numbers for you and connect you to a participant only when he or she picks up the phone You will not know which participant is being called before he
3. Calls to participants retrieved by the Specific Contact button are recorded only if that participant was called previously and that previous call was recorded Note that when you change this setting there might be a delay of up to a minute before the new value takes effect For more information use the search function in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library documentation to search for the text Recording Calls and Interviews and in the search results open the topic with that title Answering machine detection settings Answering machine detection AMD mode Answering machine detection AMD can be useful when dialing residential numbers It is based on the observation that human greetings are usually short whereas answering machine messages are long When an auto dialed participant record is dialed and the dialer detects that an answering machine picked up the call the call is 162 Chapter 1 automatically ended with the Answering Machine call outcome when the Interviewer Server is properly configured to support the feature Select the appropriate answering machine detection mode from the drop down menu AMD parameter leave blank to use dialer s settings This field allows you to define specific AMD parameters For more information see the topic Configuring Answering Machine Detection on p 163 Name of AMD announcement file leave blank to use dialer s settings You can specify the name of a wave
4. IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Properties Require a response to this question Yes Hide this question No Grd Variable Name GY1 Grd Layout Arrange subjects in columns Arrange subjects in rows Subjects i Responses Response Subject1 Response2 Subject2 Response3 Subject3 Question Type Single Response C Multiple Response Response Order Default 7 Display Responses all Responses gt at z Question Subjects Use the selections on left side together with the menu below to manipulate Move Up Move Down Insert Above Selection Insert Below Selection Delete Selected Append Insert Shared List Om Subject Text Picture Responses Use the selections on left side together with the menu below to manipulate Move Up Move Down Insert Above Selection Insert Below Selection Delete Selected Append Change To Single Insert Shared List f Os RESPONSE D Excelent Excelent Singe Response z a g gt In Require a response to this question choose whether or not this question must be answered Note If a question may be left unanswered and you do not insert a No Answer response in the category list Build inserts one automatically This is because the interview script that is generated from the Build questionnaire requires this in order for respondents to be able to click Next without having to select an answer You will not see the No Answer category unt
5. http 10 80 4 99 SPS5MR CatiSup FieldOrderAdd aspx schema Order field Id amp hash 22 3a38 3al 7 8005635 amp mode add Please set the Order Weight for this field EID37 3 http 10 80 4 99 SPSSMR CatiSup FieldOrderAdd aspx schema Order field Id amp hash 22 3a38 3al 7 B0056358mode Internet Value The drop down field lists all distinct values for the selected field including null empty The message There is no order weight based on this field displays when you select a distinct value for the first time Select an appropriate value from the list Order Weight Enter a numeric value between 0 and 9999 The value you enter defines the order or weight priority for the selected value The priority controls the record retrieval order for all queues Note When you enter a value of 0 records that contain an order or weight value of 0 are the last to be retrieved from the selected queue and are not retrieved from other queues gt Click Add to save the defined value to the Field order table Field Order The table lists all defined field order values and their associated priority Before performing any of the following tasks you must first select a field row from the table gt Click the Edit field value order button to edit the selected field value s priority Figure 1 15 Click Update to save to edit or click Cancel to discard any change gt Click the Delete field value order button t
6. Alt 181 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Button Description Keyboard Shortcut see note below this table If the project you are working Alth on uses an autodialer you can use this button to end the call immediately if you need to although normally you should select a call outcome to end the call If you used a modem to dial the participant s phone number you must use this button to disconnect the modem at the end the call Start the interview AltH Switch to another project Alt P You can use this button before retrieving a contact or immediately after completing a survey to switch to another project to which you are assigned After you click this button the Project List dialog displays allowing you to select another project Cancel the contact You can Alt C use this button after you have retrieved a contact but before you dial the contact s phone number Occasionally the contact can only Alt T be reached via a menu system for example Press 1 for Dr Smith press 2 for Dr Jones In these situations you can use this button to display a dial pad allowing you to press the appropriate keys The resultant dial tones are sent to the menu system This works when you are connected to the Dialer via local extension dialing or via ISDN Note Audible tones do not occur when clicking dial pad buttons If the project you are work
7. gt When prompted choose whether to open the file from its current location or save it in a location of your choice Edit Preset Filters dialog The Edit Preset Filters dialog provides options for creating modifying and deleting filters 266 Chapter 1 Creating a filter From Export Data click Edit Presets next to the Select a preset filter field This displays the Edit Preset Filters dialog allowing you to define a new filter gt Click the Add a new preset icon to add to new filter to the list of preset filters gt Enter an appropriate filter name in the Name field gt Enter the appropriate expression in the Filter expression field Refer to the Writing filter expressions section below for more information Click Apply to save the new filter click Cancel to discard the new filter Modifying an existing filter From Export Data click Edit Presets next to the Select a preset filter field This displays the Edit Preset Filters dialog allowing you to modify an existing filter In the Presets list select a filter to modify The selected filter name and expression display in their respective Name and Filter expression fields Edit the filter expression as appropriate and click Apply Refer to the Writing filter expressions section below for more information Click OK to save the modified filter click Cancel to discard the changes Copying an existing filter From Export Data click Edit Presets next to
8. Displaying System Variables in the List Pane System variables are created by IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server when you parse the questionnaire and contain general information such as the interview serial number the date and time at which the interview started and the name of the last question that the respondent answered As such they are not normally useful for quota control and do not appear in the standard list of variables To Display System Variables in the List Pane gt Choose View gt View System Variables Displaying Sample Variables in the List Pane When your sample records contain personal data such as age gender or brand tried you can apply quotas based on this data either in the sample management authentication script or in the questionnaire script For example you could set up sample management quotas that restrict the 311 IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup survey to 500 men and 500 women and then apply quotas in the script based on age or brand tried once respondents have started the interview You can create quotas based on variables in the sample records Once you have told IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup to make the sample variables available they appear on a separate tab in the List pane the procedures for using them to build quota definitions are the same as for questionnaire variables Quota Setup cannot use the sample information directly from the sample files so it c
9. Switzerland DEA German Austria DEU German Germany DEC German Liechtenstein DEL German Luxembourg DES German Switzerland 63 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Code Language ELL Greek HEB Hebrew HIN Hindi HUN Hungarian ISL Icelandic IND Indonesian ITA Italian Italy ITS Italian Switzerland JPN Japanese KOR Korean LVI Latvian LTH Lithuanian MSL Malay Malaysia NOR Norwegian Bokmal NON Norwegian Nynorsk PLK Polish PTB Portuguese Brazil PTG Portuguese Portugal ROM Romanian Romania RUS Russian Russia SRB Serbian Cyrillic SRL Serbian Latin SKY Slovak SLV Slovenian ESS Spanish Argentina ESB Spanish Bolivia ESL Spanish Chile ESO Spanish Colombia ESC Spanish Costa Rica ESD Spanish Dominican Republic ESF Spanish Ecuador ESE Spanish El Salvador ESG Spanish Guatemala ESH Spanish Honduras ESM Spanish Mexico ESI Spanish Nicaragua ESA Spanish Panama ESZ Spanish Paraguay ESR Spanish Peru ESU Spanish Puerto Rico ESY Spanish Uruguay ESV Spanish Venezuela SVF Swedish Finland SVE Swedish Sweden 64 Chapter 7 Code Language THA Thai Thailand TRK Turkish URK Ukrainian URD Urdu VIT Vietnamese
10. Vietnam Unsupported Items If you load a questionnaire or script snippet that has been created outside of Build and it contains items that Build does not support Build flags the item with a no entry sign On the Overview tab a note explains that you may edit the item using IBM SPSS Data Collection Base Professional GalleriesEnteringCompound Build does not support this item Please use Scriptwriter Station or mrStudio to edit it Inserting IBM SPSS Data Collection WordCapture Files into the Current Questionnaire If you have a questionnaire mdd file that was created in IBM SPSS Data Collection WordCapture you can insert it into a Build questionnaire in the same way that you might insert files from the library When you insert an external file into the current questionnaire Build compares the names of the items it is inserting against the names of items in the current questionnaire If any of the item names already exists Build appends a number to the item s name so that it still has a unique name Similarly if the base language for the inserted items is different to the base language of the current questionnaire Build will tell you so that you can choose a different language if one is available gt On the Overview tab select the item above which you want to insert the new items File gt Insert gt From File This opens a file selection dialog box Z Web Page Dialog Po J cancet
11. ble Haman Resources Children Question mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 44 20 PM Education US Question mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 44 22 PM 7 Nad Products and Services Ethnicity Question mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 44 24 PM Gl Ratings and Frequencies Ev States Questions mdd mdd 4 28 2004 1 41 16 PM Sa Website Gender Question mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 46 00 PM Household Size Question mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 48 12 PM Income Euro Question mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 46 06 PM Income UKI Question mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 460 PM In the Folders frame navigate to the folder containing the file you want to use In the right hand frame double click on the file you want to load Build inserts the questions from they library file into the current questionnaire Opening an Existing Questionnaire If you are working outside IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration you can open any questionnaire to which you have access This option is not available when you start Build from Interviewer Server Administration because then Build automatically opens the questionnaire for the currently selected project 75 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide gt Choose File gt Open This displays the Open dialog box Zj Open Web Page Dialog E x Upload Download Fiename Filemask mad Open Close Folders Name Type Date E Root Age Question cat
12. gt Use the Browse button to locate and select the file you want to insert The file s name will appear in the File box gt Click OK Build inserts the items from the library file at the current point in the questionnaire 65 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Editing Questionnaires This section describes various techniques for changing the content and appearance of a questionnaire once the initial development stage is over These include General procedure for changing a question s definition Editing response and subject lists Saving and undoing changes Grouping questions that are to appear all on the same page Deleting questions Moving questions up and down Cutting and pasting questions Duplicating questions The section also includes some useful information about editing Build questionnaires Changing Questions gt gt v On the Overview tab select the question you want to change Select the Advanced or Presentation tab as appropriate Make the changes and click Apply on the question s display box If necessary switch to a different tab to make other changes Editing Response and Subject Lists Responses are the texts that make up the list of possible responses to a categorical question or a categorical grid question Subjects apply to categorical and numeric grid questions and are the sub questions that you want to ask For example in a grid that asks the responden
13. Questions with text answers display a box of about six lines in which you should try to type the participant s exact words There is no need to press Return or Enter at the end of each line If you make mistakes you can backspace over them and retype to make the corrections Your supervisor might ask you to write down long text responses rather than typing them as the participant speaks If you have to do this you must write down the participant ID number the Id box at the top of the screen and the full question name as it appears on the screen as well as the participant s answer If you forget to do this it might not be possible to assign the response text to the correct participant later on Date Time and Date Time Questions Date questions might accept an answer in several different formats for example mm dd yy or dd mm yy or dd mmm yyyy To ensure that the answer that you enter is unambiguous use the dd mmm yyyy format for example 01 Jan 2000 Time questions will normally require an answer in an hh mm or hh mm ss format Sometimes a question might require a date time answer such as 01 Jan 2000 22 30 00 Like numeric questions date time and date time questions might require an answer within a certain range Boolean Questions Boolean questions require participants to answer by saying yes or no or true or false For some boolean questions you have to select from one of two options for example
14. gt To use a code of your choice click Custom Exit Code and type a number in the input box Interview Scripting Items Use an IOM Script item when you want to insert statements directly into the Routing section of the questionnaire The Routing section controls the order and way in which questions are presented to respondents Statements in this section must be written in the Interview Scripting Language which you will find documented in BM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library To Create an IOM Script Item gt Click Insert Item This opens the New Item dialog box gt Select the Routing Items tab 59 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Questions note EI C it coto Bl C Goto C Exit E Bookmark TE insert trom Script Library DD tom Script advanced Import from Library gt Choose IOM Script and click OK This displays the Edit tab for IOM script items P ect tea ee User Admin Primary Language English United States D 1OMScript Apply Undo Dimensions Script Insert item gt In Name optionally replace the default item name with a name of your choice gt In IOM Script type the mrScriptBasic code exactly as you want it to appear in the IBM SPSS Data Collection script file 60 Chapter 7 Inserting Routing Code from the Script Library gt gt When you create a questionnaire Build saves the questionnaire
15. m Project The project name as it appears in IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration Status The project activation status pending processing success or failed m Server The name of the server to which the questionnaire is being activated Licensed Materials Property of IBM Copyright 334 IBM Corporation 2000 2011 335 IBM SPSS Data Collection Activation Console m User The name of the user who initiated the activation Submitted The time at which the questionnaire was submitted for activation This is the time as reported by the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Select all Click to select all projects in the Pending Activations list Cancel selected Click to cancel activation for all selected projects Completed activations The following information is provided m Projecticon Provides a visual cue for the activation status Icon Description A Indicates that project activation was successful You can select the appropriate table row and click View Message to view all activation messages Indicates that project activation failed You can select the appropriate table row and click View Message to view related activation error information Project The project name as it appears in Interviewer Server Administration Status The project activation status pending processing success or failed E E m Server The name of t
16. m The human speaks a long greeting gt max This typically happens when reaching a business number If an amfile file is specified the respondent will hear it m The human has loud background noise permanently above the db threshold This typically occurs with car phones The playback of amfile starts when the AMD algorithm has waited for end of greeting for off seconds However this timer needs to be longer than the longest 165 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide AM greeting 30 seconds so it is unlikely that the respondent will wait long enough to hear amfile Humans can also be misinterpreted as No audio This occurs when m There is no audio connection for example because the battery in the respondent s phone is running low After on seconds without start of voice the dialer hangs up call outcome No audio m The human picks up the phone but does not start speaking immediately for example the respondent is busy or due to a disability After on seconds the dialer hangs up m The greeting was spoken very softly below the db threshold Usually the respondent speaks up louder but if the voice is not raised the dialer hangs up after on seconds The dialer plays the amfile to No audio numbers unless the setting is disabled by option cp S hangup immediately if silence Qualification Timers Spoken words contains short gaps in the audio due to articulation The dialer ignor
17. Click Save As Creating and Installing Shared Templates Build has a central storage area for templates that are available for general use with all questionnaires When you are designing questionnaires you can add templates to the central storage area by using the Upload button on the Select dialog box that is displayed when you select a presentation template for a question For simple templates this is all that is required However if the template refers to other templates for example it names a grid template or uses a stylesheet or includes images you will also need to do the following m Within the template specify filenames as URLs or using a special notation that allows the interviewing program to access them using the image cache For more information see the topic Referring to External Files in a Shared Template File on p 76 m Create a separate folder in the central storage area for all files referenced in the template file For more information see the topic The Shared and Roles Templates Folders on p 77 If you add a questionnaire file that uses a template to the library you will need to create a separate folder within the library to store the template and any files that the template uses and then copy those files into that folder manually This applies to both questionnaire specific and shared templates For more information see the topic Copying Questionnaires that use Templates to the Library on p 77 Referring
18. Data Collection Interviewer Server installation procedure creates an empty Participants database that you can use if you wish or you can create a new database for this project or a group of projects Once you have chosen the database you can either select an existing table in that database or create a new one You can also use the Upload tab to specify that the Participants activity will assign a random number to each participant record so that for telephone interviewing projects the sample management system will select the records in random order Project My First Interview a l Admin View Settings Required Fields Additional Fields RRS eegnel tellinint Upload Participant Records mj Field delimiter Apply File containing participant records No file loaded Load File Server to upload to KIF TGROUTONSPSS_DIMENSIONS Enter name Database on server for storing Paticipants p participant records Participants z New Table in database for storing MyFirstintewiew 4 participant records MyFirstInterview y New M Import Participants To Specify Database Information gt Select the Upload tab 83 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide If the file you want to load uses something other than a semicolon as the field separator replace the semicolon in the Field delimiter box with the appropriate character and click Apply Note You cannot use a non printing characte
19. IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server 6 0 1 User s Guide yt Note Before using this information and the product it supports read the general information under Notices on p 338 This edition applies to IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server 6 0 1 and to all subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions Adobe product screenshot s reprinted with permission from Adobe Systems Incorporated Microsoft product screenshot s reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation Licensed Materials Property of IBM Licensed Materials Property of IBM Copyright IBM Corporation 2000 2011 Licensed Materials Property of IBM Copyright IBM Corporation 2000 2011 U S Government Users Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp Preface Welcome to the JBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server 6 0 1 User s Guide This guide provides information on using the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server application and activities For information about installing the products see the Interviewer Server 6 0 1 User s Guide Adobe Portable Document Format pdf versions of the guides are available on the JBM SPSS Data Collection Server DVD ROM Viewing and printing the documents requires Adobe Reader If necessary you can download it at no cost from www adobe com Use the Adobe Reader online Help for answer
20. Respondent ID 102346 Interview Time 00 14 32 Question Time 00 01 25 To pause visual monitoring click E trom the Current page below To resume after pausing click E 9 Current Page Previous Page Ph sate the following ch o Gino een How did the product s price compare to your expectations from 1 to 5 1 Poor If you did not deal with a service representative please choose 6 2 Fair 3 Good 4 Very Good 5 Excellent gi E Knowledge of the oat CU ee OO nea _ __stop_ Willingness to help oo Efficiency quickness Q 4 Al let nae OOD The Monitor tab is divided into two sections m The top half of the screen shows the interviewer s IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration user name the name of the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server project the time since the current interview was started the time spent by the interviewer on the current question and a graphic that shows the interviewer s current status m The bottom half of the screen contains two windows where the current and previous questions are displayed If a question is too big to fit in the window scroll bars will appear If the participant did not give his or her consent to be monitored or if the project settings specify that monitoring is never allowed or if the interviewer is reviewing the interview the following icon will be displayed Figure 1 70 Icon to indicate that moni
21. SPSS Data Collection administrator if you regularly see a lot of timed out interviews on all or most of your projects m Stopped by script Interviews that were terminated by a stop statement in the questionnaire script m Stopped by respondent Interviews that were stopped because the respondent clicked the Stop button If the project does not use Sample Management interviews in this state cannot be restarted Interview system shutdown Interviews that were terminated due to a problem in the script Reviewed Reserved for future use This category will count interviews that have been reviewed by replaying them Stopped by signal Interviews that were stopped by a signal statement in the questionnaire script m Undetermined status Interviews whose data collection status in the project s case data file could not be matched to a valid status in the project s questionnaire definition mdd file You should not see any interviews in this category 218 Chapter 7 Starting Status gt Select the project you want to monitor and click Status The page displays a table showing the number of interviews with different outcomes achieved in active and test mode Refreshing the Report On Demand gt Click the Refresh button Survey Results Survey Results allows you to create simple tables using variables from your interview data The tables can be simple topline tables showing the number of respondents present in each
22. The list of participant records will now include only those records that match your selection criteria If the columns that you updated are visible the new values are displayed 106 Chapter 7 Deleting Records Warning Do not delete participant records from telephone interviewing projects as this can cause phone reports to show unexpected results You can delete participant records only if you have been assigned the Participants activity feature Can delete participants see Controlling Access to Data and Features for more information On the View tab select the check box on the left of the record or records that you want to delete Alternatively if you want to delete all the records on the page select the check box on the left of the field names Click the Delete icon in the top right corner of the list of records as shown below x To confirm the deletion click OK After a brief pause another dialog box opens to confirm that your deletion was successful Click Close The list of participant records refreshes to no longer show the deleted records Downloading Records gt gt gt You can download one some or all participant records to a text csv file The data in the file will be in the correct format for uploading into another sample table and will adhere to standard csv file conventions Refer to Comma separated values http en wikipedia org wiki Comma separated_values for more informat
23. When a new interview starts and there is more than one session engine running I BM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server generally allocates the interview to the least busy session engine Your IBM SPSS Data Collection administrator can control how the system determines which is the least busy engine Sometimes it will be the engine that is actually doing the least work at other times engines that are already running interviews for the current project may take precedence over other engines even if those engines are less busy This is why you may see new interviews being allocated to engines that are not necessarily the least heavily loaded By running the Interviewing Activity Report and regularly updating it to get the latest figures you can monitor how busy the session engines are and can anticipate possible load problems The point to bear in mind is that the higher the load that is the busier the engine is the more slowly interviews will run If an engine reaches or exceeds 100 loading and Interviewer Server allocates another interview to it that interview will fail with a message saying that the server is busy The report includes all session engines even if they are not currently registered This does not always indicate a problem It may be that an engine has been unregistered for Web inbound interviews but can still be used to run telephone interviews Sometimes an engine may fail while interviews are in progress When this h
24. 200 Time Jayawardenepura Myanmar Standard GMT 06 30 203 Time Rangoon SE Asia Standard GMT 07 00 205 Time Bangkok Hanoi Jakarta North Asia Standard GMT 07 00 207 Time Krasnoyarsk China Standard GMT 08 00 210 Time Beijing Chongqing Hong Kong Urumqi 135 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Setting Description North Asia East GMT 08 00 227 Standard Time Irkutsk Ulaan Bataar Singapore Standard GMT 08 00 215 Time Kuala Lumpur Singapore W Australia GMT 08 00 Perth 225 Standard Time Taipei Standard GMT 08 00 220 Time Taipei Tokyo Standard GMT 09 00 235 Time Osaka Sapporo Tokyo Korea Standard GMT 09 00 230 Time Seoul Yakutsk Standard GMT 09 00 240 Time Yakutsk Cen Australia GMT 09 30 250 Standard Time Adelaide AUS Central GMT 09 30 245 Standard Time Darwin E Australia GMT 10 00 260 Standard Time Brisbane AUS Eastern GMT 10 00 255 Standard Time Canberra Melbourne Sydney West Pacific GMT 10 00 275 Standard Time Guam Port Moresby Tasmania Standard GMT 10 00 265 Time Hobart Vladivostok GMT 10 00 270 Standard Time Vladivostok Central Pacific GMT 11 00 280 Standard Time Magadan Solomon Is New Caledonial New Zealand GMT 12 00 290 Standard Time Auckland Wellington Fiji Standard Time GMT 12 00 285 Fiji Kamchatka Marshall I
25. IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server in Other Languages You can display the application in a language other than English You can change the language at any time by following the appropriate instructions below Close the application before making these changes You can change the language back to English at any time or even switch back and forth between supported languages To change the display language 1 Open Internet Explorer and select Tools gt Internet Options 2 Click the Languages button and select the appropriate language from the Language Preference list If the desired language does not display in the list click Add and select the language in the Add Language dialog 3 Use the Move up and Move down buttons to control the language order preference The language at the top of the list will be used as the default language 4 Click OK to save your changes Converting Version 2 3 Scripts to Work With IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server 6 0 1 The system architecture and the scripting language for IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server 6 0 1 are completely different to those of earlier versions and you will not normally be able to use version 2 3 projects directly with version 6 0 1 Export Data Survey Results Status and IBM SPSS Data Collection Survey Tabulation Activities You can use these activities on existing IBM SPSS Quancept projects even if you do not have IBM SPSS Data Coll
26. SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup keeps track of the drag and drop actions that you take during a session and the order in which you take them and allows you to roll back or reinstate the changes one at a time When using Undo and Redo bear in mind the following points m Once you add targets to a quota table Quota Setup forgets about the individual changes you made up to that point and treats all actions on that table up to and including the addition of the targets as a single step For example if you add a new table with two dimensions and then add targets clicking Undo removes the second variable and the targets and clicking Undo a second time removes the first variable clicking Redo reinstates the first variable and then the second variable and the targets You cannot undo the targets by themselves or undo the addition of the second variable Saving changes to a table does not prevent you from undoing them You cannot undo the addition of a new table delete the table instead Undo and Redo are disabled for Expression Quotas To Undo Actions gt Choose Edit gt Undo gt Repeat this step to undo the previous change and so on When there are no more changes to undo Quota Setup makes the Undo feature unavailable To Reinstate Undone Actions gt Choose Edit gt Redo gt Repeat this step to reinstate other actions that you undid in the order in which the actions were originally taken When there are no more actions to
27. Specific Contact button The Specific Contact dialog box opens Figure 1 51 Specific Contact dialog box fe i C gt To retrieve your last contact select Get last contact and click OK The dialog box will close and your last contact will be displayed at the top of the main screen gt To search for a contact select Get specific contact gt From the drop down list select the field that you want to search gt Inthe edit box type the value that you want to search for 194 Chapter 1 gt gt Click OK to start the search If a participant is found that matches your search criteria the dialog box will close and the participant s details will be displayed at the top of the main screen Your supervisor will tell you what will happen if more than one matching participant is found typically only the first participant found will be displayed If no matching participant is found a message will appear in the dialog box You can then choose to modify the search criteria and click OK to search again or click Cancel to close the dialog box If the participant found is not the one you want click the Cancel Contact button Figure 1 52 Cancel Contact button Then click the Specific Contact button again When you have found the participant you are looking for click the Start Dialing or Dial Contact button Figure 1 53 Start Dialing or Dial Contact button If there is no such button dial the phone number
28. The main Survey Results screen has the following sections Question List A frame on the left of the screen that lists questions and other variables that are present in the database If you hover over a variable in the list you will see more information about that variable Table Frame The main part of the screen in which charts and tables are displayed You can do any of the following m Choose an action from the menu m Click on a variable in the Question List to display a table for that variable For some types of variables a chart is also displayed m If there is a table already displayed you can choose a variable in the Question List and Survey Results will replace the side of the table with the variable you selected All other aspects of the table are retained Viewing Variables You can view information about variables by hovering over the variable s name in the Question List or by selecting the variable in the Question List 220 Chapter 7 Information About Categorical Variables If you hover over a categorical variable a pop up displays the variable s description and categories If you select a categorical variable in the Question List Survey Results displays a table and if your options request it a bar chart The table lists each category with its count of cases and a column percentage showing what proportion the category is of the variable as a whole The chart has one bar for each category showing the perc
29. To Display Records that Contain a Date If your selection criteria includes a datetime field you must enter the value in one of three formats yyyy mm dd yyyy mm dd hh mi or yyyy mm dd hh mi ss If you specify only the date a time of 00 00 00 is assumed Therefore to display records that contain a specific date your selection criteria must be specified as a range For example if your participant records include an AppointmentTime field you can display all the participants that have an appointment on 23 February 2006 by specifying your selection criteria as AppointmentTime greater than 2006 02 23 And AppointmentTime less than 2006 02 24 100 Chapter 7 AppointmentTime 2006 02 23 Ana z AppointmentTime z fless than 06 02 24 Apply To Display Records that Contain an Empty Field To display only records that contain an empty field select the field name then select the is empty comparison and then click Apply Note that you do not need to enter a value when using the is empty or is not empty comparisons Editing Records The View tab of the Participants activity allows you to change the value of any field in a participant record with the exception of the Id field In addition to editing individual records you can also edit multiple records simultaneously in which case any changes that you make are applied to all the records that you chose to edit To Edit a Record On the View tab select the check box on the
30. Unusable Call Outcome lt gaa e aena 100 100 100 100 100 100 Calls by Segment This report shows for each queue the frequency of the number of attempts required to contact participants The first set of categories from one attempt to three attempts excludes attempts made after arranging an appointment The second set of categories also from one attempt to three attempts includes only attempts made after arranging an appointment Participants requiring more than three attempts are not shown separately but are included in the base statistics For projects that use an autodialer the report includes the autodialer specific queues called CHECK NUMBER and SILENT If the project s sample table contains segment information the data is further broken down by segment For more information see the topic About Segments on p 260 The example report below shows the data broken down by location which is one of the segments that the Phone activity recognizes 244 Chapter 7 Number of attempts before setting an Number of attempts after setting an appointment appointment Cm hs Base 1szs9 6ss19 zers tessa J ttsvso J J J a a E S E E E Completed 44906 14480 272 151 so I pma fro Recai zozas sse ess xos Stopped asez 19312 sss 1o s7 CT ae a ee ee E ee ee ee ee JUnusable 23450 22845 279 n3 2so TT Incidence Statistics
31. Yes wants to subscribe and No doesn t want to subscribe For other boolean questions there might be just a single option that you should select if the participant says yes or true To select an answer to a boolean question use one of the following methods m For interviews that require the keyboard only If two answers are shown press the number key either 1 or 2 that corresponds to the appropriate answer If only one answer is shown press 1 only if the participant answers yes or true m For interviews that use the mouse If the answer consists of two radio buttons click the appropriate radio button If the answer consists of a single check box click the check box only if the participant answers yes or true 198 Chapter 1 Special Responses Sometimes a numeric text date time or boolean question might include one or more special responses that you can select when the participant cannot or does not want to answer the question For example you might be able to select a special response that says Don t know or Refuse to answer To select a special response use one of the following methods m For interviews that require the keyboard only Press the keyboard shortcut that is shown alongside the special response that is Ctrl 1 for the first special response in the list Ctrl 2 for the second and so on For interviews that use the mouse Click on the appropriat
32. You use Email to send e mail to respondents in the sample file For example at the start of a project you might send a message to everyone inviting them to participate in the survey Later you might set up a second job that sends reminders to those respondents who have not yet taken part Each project has its own set of email job specifications 122 Chapter 7 Email provides the following facilities Respondent selection You can send e mail to all respondents in a queue or set of queues Alternatively send to a fixed number of respondents chosen either from the start of the queue or at random Customized and personalized message texts If you want to include information from a respondent s sample record or the value of a project property insert a placeholder in the message text and the appropriate values will be substituted for the placeholders when the messages are sent This allows you to address respondents by name and to include the URL for starting the interview as part of the message Test messages Check how the message will appear to respondents by sending a test message Project status You can specify that the job should only be run if the project has a particular status Activity recording You can record which respondents received which e mail by updating a field in the sample record with a note of the time and date at which the e mail was sent No repeat e mail If you rerun an e mail job a message is normally
33. gt contains any of these Then Goto Next z Previous Next Female Apply Undo And gt gt Delete Insert tem gt Choose a question name from the dropdown list of question names 56 Chapter 1 gt gt Choose a condition from the dropdown list of conditions The contents of this list will vary according to the type of question you chose The value box the third box varies according to the type of question you chose For a single or multiple choice question select a response from the dropdown list For a numeric or text question type a number or text in the box If you want to define another condition click And A second condition definition line is displayed and the And button that you clicked changes to a dropdown box so you can choose how the two conditions are to be combined If you want the new condition to be combined with the previous condition using Or rather than And select Or from the dropdown list in the previous line Define the next condition as you did the first one Repeat these steps until you have fully defined the conditions under which the routing should take place If you make a mistake click Delete to delete an incorrect line from the specification In Goto select the question or other item that you want to jump to if the condition is true Exit Codes The Exit item lets you terminate an interview immediately and flag it with an exit code of your choice Wh
34. l pa Option to run an interview Although Build works mainly with files in the project s folder within the Users folder it will sometimes use the corresponding files from the Shared folder if the files it wants are not available in the Users folder and will copy files from the Users folder into the Shared folder In the upper section of the flowchart only the named files are copied from the Shared folder to the Users folder Template or image files used by the questionnaire and stored in the Shared folder are 16 Chapter 7 not copied to the Users folder You can use the Files activity to copy check out files from the Shared folder into you Users folder During activation the mdd file is copied from the Users folder into the Shared folder if this is the first activation otherwise the current version in the Users folder is merged into the existing file in the Shared folder All other files that are needed for interviewing are copied overwriting any existing files of the same name When files are copied between the Shared and Users folders their status is set to Checked Out If the project is locked then the files in the Shared folder are not accessible by anyone else Once you unlock the project the files in the Shared folder become available to other users and can be checked out by those users even if the files are still present in your Users folder The words Checked Out simply mean that the files are present in the Sh
35. search the JBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration User 5 Guide for the topic Adding Properties to User Property Groups To Edit the Settings on the Fields Tab Click on the field that you want to change and then click the Edit button as shown below Figure 1 10 Edit icon ny Change the settings for the Label Required Show Can Edit During Survey and Can Tabulate columns as required Click Update Changing the Default Settings If you find that for every new project you always change the settings on the Fields tab to the same new values you can instead change the default settings that IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server provides so that you no longer need to do this You can also define additional default fields so that you no longer need to add them to every project For more information see the topic Changing the Default Settings on p 169 131 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Defining Sample Management Parameters Sample Management scripts for telephone interviewing projects must perform the following tasks Select records for the autodialer to call or for projects that do not use an autodialer select records for interviewers to call manually Set appointment times for records that were busy or unanswered when called Ensure that records with appointments are presented for calling at the correct times to the correct interviewers Assign record
36. 256 Chapter 7 Filtering Reports vyv v v y v When you run or download a report you can choose to include only records that relate to a specific time period or choose records that contain specific sample information or data You do this by selecting a filter to apply to the report When installed the Phone activity includes several different filters which you can amend to suit your own requirements You can also add your own filters or delete filters that you no longer want You define a filter by writing a filter expression Note that you cannot amend or delete the Other and No limit filters installed with the Phone activity In addition the Appointments Summary report ignores any filter that you have selected and the cross project reports ignore datetime filters Sample Filter Presets TodayServer TodayUTC z s StartTime UTCToLocalTime Yesterday DateOnly DateNow LastWeek Adding a date filter From the Tools menu choose Set Filters This opens the Set Filters dialog box Select the Date Filter tab In Name enter the name of your new filter The maximum filter name length is 128 characters In Filter expression enter the expression for your new filter The maximum filter expression length is 512 characters For more information see Writing a Filter Expression at the end of this topic Click Add This adds your new filter to the list of filters To save your new filter and clos
37. 7 Display Responses all Responses z at z Responses Use the selections on left side together with the menu below to manipulate Move Up Move Down Insert Above Selection Insert Below Selection Delete Selected Append Change To Single Insert Shared List fmfvero Response Text Type O Maie Maie Single Response z O Next z g D Female Female Single Response 7 D Next z H Previous Next Insert tem gt In Require a response to this question choose whether or not this question must be answered Note If a question may be left unanswered and you do not insert a No Answer response in the category list Build inserts one automatically This is because the interview script that is generated from the Build questionnaire requires this in order for respondents to be able to click Next without having to select an answer You will not see the No Answer category until your screen is refreshed for example when you change tabs At this point Build also displays a message telling you that it has added No Answer If you set this option to Yes and then edit the question later on and change this option to No Build does not automatically remove No Answer If you want to disallow No Answer response you must delete it yourself gt In Hide this question choose No if the question should be displayed to the respondent If this is a dummy question that is to exist in the questionnaire but not be displayed to respondents
38. Activation Console The IBM SPSS Data Collection Activation Console allows you to monitor questionnaire activation status The console provides options for viewing pending and completed activations and creating activation history filters The console is composed of the following tabs m Activation History tab allows you to view the status of both pending and completed activations Filters tab provides options for filtering questionnaire activation history Settings tab provides options for configuring the Activation Console When the Activation Console is launched an icon displays in the Windows taskbar Whenever a questionnaire is submitted for activation or completes activation the icon provides relevant status notification messages The notification messages include the survey URL link for each completed activation For more information see the topic Settings tab on p 337 Activation History tab The Activation History tab allows you to view the status of both pending and completed activations Note In general you are limited to viewing only your activations Pending Activations The following information is provided m Projecticon Provides a visual cue for the activation status Icon Description a Indicates that project files are currently uploading to the server A Indicates that the project is pending activation 2 Indicates that project activation is currently in progress
39. All files in the library are available to anyone who uses Build However the questionnaires do not become available to users of other Interviewer Server Administration activities until you check the files in to the Shared folder manually or run an activity that does this automatically If you add a questionnaire file that uses a template to the library you will need to create a separate folder within the library to store the template and any files that the template uses and then copy those files into that folder manually Later versions of Build will do this automatically Instructions for doing this are available in Copying Questionnaires that use Templates to the Library but you may prefer to ask your administrator to do this for you Choose File gt Add To Library This opens the Save As dialog box E Save As Web Page Dialog B a x Filename Poo Filemask mdd Save As Close Folders Name Tre Date amp Root Buying Questionnaire mdd mdd 5 10 2004 12 50 34 PM H Role Library OPMAdmins Car Satisfaction Questionnaire mdd mdd 5 10 2004 1 11 20 PM S S Shared Library Conference Evaluation Questionnaire mdd mdd 6 2 2004 11 26 42 AM za Customer Satisfaction General Customer Satisfaction Questionnaire short mdd mdd 5 10 2004 12 46 38 PM Demographics Health and Safety Questionnaire mdd mdd 5 10 2004 12 44 38 PM H E Human Resources Product Evaluation Questionnaire mdd mdd 5 10 2004 1 1
40. CallOutcome will show one row for each interviewer and one column for each call outcome code The cell for an individual interviewer and call outcome combination will tell you how many calls that interviewer made that resulted in that call outcome It will also show the total and mean amount of time that the interviewer spent on those calls Note that if you use the Email activity on a project that allows telephone interviewing the history table for the project will contain a history record for all participants who received the message These records have an empty Userld value and a duration of either 1 or 0 and they appear in the base of your tables 249 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide es a ae a E 100 pA 100 Mi ae a a maon ieee ee ee ed Sample Usage This report shows a frequency table of the number of participant records in each queue Each cell contains a count and a column percentage For projects that use an autodialer the report includes the autodialer specific queues called CHECK_NUMBER and SILENT 250 Chapter 1 58 100 9 Appointment 16 Completed Refused Unusable Frequency Unusable Refused Recall Completed Appointment 0 40 60 ColPercent Sample Usage Across Projects This report shows a frequency table of the number of participant records in each queue across projects for each project The report always includes both real and test data
41. Click OK This removes the filter from the list of filters To delete the filter and close the Set Filters dialog box click OK Alternatively click Cancel if you do not want to delete the filter Writing a Filter Expression The expression text that you use in filter expressions must be supported by the IBM SPSS Data Collection Data Model and can include functions from the IBM SPSS Data Collection Function Library For more information use the search function in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library documentation to search for the text Expression Evaluation and in the search results open the topic with that title Downloading Reports You can download one or more reports to HTML or CSV files The Phone activity will add the report files to a zip file which you can save to the location of your choice When you download reports you can choose whether the reports will include the following Real or test interview data or both interview types A chart All records or only records that relate to a specific time period Project sample information or data To Download Reports gt From the Tools menu choose Options This opens the Options dialog box as shown below Z Options Web Page Dialog x s 2 9 Vv Stacked Bar ba 259 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide By default many reports include data only for real interviews If you want your reports to include data
42. ContainsAny You can use the ContainsAny function in combination with the logical operator Not to define a quota for respondents who have not chosen any of a number of listed categories The categories can belong to a single response variable a multiple response variable or a grid subvariable The syntax is Not variable ContainsAny Categoryl_ID Category2_ID For example you might define the quota expression for all respondents who are older than 20 years of age as Not age ContainsAny E1116 YEARS E1720 YEARS This expression selects all respondents except those in the 11 16 years or 17 20 categories ContainsAll Use the ContainsAl11 function to create a quota for respondents who choose all of a number of listed answers for a multiple response question The syntax is variable ContainsAll Category1l_ID Category2 ID Note that the syntax uses the unique ID of the category rather than its label For example you can define a quota for respondents who regularly drink tea and coffee as follows drink ContainsAll Tea Coffee Respondents who drink only tea only coffee or neither beverage are excluded from the quota Note You can use ContainsA1l1 with a single response variable but you must be careful not to specify more than one category If you do the expression will never select any respondents All the listed answers and no others You can use the ContainsA11 function with the Exactly
43. Delete a Sub Schedule gt Select a sub schedule from the drop down field 147 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Click Delete Sub Schedule The selected sub schedule is deleted and is no longer available from the drop down field Regular Shifts The table lists all shifts currently defined for the selected sub schedule To Create New Shifts for a Sub Schedule Select a sub schedule from the drop down field If no sub schedules exist you must either create a new sub schedule or load an appointment schedule template both explained above Click the Add button in the Regular Shifts table Figure 1 20 The Regular Shift dialog displays providing options for defining a new shift hh mm hh mm Omon OTue Owed Oth Ofri Osat Osun Start time The earliest time at which participants may be called Enter the earliest call time End time The latest time at which participants may be called Enter the latest call time Days Select the appropriate days of the week to contact participants Click OK after entering the desired shift parameters to save the shift to the Regular Shifts table Otherwise click Cancel to discard the new shift To Edit a Shift Select an existing shift in the Regular Shifts table Click the Edit regular shift button Figure 1 21 The Regular Shift dialog displays with the preexisting shift parameters filled in Apply the appropriate changes and click OK to up
44. Each cell contains a count and a column percentage For projects that use an autodialer the report includes the autodialer specific queues called CHECK_NUMBER and SILENT 251 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide 3 5 E B mT i 166 98 Time Zone Status This report displays a list of all time zones in use by the project and whether the time zones are active or inactive based on valid call times or day parts 252 Chapter 7 Time Zone Status GMT Casablanca Monrovia Reykjavik Dialing GMT Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London Dialing GMT 01 00 Amsterdam Berlin Bern Rome Stockholm Vienna Dialing GMT 01 00 Belgrade Bratislava Budapest Ljubljana Prague Dialing GMT 01 00 Brussels Copenhagen Madrid Paris Dialing GMT 01 00 Sarajevo Skopje Warsaw Zagreb Dialing GMT 01 00 West Central Africa Dialing GMT 02 00 Athens Bucharest Istanbul Dialing GMT 02 00 Cairo Dialing GMT 02 00 Harare Pretoria Dialing GMT 02 00 Helsinki Kyiv Riga Sofia Tallinn Vilnius Dialing GMT 02 00 Jerusalem Dialing GMT 02 00 Minsk Dialing GMT 03 00 Baghdad Dialing GMT 03 00 Kuwait Riyadh Dialing GMT 03 00 Moscow St Petersburg Volgograd Dialing GMT 03 00 Nairobi Dialing GMT 03 30 Tehran Dialing GMT 04 00 Abu Dhabi Muscat Dialing GMT 04 00 Yerevan Dialing GMT 04 30 Kabul Dialing GMT 05 00 Ekaterinburg Dial
45. Edit dialog tells you what value will be used if you select Set to Empty When you have finished making your changes click OK To undo your changes click Cancel The Edit dialog closes and after a brief pause another dialog box opens to confirm that your update was successful Click Close The list of participant records refreshes to show your updates To Edit Multiple Records Note that the records that you want to edit must appear on the same page You cannot simultaneously edit records on more than one page On the View tab select the check box on the left of every record that you want to edit Alternatively if you want to edit all the records on the page select the check box on the left of the field names Click the Edit icon in the top right corner of the list of records as shown below The Edit dialog opens Note that values are shown in the dialog only when the value is identical for all the records that you selected Ifa value is not shown it might indicate that the records have different values or that the field is empty in all the records that you selected Make your changes and click OK The Edit dialog closes and after a brief pause another dialog box opens to confirm the number of records that were updated Click Close Performing a Bulk Update The bulk update feature of the Participants activity makes it easy to update many participant records at once You specify the records that you want to update and
46. GMT 02 00 2147483582 Time Amman Middle East GMT 02 00 2147483583 Standard Time Beirut Namibia Standard GMT 02 00 2147483578 Time Windhoek Arabic Standard GMT 03 00 158 Time Baghdad Arab Standard Time GMT 03 00 150 Kuwait Riyadh Russian Standard GMT 03 00 145 Time Moscow St Petersburg Volgograd 134 Chapter 1 Setting Description E Africa Standard GMT 03 00 155 Time Nairobi Georgian Standard GMT 03 00 2147483577 Time Tbilisi Iran Standard Time GMT 03 30 160 Tehran Arabian Standard GMT 04 00 Abu 165 Time Dhabi Muscat Caucasus Standard GMT 04 00 170 Time Baku Tbilisi Yerevan Azerbaijan GMT 04 00 Baku 2147483584 Standard Time Mauritius Standard GMT 04 00 Port 2147483569 Time Louis Armenian Standard GMT 04 00 2147483574 Time Yerevan Afghanistan GMT 04 30 175 Standard Time Kabul Ekaterinburg GMT 05 00 180 Standard Time Ekaterinburg West Asia Standard GMT 05 00 185 Time Islamabad Karachi Tashkent Pakistan Standard GMT 05 00 2147483570 Time Islamabad Karachi India Standard Time GMT 05 30 190 Chennai Kolkata Mumbai New Delhi Nepal Standard GMT 05 45 193 Time Kathmandu N Central Asia GMT 06 00 201 Standard Time Almaty Novosibirsk Central Asia GMT 06 00 195 Standard Time Astana Dhaka Sri Lanka Standard GMT 06 00 Sri
47. In the Review Interview Options drop down list there are three options as follows Option Description No Review The interviewer cannot review interviews Review Interview The interviewer can review the whole interview Review Open ends The interviewer can review open ended text responses only Note The above setting does not affect the supervisor s ability to review interviews using the Review Interviews activity If you have selected either Review Interview or Review Open ends you can then choose between the following two radio buttons Option Description Show review button on interviewer screen To start the review the interviewer must click the Review Completed Interview button in the Phone Participants activity Interviewer must review The review starts automatically when the interview finishes Defining the Introductory Script When an autodialer connects a telephone interviewer to a participant or for projects that do not use an autodialer when the interviewer requests a number to call interviewers are provided with an introductory text that they can read to the participant to explain the reason for the call Interviewer Server comes with a default text that is suitable for all surveys but you can define your own text that is more specific to the current project Note If the introductory text for most or all of your company s projects is always the same you might
48. Insert Item dialog box If you insert an item in a group the Insert Item dialog box shows only the item types that are can be inserted in the page 68 Chapter 1 When you ungroup questions Build removes the link at the point that you click For example if you click the Ungroup link after a question the link between that question and the next question is broken Depending on the question s position in the group this may mean that the questionnaire now contains two smaller groups rather than one group To Group Questions gt On the Overview tab click Group on Page between the two questions you want to group If you want to group more than two questions click on the first last question in the group then hold down the Ctrl key as you click on the last first question in the group Then click Group on Page anywhere between those two questions A white line appears to the left of the grouped questions To Ungroup Questions gt On the Overview tab click Ungroup between the question you want to ungroup and the question before or after it If the question is in the middle of a group you may need to ungroup the question from both the previous and the next questions in the group Deleting Questions gt On the Overview tab navigate to the question you want to delete gt Click the Delete button on the question s display box Moving Questions Up or Down e gt On the Overview tab navigate to the question you want to move
49. Overview tab under the heading Shared Lists Creating Shared Lists Setting up shared lists is like creating a single or multiple response question You give the list a name and enter the responses it will contain Shared lists may contain single choice multiple choice no answer don t know and refused to answer responses To Create a Shared List gt Click New List 43 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide ct holidays r User BARBARA Primary Language English United States List Apply Undo m Responses Enter one response on each line gt In Name optionally replace the default item name with a name of your choice gt In Responses type the response texts one per line See Question Limits for information about the maximum number of responses you can place in a list gt Select the Advanced tab Primary Language English United States Ifacil Apply Undo Responses Use the selections on left side together with the menu below to manipulate Move Up Move Down Insert Above Selection Insert Below Selection Delete Selected Append Change To Single Change To Multiple Ce Tex r ferme _pool Swimming pool Tene Response x 7 i Sauna Eana o Muiple Response x Jacuzzi acuzi Mutiple Response x Gym Gym Muttiple Response z gt In Type choose one of Single Response Multiple Response Don t Know No Answer or Refu
50. Settings at the end of this topic G m 155 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Using an Autodialer to Dial Phone Numbers To use an autodialer select either of the following options from the Dialing Options drop down list m IBM SPSS Dialer Extension Power dial for the interviewer screen In extension dialing the autodialer dials participants only when interviewers click the Start Dialing button in the Phone Participants activity This mode can result in longer wait times for interviewers but is unlikely to result in silent calls m IBM SPSS Dialer Group Dial for the interview in a group with optional predictive dialing In group predictive dialing the autodialer dials participants before interviewers are available to answer the connected calls That is the software predicts when interviewers will click the Start Dialing button This mode can deliver the highest interviewer productivity but might result in silent calls For more information about the difference between extension and group predictive dialing use the search function in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library documentation to search for the text How Does Autodialing Work and in the search results open the topic with that title The option to use an autodialer is displayed only if one or more dialers have been added to the Dialer Administration activity in IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Ser
51. Supervisor Position R901 Supervisor Access Number In the Supervisor Access Number field enter the telephone number for the remote supervisor and click OK For more information see Dialer Administration The Review Interviews Main Screen The main screen has three sections in the center at the top and on the left 205 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Figure 1 59 Review Interviews main screen 1D30002386 ry 555 RECALL 1S_Multimode Please rate the following characteristics of the service representative on a scale from 1to 5 If you did not deal with a service representative please choose 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 Poor FairGood Y Excellent N A ood Knowledge of the mat CM OOM OB 4 Courteousness 4 0 NO ee Oe 6 Ly Ereeminai G E p a ae 10 The Center of the Main Screen After you start the Review Interviews activity you use the options displayed in the center of the main screen to select the interview that you want to review You can also specify whether you want to review all questions or only text questions As you navigate through the interview the questions appear in the center of the main screen and show the answers that the interviewer entered The Top of the Main Screen When the review starts the frame at the top of the screen shows various details about the participant who was interviewed such as his or
52. The participant s phone number If you are uploading records for a telephone interviewing project and you want interviewers to be able to dial phone numbers automatically using a modem phone numbers must be formatted as follows Country RegionCode Area CityCode SubscriberNumber For example 44 12 3456 7890 for a subscriber in the United Kingdom The modem option might not work if the phone number is in any other format If your telephone interviewing project will use an autodialer a phone number must contain only the digits 0 to 9 and optionally preceded by a plus to present the international access code In addition the phone number can contain the visual separators SPACE and Visual separators are not allowed before the first digit PreviousInterviewerld The interviewer who last retrieved the record Used by the Sample Management script to return an appointment to the interviewer who arranged it PreviousQueue The name of the queue in which the record was previously held RecallTime The time in UTC that was set as the callback time for appointments that are set automatically by the Sample Management script ReturnTime The time at which the record was returned to Sample Management Screener Allows you to identify which respondents are the suitable candidates for the current survey Screener questions are designed to filter respondents If a respondent answers do not meet the Screen
53. This report provides an industry standard calculation for incidence CASRO Council of American Survey Research Organizations defines incidence as the number of potential respondents screened and eligible or qualified who agree to participate divided by the number of potential respondents screened m The numerator is the number of potential respondents screened and eligible or qualified who agree to participate This includes all contacts who have not been screened out by the screener section of the interview and who have not refused to participate m The denominator in the number of potential respondents screened including all attempts made that resulted in contact with the respondent wherein the eligibility of the contact to participate can be evaluated As a result no answers hang ups fax modem tri tones not home and busy signals are all excluded from the calculation Incidence is a significant factor in calculating the project cost and in monitoring call center performance Note The sample table must contain the Screener field in order for the incidence calculation to occur Refer to the Sample Table topic in the Data Collection Developer Library for more information on the Screener field 245 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide l i l ra IVAN THAT HAH i HN Overall Disposition Across Projects This report displays the last call outcome across projects for each participa
54. Variable Select Logical operator and select a New variable to filter on Logical operator New variable z select a new variable to filter on gt Expressions age ContainsAny E18_TO_24 E25_TO_34 Advanced Finish Cancel Help ema Helo You use the Filter on New Variable dialog box to combine characteristics from multiple variables into a single expression This dialog box appears when you define a characteristic using a variable and then click the Next button When you create an expression using multiple variables you can combine the characteristics using either the And operator or the Or operator For example you could create a quota for respondents who drink Assam tea and who normally make tea using tea bags The And operator specifies that respondents must have all the listed characteristics The Or operator specifies that respondents must have at least one of the characteristics to be counted towards the quota Logical operator Choose the operator that you want to use to combine the quota characteristics New variable Choose the variable that you want to add to the expression from the drop down list Expressions Displays the variables and characteristics that you have chosen for the expression Defining Expression Quotas gt Choose the Expression Quotas tab 324 Chapter 2 gt Drag a variable from the List Pane onto the Expression Quotas tab This opens the Filter On dialog box The
55. Wait Total wait idle Busy Average Interviewer ID DPMAdmin 0d 00 01 14 0c 00 00 16 Oc 00 00 03 Oc 00 00 55 Oc 00 00 16 100 22 4 74 Note Refer to the Across project reports topic in the JBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library for more detailed information regarding across project reports Call Outcome Status This report shows a frequency table of call outcomes Each cell shows a count and a column percentage For projects that use an autodialer the call outcomes include those selected by the autodialer 235 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Call Outcome 47143 12072 Canceled Dialer busy Error during interview ae fm 20084 Timed out or stopped 14938 Dialer Statistics This report provides dialer specific statistics over the past eight hours Base The total of telephone numbers dialed Number of connects The total number of successful connections The percentage of successful connections in relation to the base is also provided Number of silent calls The total number of silent calls The percentage of silent calls in relation to the base is also provided Silent rate The rate of silent calls in relation to successful connections Average busy time minutes The average busy time also known as talk time for all interviewers Average wait time seconds The average wait time for all interviewers Average idle
56. Without IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration You can run Build from IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration or as a standalone program outside Interviewer Server Administration When you run Build from Interviewer Server Administration it automatically opens the project that is current when you select the Build link and lets you work only on this project If you want to work on another 11 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide project you must close Build return to Interviewer Server Administration to choose the project and then restart Build If you are a Scriptwriter this is the way you will normally use Build When you run Build by typing its URL into your browser Build starts with no project selected so you can either open an existing questionnaire or create a new one If you are an administrator this is the way to create library files of general questions that can be loaded into any project For more information see the topic Running Build Outside IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration on p 73 This difference in the way Build works means that the options that are available in the File menu will differ according to how you started Build Switching between Build and IBM SPSS Data Collection Base Professional Questionnaires can be created and edited in Base Professional as well as in Build and you can switch between applications while working on
57. a single questionnaire For more information see the topic Switching Between Build and IBM SPSS Data Collection Base Professional on p 69 Starting Build To Start Build from within IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration gt Choose the project you want to create and click Build To Start Build outside Interviewer Server Administration gt In your browser type http server_name spssmr InterviewBuilder The Main Screen The working area of the main screen is divided into five tabbed sections each designed to present different aspects of the questionnaire Overview tab Displays the contents of each question in the questionnaire and provides facilities for inserting deleting and moving questions You can also use this tab to select questions for editing and to link two or more questions to form a group Edit tab Displays basic details usually name text and choices about a single question Use this tab to create the basic content of your questionnaire and then insert more detail by working on the Advanced tab Advanced tab Displays full details for a single question and provides facilities for defining routing specifying whether a question must be answered whether it is a standard or dummy question and the order in which responses are to be displayed during interviews For grids you also specify whether the subjects are the rows or columns of the grid For numerics you specify the range of val
58. an autodialer you can use the Interviewer Monitoring activity to monitor the percentage of silent calls that are occurring 273 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Note An interviewer is defined as a I BM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration user that has opened the Phone Participants activity Starting Interviewer Monitoring gt From the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration menu choose Phone gt Interviewer Monitoring The Interviewer Monitoring activity opens and the Interviewers tab is displayed When Autodialers are Used If the call center that you are working in uses autodialers to call participants a dialog box might open and request that you enter a position name as shown below Figure 1 64 Position dialog box Z Login Info Web Page Dialog x Specify your position details in the field s below to enable audio monitoring for interviewers connected to the same dialer Click cancel to continue without audio monitoring Supervisor Position Poss In the Supervisor Position field enter the position name and click OK If you click Cancel instead the Interview Monitoring activity will still open but only visual monitoring will be possible audio monitoring will not be available For more information see Dialer Administration Setting up Monitoring By default the Interviewer Monitoring activity can be opened by anyone who is a member
59. and problem emails Editing an Existing Job You can edit an existing job to change any of its parameters or simply to check them before you run the job Any changes you make are saved automatically when you click OK The jobs list shows the status of each job This can be Incomplete The job does not have all the necessary parameters specified Ready The job is ready for running Sent The job has been run once Sent n The job has been run n times gt In the jobs list double click the job you want to inspect or change or select the job and click the Edit icon This opens the Email settings dialog box and displays the job s settings gt Make your changes if any and click OK Deleting Jobs x gt In the list of jobs select the job you want to delete and click the Delete icon The project is deleted immediately There is no prompt for confirmation 128 Chapter 7 Phone Surveys Phone Surveys lets you specify the following information for a telephone interviewing project Which Sample Management fields are required in the participant records which fields should be displayed on the interview page and which of the displayed fields interviewers can edit Whether soft appointments that is appointments that are set automatically for numbers that are busy or unanswered when called should take precedence over appointments that have been arranged between participants and interviewers The amount of time
60. and select an appropriate project from the project list 203 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide 2 Click on Files and download the appropriate catiCallOutcomes_ lt Project Name gt mdd file the file should be checked into a shared location 3 Open the catiCallOutcomes_ lt Project Name gt mdd file in SPSS Translation Utility and display the Analysis context 4 From the SPSS Translation Utility menu select Tools gt Add Remove Languages 5 Add the translated text in the appropriate language column 6 Save the catiCallOutcomes_ lt Project Name gt mdd file 7 Back in the Interviewer Server Administration Files activity upload the catiCallOutcomes_ lt Project Name gt mdd file you just saved Make sure you select No when asked to rename the file and select the Check In option 8 Login as an interviewer who has access to the updated project and ensure the Interviewer Server Administration Options gt Preferences are set to the newly added language 9 Test within the Phone Participants activity The newly added call outcome translations should display as expected Notes m Ifthe catiCallOutcomes_ lt Project Name gt mdd file is updated during active Phone data collection interviewers will need to exit and reenter the Phone Participants activity before the translated call outcomes will display m To update the default mdd for all new projects update the catiCallOutcomes_default mdd file locat
61. as well m For interviews that require the keyboard only All the answers in the list are numbered If only one answer can be selected from the list the numbers will be enclosed in parentheses for example 3 If more than one answer can be selected the numbers will be enclosed in brackets for example 3 To select an answer press the appropriate number key To select multiple answers press the appropriate number keys in any order The answer or answers that you select will be highlighted in the question m For interviews that use the mouse If only one answer can be selected from the list a radio button is displayed next to each answer If more than one answer can be selected a check box is displayed next to each answer To select an answer click on the appropriate radio button or check box To cancel a single choice answer select a different answer To cancel a multiple choice answer select the same answer again When answering multiple choice questions be aware of the following Some multiple choice questions that allow multiple answers might include answers that are shown in bold text These answers cannot be combined with any other answer in the list 209 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide m Ifthe list contains an answer called Other followed by a text box first select the answer and then type the words in the text box For interviews that require the keyboard only the cursor will aut
62. audio monitoring If you intend to use the Interviewing Monitoring activity in Interviewer Server and want audio monitoring to be available you must assign a valid position name to each station on which the Interviewing Monitoring activity will be opened When a supervisor starts monitoring an interviewer the autodialer will connect the interviewer s telephone call to the extension number associated with the position so that the supervisor can hear the interview Note that audio monitoring is possible only when the interviewer s and supervisor s positions are associated with the same autodialer Position names are assigned to stations used for audio monitoring in one of two ways m By an administrator Make sure that you have been assigned the Interviewer Monitoring activity feature Can set up supervisor stations Then open Interviewer Monitoring and when prompted enter the appropriate position name This needs to be done only once on each station Any supervisors who subsequently open Interviewer Monitoring on that station and who have not been assigned Can set up supervisor stations will not be prompted for a position name m By the supervisor Assign the Interviewer Monitoring activity feature Can set up supervisor stations to supervisors Every time that a supervisor opens Interviewer Monitoring he or she must either confirm the position name entered by the previous user or enter a new position name For more inf
63. be set to IBM SPSS Data Collection f foldername Pathname of the project s source folder d DPMservername Names the initial DPM server w web service URL Activate via the web service URL For example http lt servername gt spssmr activatewebservice activatewebservice asmx l Display a login dialog box Display help Example Activation Commands The following command displays the Activate dialog box activate The following command activates using the myactdoc xml Activate Document activate a c myactdoc xml The following command activates using the myactdoc xml Activate Document and writes any output to the log txt file activate a c myactdoc xml gt log txt The following command activates using the myactdoc xml Activate Document but displays a login dialog box before activation starts activate a c myactdoc xml 1 307 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide The following command displays the Activate dialog box with the Project Id field containing museum and the Source Files field containing c myprojects museum activate g p museum f c myprojects museum The following command displays help activate Converting Activation ini Files to xml Format If you used command line activation prior to version 2 3 and you want to reuse the activation ini files with Activate you can convert them using the ActivateIniToXml tool
64. choose Yes Typically the responses to hidden questions are set by statements defined in IOM Script items They provide an efficient method of merging the responses to a number of related questions 20 Chapter 1 into a single variable for use elsewhere in the questionnaire For this reason the response list for the hidden question often consists of all the responses to the questions that are to be merged Note Because they are not displayed hidden questions are not valid in question groups In Question Type choose whether this is a single or multiple response question By default the setting for this property matches the data type of the item you selected to create this question that is if you chose Single Response then Single Response will be selected automatically for this property You should only need to change this setting if you want to change the question type after the question has been defined Changing the question type here changes the overall question type in the questionnaire and also changes all the individual response types in the response list In Response Order choose the order in which responses should be presented Choose Default to present responses in the order they appear in the response list Random to present responses in a random order Rotated to present responses in rotation so that each response takes a turn at being first in the list or Reversed to present responses in reverse order so that the last re
65. close the dialog box before you click Start Dialing However if a problem with your computer caused your browser to close restart Phone Participants and if available use the Get last contact option to reconnect to the participant 187 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Other Outcomes For all other outcomes choose an appropriate call outcome from the list on the left of the screen Most call outcome texts are self explanatory but your supervisor will probably go through the list with you at the start of the project especially if the list contains specialized options When you select any call outcome other than the one to make an appointment the telephone call is automatically terminated click the Start Dialing button to connect to another participant However if the autodialer detects that the call is being answered by a fax machine it will terminate the call immediately If this happens you must still select the Fax call outcome You might sometimes be prompted to select a call outcome without being connected to a participant This can happen in the following situations m You clicked the Start Dialing button in a situation where the participant s details are already displayed on the screen for example if a participant s record contains comments for you to read or you are attempting to reconnect to a participant after being disconnected In this situation you must select the appropriate outcome
66. content of the dialog box varies according to the variable type gt Define the quota characteristics and selection criteria as described in the following topics m Categorical variables m Numeric variables m Text variables m Boolean variables gt Ifthe expression is based on two or more variables or values click Next otherwise click Finish to close the dialog box For more information see the topic Expression Quotas using Two or More Variables on p 325 The quota appears on the Expression Quotas tab with a unique name and a default target of 100 gt In Target type the target you want to set gt In Type choose one of the following from the drop down list m Normal This is an ordinary quota so the sum of pending and completed interviews for this quota must never exceed the target Once the sum of pending and completed interviews for this quota matches the target all subsequent interviews for this quota will fail If any of the pending interviews do not complete further interviews will be required to meet the target m Allow over Allow the sum of pending and completed interviews for this quota to exceed the target New interviews may be started for this quota until the number of completed interviews matches the target If all the pending interviews complete the target may be exceeded Once the target has been met any new interviews for this quota will fail the quota test and will be dealt with as specified by the scriptwriter us
67. current project An appointment schedule can be used to specify the interviewer shifts and holidays ensuring that appointments can be made when interviewers are working There can be multiple appointment schedules for a distributed site Appointment schedules may differ between projects and are therefore project specific For example interviewers may be scheduled to call business projects during the day and consumer projects in the evening Note In order to use the Appointment tab options in the Phone Survey activity you must first assign one time zone and one appointment schedule to at least one applicable user a u Call Times A Overides Call Outcomes inteniew Settings Dialer Settings EE Manage Phone Survey Project Id UPLOADSAMPLE Project Name UploadSample Description Project Expiry UTC Time Date Time Appointment Schedule New Schedule Load Template Save As New Sub Schedule Delete Sub Schedule Regular Shifts E There is no regular shifts Date Overrides amp There is no date override 146 Chapter 7 gt gt gt Project Expiry UTC Time Provides options for specifying a project expiration time m Date The project expiration date You can manually enter a date in the format mm dd yyyy or you can click the down arrow to display a calendar and select a date m Time The project expiration time This indicates the exact time of day
68. distribution Overall Disposition Across Projects Last call outcome statistics across projects Queue Status Queue status by group with calculations Queue Status By Time Zone Queue status crossed with time zone Review Calls Cross tabulate call information Sample Usage Number of records in each queue Sample Usage Across Projects Number of records in each queue across projects Time Zone Status Active Inactive times zones based on valid call times or day parts Running Reports When you run a report you can choose whether the report will include the following Real or test interview data or both interview types m A chart m All records or only records that relate to a specific time period m Project sample information or data Running a report gt From the Tools menu choose Options This opens the Options dialog box as shown below 254 Chapter 7 Z Options Web Page Dialog 9 9 o Vv Stacked Bar bd gt By default many reports include data only for real interviews If you want your report to include data only for test interviews or for both real and test interviews change the value of Data Filter as required If your project was created using version 3 0 or earlier of IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server or you intend to run one of the three reports that are related to the use of an autodialer skip the previous step your report will always include data for both real and test interviews Not
69. error message Yes s v1 2 project No y User enters gt requirements amp clicks Activate Correct errors and reactivate A AA No Activate Master to other interviewing servers Activation uccessful Yes v Delete files from Option to run an Temp interview 117 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide When you start Launch the key points of the activation process are as follows If the Users folder does not contain a mdd file Launch is unable to start If the file is not present in the Users folder but is present in the Shared folder then it is copied into the Users folder and activation can begin Launch then checks whether there are files for this project in FMRoot Master that are not present in FMRoot Shared If this is the case activation fails since it is possible that the project may be a version 1 2 project that has not been upgraded to work with later versions Once the file checks have been carried out you can enter your activation requirements Click Activate when you are ready to activate the project Launch checks the project s template itm files to ensure they contain well formed HTML If files are not well formed Launch displays a message box listing the names of the files that are incorrect Each filename is followed by a warning icon a symbol in a triangle which you can hover
70. exceeded if all those interviews complete successfully Interviews that start after the target has been met will be terminated in the usual way Counter quotas Interviews may be counted for a cell without the cell being used for quota control You can use this type of quota for null dk ref and Other Specify categories where quota control is not required m Table or expression quotas Quotas may be defined in tabular form or in text form using an expression builder Sample management quotas You can define quotas based on variables present in the sample files Sample data and questionnaire data can be combined in the same quota if required Block setting of targets Groups of quota cells with identical targets and other settings can be preselected so that the specifications for those cells can be entered once and then applied automatically to each selected cell m Reusing quota files Once you have set up a quota file you can reuse it in other projects that have identical quotas For further information about the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server quota control system refer to Quota Control in the Interviewer Server section of JBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library Starting IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup needs a questionnaire definition mdd file in order to run This tells it which questions are available and what responses each question allows If th
71. exist in the library at the same level as the questionnaire file itself For example if you copy the questionnaire into the Human Resources library folder you must create the template subfolder in the Human Resources subfolder too The name of the template subfolder must be the same as that of the questionnaire file but with a _Files extension For example if your questionnaire is called EmpSat mdd you must name the template subfolder EmpSat htm_Files It is a good idea to create this as a hidden folder so that it does not appear in the library structure that users see in Build 78 Chapter 1 For an example of this structure use Windows Explorer to browse to the Ratings and Frequencies folder in FMRoot Shared Questionnaire Library Items in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server installation folder As the illustration shows the folder contains eight templates of which two have template subfolders Ratings and Frequencies 2 oe iol x File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help ay Folders E FMRoot i O Master lt Stars Rating Question mdd_Files E O Roles s Point Agree Question mdd E Shared s Point Satisfaction Question mdd cati Point Agree Question mdd E Projects comfort Question mdd z B Questionnaire Library Items Frequency Question mdd Customer Satisfaction ood Bad Rating Question mdd Demographics miey Rating Question mdd Human Resources stars Rati
72. expression to select male respondents gender ContainsAny MALE To create this expression you would Click the Variables button and choose gender from the list Click the button Click the Functions button and choose ContainsAny from the list that appears Click the button Choose MALE from the list that appears Click the button Click the button 328 Chapter 2 Note This example uses a simple expression that could be created using the Filter on Categorical Variable dialog box However because it was created using the Advanced method it can only be edited on the Advanced Filter Specification dialog box Comparison Operators in Expression Quotas When you build an expression you can use the comparison operators to compare the value in a variable with a specified value of the same type For example you can compare the value in a numeric variable with a numeric value and the value in a text variable with a text string The operators are also valid with other variable types Refer to the IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library documentation for more details The following table lists the comparison operators Operator Meaning Used with Equal to Numeric and text variables lt gt Not equal to Numeric and text variables gt Greater than Numeric variables lt Less than Numeric variables Ja Greater than or equal to Numeric variables Eg Less than or e
73. flag set to true to define a quota for respondents who choose all of a number of listed categories from a multiple response question and no others 330 Chapter 2 For example you would define a quota for respondents who drink water and nothing else as drink ContainsAll Water True AnswerCount Use the AnswerCount function to define a quota based on the number of answers chosen from a multiple response list The syntax is variable AnswerCount numeric condition For example to define a quota for respondents who can name more than five brands of fizzy drinks fizzy AnswerCount gt 5 Logical Operators in Expression Quotas And Or When a quota definition is based on data from two or more variables you define the overall expression by combining two or more sub expressions using logical operators Each sub expression defines a single characteristic within the quota For example a quota for young men is a combination of a gender characteristic and an age characteristic Logical operators that join quota expressions are And and Or The Not logical operator negates expressions Combine two sub expressions with the And operator when you want to define a quota for respondents who satisfy both sub expressions The syntax is Expression1 And Expression2 For example you would define a quota for young male respondents as follows gender ContainsAny MALE And age ContainsAny E1720 YEARS E2124 YEARS
74. folders within the Shared section of the library Some questionnaires are complete and ready to use with no further design work required while others require minor customization such as replacing a marker for a company name or product with your own company or product name A third group are smaller questionnaires that you would probably import into your own questionnaire files and then expand to form more detailed surveys The exact structure of the main library sections will be determined by the person responsible for maintaining the library but it will probably consist of a number of folders for different types of questionnaires Each folder may contain subfolders or questionnaires in much the same way that you organize your files on your hard drive You can use the library in the following ways m Save your own questionnaires to existing folders in the library Import library questionnaires into questionnaires that you are designing 48 Chapter 7 Saving Questionnaires to the Library gt v v You can save the questionnaire you are working on as a library file Once the file has been created the questionnaire remains open for you to work on Any changes that you make are only saved to the questionnaire file in the project s folder within your IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration user folder the library copy of the questionnaire is not updated unless you re save the questionnaire to the library
75. for respondents who choose at least the specified number of the selected categories Specify the number in the box that appears to the right Not available for single response variables m Atmost The quota is for respondents who choose no more than the specified number of categories Specify the number in the box that appears to the right Not available for single response variables m Between The quota is for respondents who choose a certain number of selected categories Specify the minimum and maximum number of categories in the boxes that appear to the right Not available for single response variables Categories are selected Select the categories of the variable that define the characteristics of this quota Next Click to add another variable to the expression Finish Click to close the dialog box Cancel Click to close the dialog box without creating the quota expression Filter on Numeric Variable Dialog Box Figure 2 4 Filter on Numeric Variable dialog box Filter on Numeric Variable Create the filter and press the Finish button If you want to filter on more variables press the Next button Filter on the numeric variable Eisis E Include cases where the value is fless than v fo visits lt 0 Finish Cancel Help You can use expressions to define quotas based on values in numeric variables For example you can create a quota for people who are under 24 years of age or y
76. for the topic Adding Properties to User Property Groups The Additional Fields tab lists all fields in the file you are uploading However you can change the settings only for those fields that are not already mapped to required columns Note If you want to use the Call Outcome by Segment and Calls by Segment reports in the Phone activity to display data about segments that is groups or categories of your choice you must upload segment information from your text file into a column called Segment in the sample table For more information about segments see About Segments 90 Chapter 7 PreviousQueue AppointmentTime RecallTime ReturnTime Try Count AppointmentTryCount PhoneNumber InterviewMode CallOutcome TimeZone Comments Name Address Email Gender Age Test Vv M M Vv Vv Vv Vv a Vv M A Vv A m Lg M E Vv Id Mapped to required field Nyvarchar PreviousQueue Mapped to required field Nvarchar AppointmentTime Mapped to required field DateTime RecallTime Mapped to required field DateTime ReturnTime Mapped to required field DateTime TryCount Mapped to required field Int AppointmentTryCount Mapped to required field Int PhoneNumber Mapped to required field Nyarchar InterviewMode Mapped to required field Nvarchar CallOutcome Mapped to required field Nyvarchar TimeZone Mapped to required field Nvarchar Comments Mapped to required field Nt
77. from Script Library D C lom Script advanced Import from Library 61 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide gt Choose Insert from Script Library and click OK This displays the Script Library dialog box Z Script Library Web Page Dialog x Insert Interview Script Interview Script Items Add a page title Change language based on language question Create a constant sum question from a grid Create a ranking question from a grid Format grid Interview Script Item Description Itttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttttt Interview Script Inserted from Build Script Name Add a GoTo button i Description Adds a GoTo button so a respondent can go to a previous question by name This is often useful in CATI interveiws This script requires no edits IOM Navigations Add NavigationTypes nvGoto LEAKE EEEETEEKKEEKEEKKEEEEEEEEKEEEKEKEEEEKEKEKEKKKEKEEKKKREEKKEKKEKKKEEEEE gt Inthe Interview Scripts frame select the script you want to use The script is displayed in the Interview Script Item Description frame gt Click OK to insert the script statements in the questionnaire gt Ifthe script indicates that it requires customization make the necessary changes Language Codes for the Change Language Script Snippet The following table shows the 3 character language codes for many of the world s languages
78. gt Click the arrow buttons on the question s display box to move the question up or down within the questionnaire Moving a Question using Cut and Paste J gt On the Overview tab click Cut on the question you want to move gt Navigate to the question above or below which you want to insert the question and click Paste Duplicating a Question using Copy and Paste 45 gt On the Overview tab click Copy on the question you want to copy gt Navigate to the question below which you want to insert the question and click Paste The duplicate question is given a unique name which is the original name followed by a number 69 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Switching Between Build and IBM SPSS Data Collection Base Professional When you create a questionnaire with Build you define the questionnaire s contents by filling in online forms As you do this Build creates a questionnaire script mdd file The file has a metadata section that defines the questions and responses and a collection of routing items that specify how the questions and responses will be used in interviews for example the order in which questions will be asked which questions will be asked of which respondents and so on Build is designed to be easy to use and to provide facilities for creating the majority of questionnaires There are some things that it cannot do so your company may use IBM SPSS Data Collection Base Pr
79. individual records in log files 298 Chapter 7 Figure 1 75 View Logs tab Gi User barbara Download Logs View Settings oye is View Logs select DateTime AppGroup Project RespondentID InterviewID LogEntry from vdata where loglevel lt fatal error order by DateTime Log Files DateTime AppGroup 25 10 2007 13 04 24 MON 25 10 2007 13 04 24 MON SessionData are SessionData 25 10 2007 13 04 24 MON SPSSMR Mana 25 10 2007 13 04 35 ISE ERROR Error 25 10 2007 14 58 54 WLB vnSddaS5SxibpitSSzaju EXCEPTION 25 10 2007 15 26 49 WLB vnSddaSSxibpitSSzaju EXCEPTION 25 10 2007 17 08 18 WLB wOpmubSSasmrry552ki4 EXCEPTION 25 10 2007 18 06 13 ISE ERROR Error X Initially records are filtered according to the settings on the View Settings tab so that for example you may see only records from certain files and for certain dates Within these restrictions you can request records from a selected machine only and can filter the records using an SQL query This allows you for example to select only records that are flagged as belonging to a particular project or that relate to events between noon and Spm on a certain day The default is to display all records logged at the Info Warning Error or Fatal logging levels and to sort them in ascending date and time order If you want more information about logging levels refer to To View Log Records Select the View Logs tab In Machines choose
80. is named LATEST If there are no versions this selects the unversioned document LASTLOCKED Include the most recent locked version in the MDM Document EBNF Definition The syntax for specifying the version or versions to open can be specified using the following Extended Backus Naur Form EBNF which is a notation for specifying the syntax of a language succinctly and precisely lt versionname gt lt version gt lt vername gt lt range gt lt range gt lt range_item gt lt range_item gt lt range_item gt lt version gt kversion gt lt version gt lt version gt lt vername gt lt vername gt LATEST LASTLOCKED lt vername gt Any positive integer value Interviewer Monitoring The Interviewer Monitoring activity provides you with two key features to help you manage the performance of your teams m For the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server projects that you have access to a list of all interviewers together with statistics relating to their performance This view can be set to refresh automatically m The ability to monitor an interviewer In this view your screen automatically synchronizes with the interviewer s screen so that you can see the question being asked by the interviewer If the interviewer is using an autodialer to make calls you can also listen to the interview In addition if one or more of your Interviewer Server projects uses
81. keyboard only or you might need to use both the keyboard and the mouse For reviews that require the keyboard only the following keys have special uses Key Use Page Down Display the next question Page Up Display the previous question Tab If more than question is displayed on the screen move the cursor to the next question Ctrl Tab If more than question is displayed on the screen move the cursor to the previous question Enter For text questions displays the next question Shift Enter Insert new lines within a text question s response Up Arrow Use only for questions other than text questions If more than question is displayed on the screen move the cursor to the previous question on the screen same as Ctrl Tab If only one question is displayed on the screen display the previous question same as Page Up Space and Dash Hyphen Can be used between multiple answers for multiple response categorical questions For interviews that use the mouse click the Next button to display the next question and click the Previous button to display the previous question General Procedure for Conducting Reviews The interviewing program displays error messages usually in red if you enter an invalid answer and waits for you to enter another response For some questions typically multiple choice questions changing the answer could cause additional questions to appear that did not appear when
82. left of the record that you want to edit Click the Edit icon in the top right corner of the list of records as shown below The Edit dialog opens 101 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide J Edit items Web Page Dialog cowPeTeo a a Frese sl Poososta 171556 es Format Empty value Note When you click on a field the information pane at the bottom of the Edit dialog tells you whether the corresponding column in the sample table is a text column a numeric column or a date column The information pane also shows the minimum and maximum values for numeric columns and the maximum length for text columns Change any of the values to new values If you change a date field the new value must be in one of three formats yyyy mm dd yyyy mm dd hh mi or yyyy mm dd hh mi ss If you specify only the date a time of 00 00 00 is assumed If you change the PhoneNumber field and your project uses modems or an autodialer to dial participants phone numbers make sure that the new phone number is in the correct format and doesn t contain any invalid characters For more information see the topic Mapping Fields to Required Columns in the Sample Table on p 84 102 Chapter 1 gt gt If a field contains a value but you want the field to be empty select the check box to the right of the field under the heading Set to Empty Note The information pane at the bottom of the
83. local laws sometimes allow monitoring by someone within the same legal entity as the interviewer for example a supervisor who works for the same organization as the interviewer monitoring is still possible In addition this icon will also be displayed if the interviewer is reviewing an interview The Monitoring Allowed column in the Real Time display will also tell you if an interviewer can be monitored If the Monitoring Allowed column is not shown you can add it For more information see the topic Customizing the Real Time Display on p 276 To Select an Interviewer to Monitor gt Inthe Interviewers Real Time display click on the record of an interviewer who can be monitored 280 Chapter 7 The interviewer record is highlighted Note If the Real Time display contains more than one record for the same interviewer which can occur if the Phone Participants activity closes abnormally click on the record that has a lower value in the Session Time column If you do not click on the correct record you will not see any interviews when the Monitor tab opens gt In the upper right of the Real Time display click on the Monitor button as shown below Figure 1 68 Monitor button Dad The Monitor tab opens and the current question is displayed The Monitor Tab Figure 1 69 Monitor tab Interviewer Monitoring Project Id IJSMULTIMODE Project Name 1S_Multimode Interviewer ijs Phone E101 Document Ref
84. make a call Click the Next Contact button as shown below Figure 1 42 Next Contact button a If for any reason you do not want to dial the number you have been allocated click the Cancel Contact button Figure 1 43 Cancel Contact button ge Then click the Next Contact button again when you are ready to make another call If there is a Dial Contact button as shown below click the button to use a modem to dial the participant s phone number Figure 1 44 Dial Contact button Ro If there is no Dial Contact button dial the phone number manually If the phone is answered do the following m Ifthe participant details at the top of the page show the participant s name ask to speak to that person m Read the introductory text m Depending on the options that your supervisor has set you might be required to ask the participant for consent to having the phone call monitored and recorded by your supervisor If so make sure that you record the participant s response by selecting either the Yes or the No option above the introductory text 189 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Interviewing the participant If the participant agrees to be interviewed now click the Start Interview button Figure 1 45 Start Interview button gt The first question will be displayed For more information see the topic Conducting interviews on p 194 Complete the interview If you used the D
85. manually Conducting interviews The interviewing program displays the questions that the current participant needs to answer Depending on the complexity of the questionnaire and the answers that the participant gives the questions that you see might not be the same for every person that you call Sometimes the responses that you see for a question will vary according to the participant s answers to previous questions Often your supervisor will go through the questionnaire with you before you start interviewing so you know what sorts of answers are valid for each question Using the keyboard or the mouse Depending on the settings for the Phone Participants activity you might be able to conduct interviews using the keyboard only or you might need to use both the keyboard and the mouse Your supervisor will tell you which of these methods you should use For interviews that require the keyboard only the following keys have special uses Key Use Page Down Display the next question Page Up Display the previous question 195 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Key Use Tab If more than question is displayed on the screen move the cursor to the next question Ctrl Tab If more than question is displayed on the screen move the cursor to the previous question Enter For text questions displays the next question Shift Enter Insert new lines within a text questi
86. maximum number of responses you can place in a list To Set Advanced Options gt Select the Advanced tab 39 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Project holidays T BARBARA Properties Require a response to this question Yes z Hide this question No v Grid Layout Arrange subjects in columns Arrange subjects in rows Subjects Responses Response Subject1 Response2 Subject2 Response3 Subject3 Response Order Default gt Display Responses all Responses 7 at z Number Type integer C Real Range of Response Minimum Value Maximum Value Question Subjects Use the selections on left side together with the menu below to manipulate Move Up Move Down Insert Above Selection Insert Below Selection Delete Selected Append Insert Shared List m Neme Subject Tent C Bune fare YO Che kb OoOO O Responses Use the selections on left side together with the menu below to manipulate Move Up Move Down Insert Above Selection Insert Below Selection Delete Selected Append gt In Require a response to this question choose whether or not this question must be answered Note If a question may be left unanswered and you do not insert a No Answer response in the category list Build inserts one automatically This is because the interview script that is generated from the Build questionnaire requires this in order for respondents to be able to click Next withou
87. mode if you wish Some projects may use a combination of automated and modem or manual dialing You can still select the automatically select next contact option for these projects but interviewers who are using the dialer will need to cancel the Auto contact selection check box on the interviewing screen otherwise they will not be able to stop the dialer making calls when they reach the end of their shift or need to take a break Starting surveys after a disconnection When an Dialer option is selected you can select the Can start a survey after being disconnected from a call option to specify that interviewers can start interviews even when respondents are disconnected from a call This can be useful for example when the survey contains interviewer instructions at the end allowing the interviewer to continue to the required instructions Interviewer Monitoring The Interviewer Monitoring activity in Interviewer Server Administration can be used by call center supervisors to monitor and record interviews while they are in progress Depending on your local laws or your organization s policy you can configure monitoring for three different scenarios Scenario To Specify This Monitoring and recording are not allowed for this Clear the Enable monitoring recording check box project Monitoring and recording are always allowed for Select the Enable monitoring recording check box this project and clear the The interviewer
88. of answers to one or more questions can be specified using If Goto items Routing that must be followed by all respondents can be defined using a standard Goto item m Library files Questions that are common to a number of questionnaires can be saved in the library and can be imported wherever they are needed Scripting statements for the Routing section Questionnaires have two sections The Metadata section defines the questions and the Routing section determines how and when the questions will be displayed Build creates a simple Routing section based on the order you have defined the questions in the questionnaire but you will usually want to insert other statements in the Routing section as well Build provides IOM Script and Insert from Script Library items for inserting code in the Routing section of the questionnaire m Print preview You can display an image of the printed questionnaire User and questionnaire options You can set defaults for certain Build parameters both for yourself and for specific questionnaires Questionnaires are stored as mdd files and can be translated for multilingual interviewing You can set a default primary language for all questionnaires or you can define the primary language separately for each questionnaire when you create it When you create an interviewing questionnaire or print a questionnaire this is the language that will be used if there are no translations available Using Build With and
89. of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling i the exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs including this one and ii the mutual use of the information which has been exchanged should contact IBM Software Group Attention Licensing 233 S Wacker Dr Chicago IL 60606 USA Licensed Materials Property of IBM Copyright 338 IBM Corporation 2000 2011 339 Notices Such information may be available subject to appropriate terms and conditions including in some cases payment of a fee The licensed program described in this document and all licensed material available for it are provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement IBM International Program License Agreement or any equivalent agreement between us Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment Therefore the results obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly Some measurements may have been made on development level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems Furthermore some measurements may have been estimated through extrapolation Actual results may vary Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment Information concerning non IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products their published announce
90. on Categorical Variable Create the filter and press the Finish button If you want to filter on more variables press the Next button Filter on the categorical variable E z Include cases where Any of these hd categories are selected ER Female Female gender ContainsAny Male You can use expressions to define quotas based on categories from single response and multiple response variables and grid subvariables For example you can set up an expression that includes male respondents or includes respondents who usually drink Assam or Darjeeling tea Filter on the categorical variable Displays the variable that you dragged onto the Expression Quotas tab To use a different variable click the arrow and choose another from the drop down list Include cases where Specifies how to determine whether the categories that you are about to select will be part of the current quota expression m Any ofthese The quota is for respondents who choose at least one of the selected categories m None of these The quota is for respondents who do not choose any of the selected categories All of these The quota is for respondents who choose all of the selected categories Not available for single response variables 320 Chapter 2 m Exactly these The quota is for respondents who choose all of the selected categories and no others Not available for single response variables Atleast The quota is
91. on the project you are working on If you have templates that are specific to the current project this is where to store them so that the Launch activity can find them Build does not have a central repository for picture files Instead it looks for them in a folder that it refers to as My Images This corresponds to the project s folder within your Interviewer Server Administration user folder so My Images for project 1 is not the same as My Images for project 2 When you click the button for associating a picture with a response or a presentation template with a question the dialog box that you see displays all the files that are available for this project Some will be shared and others will be specific to the current project If the file you want is not listed you will need to upload it before you can use it You can also download files onto your computer if you need to edit them for example if you want to change a template s page layout or color scheme Once you have made your changes you can upload the file to replace the original or rename it and then upload it To Upload a File into the Project s Folder 51 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide gt On the Select dialog box click Upload This opens a standard Windows Choose file dialog box gt Locate the file you want to upload and click Open The file s name is added to the list of filenames on the right of the Select dialog box and can now
92. or more questions Tables can be filtered based on the responses to questions in the questionnaire or on interview status for example only include completed interviews Export the data Once interviewing has finished and you want to run a full analysis on the data you use Export Data to export the data in a variety of formats for analysis with an activity of your choice For more information see the topic Export Data on p 261 Managing Your Work This topic lists points to bear in mind when creating and working on projects that you are or will be sharing with other users For further information on these points refer to JBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration User s Guide m When you create a new project you can use the Permissions tab to specify which roles user groups can access the project If you forget to do this or you need to change your choices ask your IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server administrator to do it for you 9 Build IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide m Files are created and updated in your user folder If you want the files to become available to other users you must check them in to the shared folder There is no need to do this every time you change or create a file so for example you can build a questionnaire using Build test it refine it and then retest without checking anything in When you have finished building the questionnaire or the fi
93. records are called at specific times of the day in order to increase the chance of success in reaching participants Note If you have an existing project that uses pre version 5 6 sample management scripts you can setup day parts but they will not be recognized The use of day parts requires version 5 6 or higher sample management scripts 143 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide UploadSample z an u dmin Fields Parameters Ordering J Call Outcomes Dialer Settings ea e Manage Phone Survey Project Id UPLOADSAMPLE Project Name UploadSample Description alid participant call times using 24 hour clock Start hh mm End hh mm 00 00 23 59 00 00 23 59 Number of times to try each participant record single Maximum tries 3 using day parts New Day Parts Load Template Save As Day Parts There is no day parts Weekday Allows you to specify valid weekday participant call times m Start hh mm The earliest time at which participants may be called on weekdays Enter an appropriate start time m End hh mm The latest time at which participants may be called on weekdays Enter an appropriate end time Weekend Allows you to specify valid weekend participant call times m Start hh mm The earliest time at which participants may be called on weekends Enter an appropriate start time m End hh mm The latest time at
94. redo Quota Setup makes the Redo feature unavailable Choosing Your Working Language When you work on a multilingual project IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup displays question and response texts in the project s base language If you would prefer to work in one of the project s other languages you may do so To Choose Your Working Language 315 IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup gt Choose Tools gt Language This opens the Select Language dialog box gt In Language choose a language from the drop down list gt Click OK Table Quotas The easiest way of defining quotas for categorical variables is to use the Table Quota tab Using this method you define the quota dimensions and structure by dragging variables from the List Pane into the Quota Construction Area The position of the variables in the Quota Construction Area determines the characteristics of each quota cell The following illustration shows a three dimensional quota of gender by region by age in which each cell will contain a target for a different combination of those three characteristics Ele Edt view Tools Help ok Da eaea genderXregionXage E AddTable X Delete Table sezond siqeL gender Areyou Are you a a oe ee eee How oid are Rae em How oid are ae are 18 to 24 ow 16 to 24 25 to 50 stat aon ountr won sejond uolsseidxy region Where do you live df 41 gt EI genderxreg
95. required select No limit For more information about creating your own filters see Filtering Reports Note The Appointments Summary report ignores any filter that you have selected If you run that report the Phone activity will prompt you to enter a time period In the Available Reports window select the report that you want to run This opens the Selected Reports tab Some reports prompt for additional information as follows m For the Review Calls report select the variables that are to form the side and top of the table from the drop down lists m For the Appointments Summary report select the start and end dates from the calendars If you have been prompted to enter additional information click Generate Report to run the report After a brief pause the Phone activity displays the report in the Selected Reports tab You can change the filter criteria for the displayed report except for the Appointments Summary report by selecting a different option from the Date Filter or Sample Filter drop down lists and clicking the Refresh button Note When the current report does not include time filters the Refresh button is enabled and the time filters are disabled To specify that a specific report should not include time filters the report name must be added to the Phone activity s web config file Refer to the topic Settings for the Phone Activity in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library for more information
96. scripts You can use it to select the type of scripts you want to choose from If this box displays one script type and you choose a script of a different type using the Browse button Launch updates the Script Type box to reflect the script type chosen Defining sample management parameters On the Sample Management tab select Use Sample Management The page is redrawn with prompts for Sample Management parameters If the project allows CATI select With Phone Interviewing When the project is activated this will make the various CATI activities available in the activity list In Server enter or select the server containing the participant database In Database enter or select the name of the participant database In Table enter or select the name of the participant table In Fields select the columns that you want to be available to your Sample Management script using standard Windows selection methods In Authentication Fields select the columns that will be used for authentication of participants making inbound calls If you need to be able to select specific participant records you should select the Jd column because this is a key to the database and is guaranteed to contain a unique value for each record If you authenticate on a column that may contain non unique values the Sample Management system will select the first record whose value in that column matches the values specified in the Sample Management script To specify whic
97. see the topic Monitoring an Interviewer on p 278 275 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide At the top of the main screen there are some toolbar buttons which are described in the following table Button Description Refresh the contents of the Real Time display State No Description 1 Tablet Change the settings for the Real Time display For more information see the topic Customizing the Real Time Display on p 276 Columns in the Real Time Display Close Interviewer Monitoring and return to the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration main screen The following table describes the columns that can appear in the Interviewers Real Time display By default not all of these columns are displayed but they can be added For more information see the topic Customizing the Real Time Display on p 276 Column Name Description Contacts Since Last Survey Abandoned The number of times the interviewer has selected the Abandoned call outcome since last opening the Phone Participants activity Busy Rate The percentage of the Session Time that the interviewer has spent conducting interviews Completed The number of interviews completed since the interviewer last opened the Phone Participants activity The number of participant records retrieved by the interviewer from the sample management system since the end of the prev
98. selected from the Display Options list on the View Settings tab However it is possible for an administrator to customize the Participants activity to include values greater than 1000 in the Display Options list For more information use the search function in the I BM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library documentation to search for the text Settings for the Participants Activity and in the search results open the topic with that title Controlling Access to Data and Features You can restrict access from the Participants activity to specified servers databases tables and columns by adding entries to the SampleMgtGUI Config xml file For more information use the search function in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library documentation to search for the text Controlling Access to Sample Data and in the search results open the topic with that title Note also that only fields that were selected on the Sample Management tab of the Launch activity when the project was activated can be viewed in the Participants activity Controlling Access to Data by the Sample Management System You can specify that one or more columns in your sample table are read only and cannot be updated by IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server s sample management system To do this you need to use DPM Distributed Property Management Explorer as follows gt In Windows Explorer run DPMExplorer exe which by default is located in th
99. silence at start of Connect two way Calibration call audio max 1 15 seconds Max greeting from Hangup Filtering human QSAMP_ANSMC on 60 0 seconds Max greeting from AM Play amfile to AM Filtering con 3 0 seconds Max greeting measured Connect two way Calibration audio qoff 0 35 seconds Qualification timer for Connect Both end of voice 2 QSAMP_CON NECTED qam 2 9 seconds Qualification timer for Play amfile Filtering starting playback db 34 0 dBm Silence threshold range Start max timer Both 46 to 34 dBm 3 log 0 Oorl If 1 report greet Both and silence times milliseconds in call logl4 cp Override dialer ini All call progress analysis completion criteria CpCompletel5 167 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide 1 max recommended range from 0 9 seconds aggressive many false positives to 2 1 seconds conservative many false negatives 2 qoff recommended range from 0 3 seconds many false negatives to 1 1 detects most AM but connects humans very slowly to an interviewer 3 ldb should be high insensitive to avoid detecting people in noisy environments as answering machines false positives 4log times are measured on the dialer PC and can differ slightly from the greet times measured by the DSP 4llog times are measured on the dialer PC and can differ slightly from the greet times measured by the DSP 5 cp should normally not be applied for
100. sound wav file that contains a message that will be played when answering machine detection occurs To do so enter the name of the wav file in this field for example AMD wav The wav file must be located in the autodialer s audio folder the location of which is defined in the autodialer s dialer ini file You can also specify a wav file that is located in a sub folder of the audio folder by including a relative path for example Projects MyProject AMD wav Make sure that the name and relative path if specified is correct because Interviewer Server does not log an error if it cannot find the wav file Predictive settings The next three headings in this topic apply only when you have selected the Dialer Group Predictive Show Start Dialing button on the Interviewer screen option on the Interviews tab Initial dialing aggressiveness You can set the initial aggressiveness of the autodialing system when it calculates the number of predictive calls to make A higher aggressiveness setting can lead to less wait time for interviewers but might result in more silent calls To change the aggressiveness setting enter a whole number between 1 and 1000 in this field To stop the autodialing system from dialing predictively set Initial dialing aggressiveness to 0 In this mode the autodialer dials participants only when interviewers click the Start Dialing button in the Phone Participants activity which is unlikely to r
101. specified by the scriptwriter usually the interview will be terminated 317 IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup Optionally click Counter Quota to count the number of interviews that take place for these cells without specifying targets These cells will then have no quota control but a record of the number of interviews achieved for each cell will be maintained Click OK to close the dialog box The quota table is updated to show the targets for each cell The symbol in the top right hand corner of each cell shows the quota type N for a normal quota an up arrow for allow over quota and C for a counter quota Repeat these steps until you have defined a target for each cell In Title replace the default title with something that describes the quota The scriptwriter may use the title that you define to identify the quota in the script It is therefore a good idea to replace the default title that IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup provides with a title that reflects the content of the quota because this will make the script easier to follow To save the definition choose File gt Save Note You must give the mqd file the same name as the project and save it in the project s source directory otherwise the activation process will fail when the scriptwriter tries to activate the project Creating More Than One Table Quota gt gt You can create as many quota tables as you need based on different question
102. sub expressions combined by using the AND OR and NOT logical operators Examples of Selection Criteria 1 To select all records that are in the COMPLETED queue Queue COMPLETED 2 To select all records that are in the COMPLETED queue and have an Id between 100 and 200 Queue COMPLETED AND Id gt 100 AND Id lt 200 3 To select all records that are in either the FRESH or ACTIVE queue Queue FRESH OR Queue ACTIVE 4 To select all records whose Name column includes the Unicode text Smith Name LIKE N Smith 5 To select all records that have an appointment on 23 February 2006 AppointmentTime gt 2006 02 23 AND AppointmentTime lt 2006 02 24 6 To select all records whose Test column is not null Test IS NOT NULL To Display Records without Updating Them In the Selection Criteria text box type your expression To select all records make sure that the Selection Criteria text box is empty gt Make sure that the Update text box is empty gt Click Apply 105 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide The list of participant records will now include only those records that match your selection criteria If there are more records than will fit on one page use the icons at the bottom of the page to navigate between pages Performing a Bulk Update You define the update that you want to perform on the selected records by typing an expression of
103. taking the following actions m Previewing the questionnaire Activating or testing the questionnaire Saving the questionnaire to the library Opening a new questionnaire Leaving Build gt Click Apply to save any changes you have made to the current question gt Click Undo to undo any unsaved changes for the current question Note If you are working on the Presentation tab for a grid question you must click Apply after choosing the template itm file before Build will search the template file for the name of the grid template xm file Grouping Questions You can link adjacent questions so that they form a Group If you use the questionnaire with IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server the questions in the group will all be displayed on the same page The exceptions are questions whose Hide Question property is set to Yes Grouping questions changes the behavior of the down arrow button on the first question in the group and the up arrow button on the last question in the group so that they refer to the group rather than to the individual question If you want to move the first or last question in the group you must ungroup the question first The navigation buttons on other questions in the group remain unchanged so you can move other questions within the group in the normal way However if you want to move a question out of the group you must ungroup it first Grouping questions also affects the contents of the
104. that exists in the mdd file You will be reminded that you will need to create a new routing section or use the default Web routing section and copy the contents of the Paper routing into it in order to run the questionnaire For information on how to do this in Base Professional see Adding a Routing Context in the Base Professional section of the IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library documentation m Ifyou edit a Build questionnaire in Base Professional and you add or delete questions the changes may not be visible in Build because Base Professional provides some functionality that is not available in Build If you use Base Professional and you want the questionnaire to work in Build you should run the CreatePaperRouting mrs script on the mdd file before opening it in Build If not ask the original scriptwriter to do this for you The script is installed as part of the Data Collection Developer Library in INSTALL_ FOLDER IBM SPSS DataCollection 6 DDL Scripts General mrScriptBasic m Base Professional activate using the Web routing or another routing of your choice Build activates from the Paper routing only Testing and Activating Questionnaires If you are developing large or complex questionnaires it can be useful to test the questionnaire periodically as you build it You can do this from within Build by selecting options from the Tools menu 70 Chapter 1 This section describes the following tasks Testin
105. that the interviewer is currently idle Displays when working in manual dialing or modem dialing mode and indicates that the interviewer is connected to a participant and an interview is currently in progress Displays when working in autodialing mode and indicates that the interviewer is connected to a participant and an interview is currently in progress Indicates that the Interviewer Server is currently busy The center of the main screen This is where the interview pages will be displayed while you are conducting an interview Note Interviews can be monitored even when you select No for the Contact agrees to be monitored and recorded option This setting controls when the interview should not be monitored by external parties not when the interview can be reviewed by a supervisor Navigating using the keyboard Depending on your browser you might be able to switch between the three sections of the main screen by pressing Ctrl Tab or F6 Setting interviewer qualifications When you may set your own qualifications Phone Participants displays the Login Info dialog box listing the qualifications you may set If you are using an autodialer the dialog box will also prompt for your station number 184 Chapter 7 Figure 1 38 Login Info dialog box 3 Login Info Web Page Dialog Select your interviewer qualifications below Participant s location Participant s profession Matches any gt
106. the Record button as many times as required Only the last recording will be saved to an audio file If you do not stop the recording it will be stopped automatically when you display the next question For interviews that require the keyboard only You can start or stop the recording using Ctrl Shift R Note that for some browsers pressing this keyboard shortcut alone will perform the action For other browsers you might have to press Enter after pressing the keyboard shortcut If more than one question is displayed on the screen make sure that you move the cursor to the question with the Record and Stop buttons before you press the keyboard shortcut Changing the answer to a previous question If the participant changes his or her mind about the answer to a previous question first display the question using one of the following methods m For interviews that require the keyboard only Press the PAGE UP key until the question is displayed m For interviews that use the mouse Click the Previous button until the question is displayed Then change the answer as appropriate If the question requires you to record the participant s answer your new recording will overwrite the previous one that was made for this question Changing an answer might mean that some of the questions you have already answered become invalid or that you will see some additional questions to the ones you saw previously If a question already has an answer th
107. the Select a preset filter field This displays the Edit Preset Filters dialog allowing you to modify an existing filter gt In the Presets list select a filter to copy gt Click the Copy amp Paste icon The selected filter is duplicated with a number appended to its name gt Edit the copied filter name and expression as appropriate and click Apply Refer to the Writing filter expressions section below for more information Click OK to save the cloned filter click Cancel to discard the changes Deleting a filter Click Edit Presets next to the Select a preset filter field This displays the Set Filters dialog allowing you to delete an existing filter In the Presets list select a filter to delete and then click the Delete icon Writing filter expressions The expression text used in filter expressions must be supported by the IBM SPSS Data Collection Data Model and can include functions from the IBM SPSS Data Collection Function Library Refer to the Expression Evaluation topic in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library for more information 267 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Exporting Only Common System Variables System variables contain general information about the interview as a whole rather than data related to an individual question and as such they may be of little use for analysis purposes However rather than forcing you to choose between exporting all or n
108. the last modified log file for each selected log file type The default is the last two days If you would rather specify your own date range select Custom and then choose the start and end dates in the new fields that Manage Logs displays 300 Chapter 7 gt Note The date range applies to the creation and last modified dates of the log files themselves not to the dates that the log entries were written On a lightly loaded system this may mean that some files contain information that is not relevant to the current issue Select Include windows event logs if you want to download the Windows system and application logs The default is to download these files as they often contain useful information about what has been happening on a machine while Interviewer Server Administration has been running Select Use regular expression to filter if you want to define a regular text expression upon which to search When selected you can enter a text expression in the provided field Only log files that contain the defined text will be returned Use the check boxes in the ReadMe content section to specify information to be added to the ReadMe file that is created to accompany the log files m In Priority select the job s importance to you m In Contact details type the name and telephone number or email address of the person that the support representative should contact about the problem In Description of problem type a clear a
109. the machine whose log records you want to see In SQL query type the query you want to use for selecting and displaying records Click View Logs If there is more than one page of records use the buttons and links below the list frame to see those pages If there are no records that match your selection criteria the words No records are displayed 299 gt IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide To see the full text of an error message without scrolling click the message text and it will be displayed in a pop up dialog box Downloading Log Files gt gt gt If there are problems with your installation that you cannot solve you may be asked to send the log files to your SPSS support representative The easiest way to do this is to use the Download tab to create a zip compressed file that you can then send by email The download process copies all files that were created on or after a given start date or that were last modified on or before a given end date When choosing dates remember that some files grow more quickly than others so you may need to extend the date range outside the period when the problem actually existed The download process also creates a ReadMe file containing information related to the problem You provide some of this information and some comes from DPM Zipped files are named SiteName_yyyy mm dd zip for example BJH_2007 10 26 zip Once the file has been crea
110. the question texts exactly as they appear in the questionnaire Sometimes you ll want to use different texts in your analyses than you used during interviewing For example in an interview you ll ask How old are you but in tabulations you may prefer the text Age or Age of respondent To Create a Numeric Question 23 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide gt Click Insert Item This opens the New Item dialog box Routing Items iO O Single Response Question Mc Multiple Response Question 2 C numeric Question El C Test question E pisplay Text E Single Response Grid Ez C Multiple Response Grid E Numeric Grid Project holidays Primary Language English United States Fijage Apply Undo Name fave Question Text How old are you Previous Next Insert tem gt In Name optionally replace the default item name with a name of your choice gt In Question Text type the question text To Set Advanced Options gt Select the Advanced tab 24 Chapter 7 Project holidays a User BARBARA Primary Language English United States Kijage Apply Undo Name fae Question Text How old are you Properties Require a response to this question Yes Hide this question No z Number Type integer Real Range of Response Minimum Value Maximum Value Special Responses Use th ctions on left side to enabl
111. the values must be in one of three formats yyyy mm dd yyyy mm dd hh mi or yyyy mm dd hh mi ss If you specify only the date Participants will assume that the time part of the value is 00 00 00 When you load sample records into a new table Participants creates the table with columns to match the fields in the sample records If you load another file into the same table and that file has extra fields in addition to all those in the original file the load process will create the new columns in the table for those fields but will do nothing to the original records in the table This 82 Chapter 7 means that once you have loaded both files you will still be able to use the old sample records even though they contain less information than the newer ones Warning Do not store your text file in your user s folder for the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server project For security reasons the upload process will delete the file from that location Starting Participants gt Select the project to which the participant records belong and click Participants The Participants activity opens and the Summary tab is displayed If you want to load participants select the Upload tab Naming the Database Server Sample Database and Sample Table Use the Upload tab to name the text file the sample database and table in which the sample should be placed and the name of the server on which the database is located The IBM SPSS
112. they appear in the questionnaire The first response is code 1 the second is code 2 and so on Numbering is sequential and starts at 1 for each question To Create a Single or Multiple Response Question gt Click Insert Item This opens the New Item dialog box E New Item Web Page Dialog Routing Items 0 Q Single Response Question O Multiple Response Question 2 Numeric Question A text question i C Display Text Ez c Single Response Grid E O Multiple Response Grid E Numeric Grid gt Choose either Single Response Question or Multiple Response Question and click OK 18 Chapter 7 Project holidays n S BARBARA Primary Language English United States O Quest1 Name Quest Question Text Quest1 Apply Undo Responses Enter one response on each line Insert tem gt In Name optionally replace the default item name with a name of your choice gt In Question Text type the question text In Responses type the response texts one per line See Question Limits for information about the maximum number of responses you can place in a list To Set Advanced Options gt Select the Advanced tab 19 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Apply Undo Name Gende Question Text Properties Require a response to this question Yes x Hide this question No v Question Type Single Response Multiple Response Response Order Default
113. time seconds The average idle time for all interviewers 236 Chapter 7 Dialer Statistics Report 11 ase saaon_ pomeram ani ce re cries einen Interviewer Statistics This report contains two tables The first is a crosstabulation that shows for each interviewer the total time that the Phone Participants activity was open Session Time the total number of calls made Attempts and the number of calls that resulted in each of the following groups of call outcomes The report always includes both real and test data Column name Call outcomes included in this group Completes EarlyComplete Completed Terminates Stopped OverQuota FailedScreener System Terminates Failed Fax WrongNumber Disconnected CellPhone BusinessNumber FastBusy PossibleWrongNumber DialerFailed Silent NotAvailable Other Terminates Abandoned LanguageBarrier TransfertoWeb Recalls Appointment NoAnswer AnswerMachine Busy LanguageRecall Rejected NetworkBusy DialerBusy Unknown Refusals Refused Reviewed Interviews Reviewed Cancels Canceled For each column each cell contains a count and a row percentage Note that the number of calls includes multiple calls to the same participant For projects that use an autodialer the Terminates and Recalls columns include call outcomes selected by the autodialer Autodialed calls that did not result in a connection for example
114. to dial numbers for an Interviewer DefaultCatiProjectProfvattibialTimeout The number of seconds The installation value is 600 10 minutes Dialer Settings Percentage of calls to record DefaultCatiProjectPrdpentemtCallsRecordedA whole number between 0 and 100 The installation value is 0 that is no calls are recorded Dialer Settings Dialing aggressiveness Maximum percentage of silent calls Target percentage of silent calls These three settings do not have corresponding DPM site properties Adding a Call Outcome to DPM s Site Properties Start DPM Explorer and expand the site s Properties node as described in Changing the Settings in DPM s Site Properties above In DPM Explorer s left pane click the DefaultCatiSampleRecReturnCodes collection From the Add menu choose Property Collection This opens a dialog box In the dialog box enter a name for the call outcome and click OK In the left pane click the collection you have just created From the Add menu choose Property This opens a dialog box In Name type Code In Value type a unique code number for the call outcome Then click OK Repeat the last three steps but in Name type Text and in Value enter a short description of the call outcome 177 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Changing the Mapping of Autodialer Status Codes to Call Outcomes When a proje
115. to everyone who is selected to receive it You may choose not to target people who received this message during a previous run Delayed sending of e mails There is no direct link between setting up an e mail job and running it All job specifications are saved and are run only when selected from a list of e mail jobs for the current project Maintenance facilities Job specifications can be edited and deleted as required Dealing with e mail problems You can specify the e mail address of a user who is to be contacted if there are problems This user is also the person who receives test e mails Note E mail does not support SMTP servers that are set up to require authentication Starting Email gt Select the project for which you want to set up email and click Email This opens the Email jobs list page 123 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration Manage Email Project Id Project Name Description Add edit or delete email jobs MUSEUM1 MUSEUM1 Email Jobs ae a New Job There are two stages to setting up email jobs m Define email parameters such as the subject and the message text and the types of projects on which the job may be run m Specify which respondents will receive the email 124 Chapter 1 gt Click the Add icon or Click here to add new This opens the Email settings dialog box with the Email text tab s
116. to that column The upload process will subsequently copy the value of that field to that column 88 Chapter 7 However your text file might contain information that should be uploaded to a required column but the field name in the text file is different from the required column name In this situation you use the Required Fields tab to change the default mappings that Participants has defined Cai Upload Upload Participant Records Required Field Specification Id Queue Active Serial Test For example if your text file contains phone numbers in a field called TelNo you can use the Required Fields tab to map the TelNo field to the PhoneNumber column If your participants text file contains other that is non required fields the Participant activity will automatically map those to additional columns in the sample table To change the mapping for those fields use the Additional Fields tab To Change the Mapping of a Field to a Required Column gt Select the Required Fields tab gt If you are uploading records for a telephone interviewing project click Use sample for phone interviewing This refreshes the table to show the additional columns required for telephone interviewing gt Click the Edit symbol the pencil on the right of the field whose mapping you want to change This changes the Initialize based on column to a drop down list of field names present in the text file gt In Initi
117. useful additional information and might have been added by interviewers who have previously called this number For example if the participant is hard of hearing you might find a note to this effect in the comments box For more information see the topic Viewing and entering comments on p 190 The left of the main screen The section on the left of the screen contains buttons for various tasks such as asking to be connected to a participant and starting an interview The buttons are described in the following table Button Description Keyboard Shortcut see note below this table Retrieve the next contact You use this button if the project you are working on does not use an autodialer that is you dial numbers manually or by using a modem and the project has not been set up to select the next contact automatically AlttN Retrieve a specific contact Depending on the options that your supervisor has set you might not be able to use this button Alt S Close Phone Participants and return to the main IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration page Alt X Display help for Phone Participants Alt H If the project you are working on uses an autodialer you use this button to ask to be connected to a participant If the project does not use an autodialer you might be able to use this button to dial the participant s phone number using a modem
118. values that you enter in this field must be the indexes of the time zones in the list of time zones stored in the registry If you need to enter more than one time zone separate them with semicolons and do not include any spaces Time Zone Name _ Displayed As Index Value Greenwich GMT Casablanca 90 Standard Time Monrovia 133 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Setting Description GMT Standard GMT Greenwich 85 Time Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London Morocco Standard GMT Casablanca 2147483571 Time W Europe Standard GMT 01 00 110 Time Amsterdam Berlin Bern Rome Stockholm Vienna Central Europe GMT 01 00 95 Standard Time Belgrade Bratislava Budapest Ljubljana Prague Romance Standard GMT 01 00 105 Time Brussels Copenhagen Madrid Paris Central European GMT 01 00 100 Standard Time Sarajevo Skopje Warsaw Zagreb W Central Africa GMT 01 00 West 113 Standard Time Central Africa GTB Standard Time GMT 02 00 130 Athens Istanbul Minsk E Europe Standard GMT 02 00 115 Time Bucharest Egypt Standard GMT 02 00 120 Time Cairo South Africa GMT 02 00 140 Standard Time Harare Pretoria FLE Standard Time GMT 02 00 125 Helsinki Kyiv Riga Sofia Tallinn Vilnius Israel Standard GMT 02 00 135 Time Jerusalem Jordan Standard
119. variables press the Next button Filter on the text variable Include cases where the text Contains im noisy lsounds Find noisy lt gt 1 Finish Cancel Help You can define expressions that are based on text strings in text variables For example you can define an expression that includes respondents who mention the word noisy in their answer Note All text expressions are case insensitive In other words it does not matter whether you type the text in upper or lower case because the expression matches the characters in the text and not the case in which they are entered 322 Chapter 2 Filter on the text variable Displays the variable that you dragged into the Expression Quotas tab To use a different variable click the arrow and choose another from the drop down list Include cases where the text Specifies how to determine which respondents will be included in the quota Type the text that defines the quota characteristic in the box on the right Contains The quota is for respondents who mention the specified text m Is exactly The quota is for respondents whose answers consist of the specified text and nothing else Begins with The quota is for respondents whose answers begin with the specified text Ends with The quota is for respondents whose answers end with the specified text m Is blank empty The quota is for respondents whose answers are blank or empty Th
120. which participants may be called on weekends Enter an appropriate start time By default a weekend runs from 00 01 on Saturday to midnight on Sunday The Sample Management script will handle situations where the project has participants in time zones with different definitions of weekdays and weekends When selected the time parameters defined in the Valid participant call times section are used Maximum tries The maximum number of times that a record may be called The default is 3 If an Appointment is made then an additional Maximum Tries tries can be made to connect the appointment Using day parts When selected you can utilize an existing day parts template that defines valid participant call times Click New Day Parts to clear any currently defined day part settings in the Day Parts table Click Load Template to load an existing day parts template Templates are stored in the Distributed Property Management DPM Click Save As to save the current settings listed in the Day Parts table as a template in DPM The Save As dialog displays allowing you to specify a template name 144 Chapter 7 gt gt Day parts name Enter an appropriate template name and click Save Otherwise click Cancel to return to the Call Times tab without saving Day Parts The Day Parts table lists all day parts that are currently defined for the project To Add a New Day Part Click the Add button t
121. will allow the sample management system to select the records in random order Alternatively if your participants text file includes your own values for SortId or you want the participant records to be selected in JD column order or you will not be using this project for telephone interviewing clear this checkbox For more information see the entry for SortId in Mapping Fields to Required Columns in the Sample Table 84 Chapter 7 You must complete all fields on this tab before selecting another tab If you leave a field incomplete an error will occur when you try to use the other tabs Mapping Fields to Required Columns in the Sample Table The Sample Management system requires each sample table to have at least the following five columns If you use the Participants activity to upload your file to a new table these columns will be created automatically Column Description Id Contains a number or code that uniquely identifies each participant record You must supply this information in your text file If your text file contains a field called id in any combination of uppercase or lowercase letters Participants automatically maps that field to this column otherwise Participants maps the first field in the text file to this column You can change the mapping if the field that contains the participant s id is not the first field in the text file see To Change the Mapping of a Field to a Required C
122. wish to replace the default text that Interviewer Server provides with your organization s default text See Changing the Default Settings below The Interview Settings tab displays the text that will be used for the current project and provides an option to insert references to fields in the sample records or to the interviewer s name These references will be replaced with the values from the current sample record and the name of the current interviewer when the text is displayed at the start of the interview 159 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide To Specify the Project s Introductory Text gt Replace the default text with the text you want interviewers to use gt To insert a reference to a sample field or to the interviewer s name click in the text at the point you want to make the insertion A vertical bar cursor appears at that point gt Click the Substitutions button This displays the Substitutions dialog box Figure 1 33 Substitutions dialog box Z Substitutions Web Page Dialog Sample field Active Sample field Serial Sample field Test Sample field PreviousQueuve Sample field AppointmentTime Sample field RecallTime Sample field ReturnTime Sample field TryCount Sample field AppointmentTryCount OK Cancel mern http 10 80 4 99 5P55MR CatiSup Substituti Internet gt Select the reference you want to insert and click OK Changing the Defau
123. with the number of calls that resulted in a call outcome in either the Completes or Refusals groups Time per Attempt This shows the average time in minutes of each call that is the total connect time divided by the total number of calls If the you specify a time period when you run the report the report includes only interviewers who made calls during that time period Note that the Interviewer Statistics report does not include a chart even if you have enabled the charting feature 238 Chapter 1 Duration CC CallOutcome Reviews Cancels r z Reviewed ene nemmi cornes remes tas penoas Bett ciens Interviewerld ese 2 soos sou am oms som om mmf S ooms om som com on n ee ee ee per Hour Attempts Terminates Recalls Attempt Base s391 oso oss 033 7500 admin 10189 020 oss osa 7500 Interviewer Statistics Across Projects This report provides interviewer productivity information across projects for each interviewer and each project for the last 8 hours The report always includes both real and test data Note Due to a Microsoft SQL server limitation this report is limited to a maximum of 85 projects When working with customers accounts this report will only include data for projects in the selected customer account Session time Amount of time minutes that the interviewer was logged into the project Dials Total number of part
124. you define alternative question and response texts for use in tabulations Typically you tend to use longer texts in printed or Web questionnaires whereas shorter texts work better in analyses Other facilities include m Shared lists Shared lists are a quick and easy way of dealing with responses that are common to a number of questions If you place the responses in a shared list you can then insert them in any number of questions simply by selecting the name of the list There is no need to retype the response texts or to copy and paste responses between questions Bookmarks Bookmarks identify particular positions in a questionnaire with unique names and are useful in large questionnaires with complex routing requirements m Exit codes You can terminate an interview immediately and for any reason by specifying an exit code of your choice A typical example is with quota control when you will usually want to terminate the interview if the respondent belongs in a category whose quota has already been filled m Groups Questions can be grouped so that they are all displayed on a single page when the questionnaire is used for web based interviewing with Interviewer Server this is sometimes referred to as a multiask question m Gotos Questions are presented in the order they appear in the questionnaire You can define simple routing for individual choices within a response list and more complex routing instructions based on combinations
125. you wish 31 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide You can filter the response list so that when interviews take place only responses that were or were not mentioned at a previous question are displayed This is particularly useful for spontaneous and prompted awareness questions where you want to prompt only for the responses that were not mentioned spontaneously In a multiple response grid you can flag some of the categories as single response for example if there is a None of the above category You can associate pictures with responses These can be in any of the following formats gif jpg jpeg png or bmp When you export grid questions the export process exports the question and response texts exactly as they appear in the questionnaire Sometimes you ll want to use different texts in your analyses than you used during interviewing A typical example is question text where you ll tend to use a more wordy approach in interviewing than in analyses saying for example What is your overall opinion of the products rather than simply Overall opinion The variable labels for the grid subjects consist of the subject text followed by a colon and then the main question text For instance if the main question text is What is your overall opinion of the products and the products are different brands of washing powder the variable labels for each product would default to say W
126. 0 08 PM Seminar Evaluation Questionnaire mdd mdd 5 11 2004 4 11 58 PM H A Products and Services Sewice Representative Evaluation Questionnaire mdd mdd 5 11 2004 4 12 56 PM a Ratings and Frequencies Store Evaluation Questionnaire mdd mdd 4 19 2004 9 31 46 PM Website Tourist Attraction Questionnaire mdd mdd 5 24 2004 11 56 06 AM Training Evaluation Questionnaire mdd mdd 6 2 2004 11 26 42 AM University Student Satisfaction Questionnaire mdd mdd 4 28 2004 1 33 00 PM In the left hand frame expand the library tree and select the folder in which you want to store the questionnaire In Filename type the name that the questionnaire will have in the library Click Save As Build confirms that the questionnaire is now part of the library Click OK to close the message box and return to the questionnaire design page 49 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Importing Library Questions into the Current Questionnaire When you import a library questionnaire into the current questionnaire Build compares the names of the items it is importing against the names of items in the current questionnaire If any of the item names already exists Build appends a number to the item s name so that it still has a unique name gt Do one of the following Either m On any tab click Insert item at the point you want to insert the question This opens the New Item dialog box E New Item Web Page Dialog
127. 1 key is pressed Changing the keycodes to the following would result in better results Q1 What activities do you like Basketball keycode 01 Football keycode 11 For this question the interviewer s intention can be determined because although both keycodes contain 1 the interviewer must press a unique first character General procedure for conducting interviews When you click Start Interview the interviewing program displays the first question in the main part of the screen For each question read the exact words of the question out to the participant excluding any instructions to interviewers and select or enter the participant s answer 196 Chapter 1 Most interview pages contain just one question If a page contains more than one question you must enter answers for all questions before moving on to the next question The interviewing program displays error messages usually in red if you enter an invalid answer and waits for you to enter another response Depending on the answers the participant gives you might notice that different questions are displayed for different participants The interviewing program keeps track of which questions each must answer and always presents the correct questions in the correct order At the end of the interview the review phase might start automatically If it doesn t click the Review Completed Interview button if there is one Otherwise if your next number is not selected au
128. 14 consistent keystokes 194 Copy and paste 68 creating filters 265 Cut and paste 68 data location 218 Database server naming 82 day parts 142 Default Web pages allow use of 109 deleting filters 265 Deleting records from a sample table 93 Desktop tools 304 dialer certification 291 Marketing Systems Group Pro T S 291 Sytel 291 Dialer Administration activity 284 Dialer Busy 182 Dialer configuration file creating 284 importing 286 Disconnected 182 Display Text items shared lists 45 Downloading reports for telephone interviewing projects 258 Downloading records from a sample table 93 DPM default settings for Phone Surveys changing 169 Edit Preset Filters dialog 265 Editing the records in a sample table 93 Email creating new jobs 123 deleting jobs 127 editing existing jobs 127 overview 121 running jobs 127 starting 122 user for test problem messages 127 Export Data advanced options 267 defining export parameters 262 exporting only common system variables 267 hierarchical data 262 overview 261 procedure for exporting IBM SPSS Quantum data 267 starting 262 Expression quotas 318 defining 327 Expressions for specifying versions 271 Fast Busy 182 Fax 182 Field Order dialog Ordering tab 140 Files checking in out 8 making available to other users 8 mqd 313 Files activity starting 296 filter creating 265 deleting 265 modifying 265 Filters tab 303 336 G
129. 265 m You can choose to export data gathered before or after a specific date time or select a date time range For more information see the topic Exporting Data on p 262 m The Export Data advanced dialog includes a new Connection Properties tab that allows you to provide inputs for custom properties allowing you to define the mr Init Custom portion of both the input and output connection strings For more information see the topic Advanced Options on p 267 Launch The activity includes the following enhancements m You can now define the expiration date and time UTC time for each project prior to activation For more information see the topic Project Information on p 109 Phone The activity includes the following enhancements m You can now filter phone reports on a project s sample information or data in addition to filtering by date and time For more information see the topic Filtering Reports on p 256 m You can now specify a date and time range when working with date filters For more information see the topic Running Reports on p 253 m You can now specify a report s data source with the Table property in DPM Explorer Site gt Servers gt ServerName gt Applications gt CatiReports gt Report gt Table The Table property is not set for sample base reports the sample table is used as the default For call history based reports the default is set as dbo lt ProjectName gt _SampleOverview_Inner m
130. 8 for shared lists 43 for single multiple responses 20 34 40 44 uploading into project folder 50 Positions for autodialing 287 Predictive dialer 284 Prioritizing quotas 214 Project inactive page 114 Project status report 216 projects Activation History Activity Filters tab 303 Projects activate from one cluster to another 118 Index activate over the internet 118 different interview and analysis texts 25 29 31 35 37 41 locking unlocking 8 monitoring remote interviewers 301 Promote Project activation parameters 119 logging in to destination server 119 overview 118 participant records 119 starting 118 Questionnaire opening existing 74 saving a copy 75 saving with a new name 75 questionnaire version used 218 Questionnaires Activation History tab 334 changing texts before exporting 21 25 29 31 35 37 41 copying to library when use templates 77 Filters tab 336 IBM SPSS Data Collection Activation Console 334 Item names 13 making live 70 setting activation parameters 71 Settings tab 337 testing 70 Questions adding 49 64 changing 65 copying and pasting 68 cutting and pasting 68 deleting 68 dummy 19 24 28 33 39 grouping 67 hiding 19 24 28 33 39 missing values 21 moving up down 68 numeric 22 numeric grid 37 respondent must answer 19 24 28 33 39 single multiple response 16 single multiple response grid 30 text 26 Queue Order Edit dialog Or
131. AMD the only relevant parameter is cp S If persistent silence is detected hangup call without playing amfile AMD Parameter for Call Progress Analysis The cp parameter specifies the actions to take when detecting call progress tones overriding the default call progress analysis completion criteria CpComplete in the dialer ini file Application areas m Calling countries with non standard ringback or number unobtainable tones m Calling networks that announce tariff information at the start of the call m Calling subscribers with personalized ringback tones music or announcements E In order to achieve special effects such as recording of in band announcements The table below lists the different call progress events Each event is identified by a letter pre CONNECT events in lower case post CONNECT in upper case Each letter or group of letters is preceded by an action identifier see the legend below the table The post CONNECT events are only detected in AMD filtering or calibration mode amd 1 or amd 2 Syntax cp actionID event actionID event Default cp b c d f r t v B C D F T Example cp vea Ignore pre CONNECT voice events for instance personalized ringback tones Ee Example cp t v Record recfile when detecting tritone or start of voice until stopped by noansw timeout Example cp v Connect to extension when detecting start of voice Def ault Call Outco
132. B person trip trip o person gender J B person numtrips person newspapers a person name 2 person person E person tvdays B person weight Project HOURSEHOLD Date Tuesday February 02 2010 Time 5 37 01 PM Table Age last birthday 221 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Information About Text Variables If you hover over a text variable a pop up displays the variable s description If you select a text variable in the Question List Survey Results lists the variable s values one per line There are no charts for text variables io freq oth Project tea Tea survey Inbound and CATI Date 20 May 2004 YW takewith Time 16 37 00 o whenadd Filter m ttype Interview Filter Respondent and Test data with status Completed successfully shape No of respondents limit 100 io tbdiff Characters per respondent limit 100 a differ What are those differences Please describe them in as much detail as you can age The pyramid ones tend to be stronger o gender io mstat io income EB toriad YW places Information About Grid Variables If you hover over a grid variable a pop up displays the variable s description If you select a grid variable in the Question List Survey Results displays a table that matches the grid The grid cells show counts and depending on the options set in the dialog box and the orientation of the grid percentages may also be shown If you choose co
133. Collection Base Professional or IBM SPSS Data Collection Author to create the questionnaire Define quotas If the project uses Quota Control you will need to define the quota targets for each quota controlled category You use the desktop IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup activity to do this This activity creates an mqd file containing quota information which is then used to create the quota databases when the project is activated You will need to download the project s mdd file onto your computer before you run Quota Setup and then once you have finished you will need to upload the newly created mqd file into the project s folder in your Users folder If the project uses Sample Management quotas you will also need to upload an additional mdd file that Quota Setup creates to hold Sample Management variables For more information see the topic IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup in Chapter 2 on p 308 Upload participant records If the project uses Sample Management use Participants to load some participant records for your test interviews Activate the project in Test mode Once you have successfully compiled an interviewing program it is time to activate the project in Test mode This allows you to test the questionnaire by running interviews These interviews are flagged as test interviews and can easily be deleted or otherwise omitted from the data used for toplines and final analysis Use the Launch activity to acti
134. Commercial government and academic customers worldwide rely on IBM SPSS technology as a competitive advantage in attracting retaining and growing customers while reducing fraud and mitigating risk By incorporating IBM SPSS software into their daily operations organizations become predictive enterprises able to direct and automate decisions to meet business goals and achieve measurable competitive advantage For further information or to reach a representative visit http www ibm com spss Technical support Technical support is available to maintenance customers Customers may contact Technical Support for assistance in using IBM Corp products or for installation help for one of the supported hardware environments To reach Technical Support see the IBM Corp web site at http vww ibm com support Be prepared to identify yourself your organization and your support agreement when requesting assistance Licensed Materials Property of IBM iii Copyright IBM Corporation 2000 2011 Contents 1 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide 1 Welcome to the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide 1 What s New in IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Activities 6 0 1 1 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server in Other Languages 0 005 3 Converting Version 2 3 Scripts to Work With IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server 6 0 1 3 IBM SPSS D
135. Dir on the Dialer You are not required to provide a value for this setting Figure 1 34 Site Name Value a DatabaseProperties mdMode 0 TR Properties AmdParameters max 4 5 0n 11 E MRFactory Objects Es DetauttCatiParameters AppointmentCode 11 Ea DefauttDialerCallOutcomes AutoDialTimeout 600 a Monitoring CallerID True I InstalledProducts CancelCode 41 DefaultDBindexes HiddenCodesList 1 2 4 5 6 10 26 34 42 4 liz DefaulttSampleManagementFields ad A H E DefautCaliSampieRecReturmCod s ParcentCalisRecorded o JE De fautCatiProjectProperties RaisePositionError False Jg DefauttDialingPredict RunningCodesList 8 11 15 3 mrinterviewReportFiters SilentCallMessage R QUOTAS UsePredefinedkeycodes False Exit DPM Explorer after defining appropriate values for the three settings The answering machine detection properties will take effect for all new projects When an auto dialed participant record is dialed and Dialer detects that an answering machine picked up the call the call is automatically ended with the Answering Machine call outcome Existing projects For existing projects the answering machine detection properties need to be added for each project Projects gt lt ProjectName gt gt mrinterview False Positives False positives are humans that were misinterpreted as answering machines in which case the dialer hangs up the call or plays the amfile The main causes of false positives are
136. G1 Bookmark Apply Undo LI Bookmark ZEAE Insert tem gt In Name optionally replace the default item name with a name of your choice Goto A Goto applies to all respondents who reach this point in the questionnaire You might use it in a questionnaire that has many sections where each respondent answers the questions in one section plus a general demographic section only To ensure that each respondent skips the unwanted 54 Chapter 7 sections and reaches the demographic section you could end each section with a Goto that takes the respondent straight to the start of the demographic section gt Click Insert Item This opens the New Item dialog box gt Select the Routing Items tab Z New Item Web Page Dialog x C Exit E Bookmark D Insert from Script Library E ciom Script advanced Import from Library gt Choose Goto and click OK This displays the Edit tab for Goto items P ct tea Admin Primary Language English United States Goto Apply Undo Previous Next Insert Item gt Select the question that you want to go to from the dropdown list If Goto E Use an If Goto to define routing for some respondents but not others You specify the respondents to which the Goto applies by listing responses that they must have given to previous questions For example to create an If Goto that applies to women you might say that the response to the Gender
137. Go to the folder called C Program Files Common Files IBM SPSS DataCollection 6 Interviewer Server 6 0 1 0 0 and type ActivateIniToxXml i ini filename x xml_filename For example ActivateIniToxXml i c mrproject myproject ini x c mrproject myproject xml If you forget the command syntax type ActivateIniToxml for a reminder Chapter 2 IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup You use the IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup program to define the quota categories and targets that you want to use for a project Quota Setup provides the following features Questionnaire and sample variables Quotas can based on categorical numeric and text variables from the questionnaire script as well as on variables present in the sample data m Independent quotas Quotas based on a single variable such as gender age region or preferred brand Independent quotas are also known as one dimensional quotas m Dependent quotas Quotas based on a combination of between two and six variables For example a dependent quota for gender and age will define targets for gender and age combinations such a male aged 18 to 24 male aged 25 to 34 female aged 18 to 24 and so on Dependent quotas are also known as multidimensional quotas m Over quota cells When a target has almost been met and there are several interviews running that belong in that cell you can allow those interviews to continue even though the target will be
138. Id column TimeZone The participant s timezone TrunkGroup If sample records are used in telephone interviewing projects you can use the TrunkGroup field to specify which trunk group of the dialer will be used for dialing the sample record If you want the dialer to automatically select the trunk group the field should be set to NULL or empty TryCount The number of calls made to this record Userld The Userld of latest record in the history table for a specific sample Your participants text file does not need to contain information for all the required columns as many of the columns are used only internally by the sample management system and will only contain information once a participant has been called As a minimum you must supply a value in your text file for the Id column For telephone interviewing projects you should provide a value for the PhoneNumber column and if you have participants in more than one time zone you might want to provide a value for the TimeZone column For more detailed information about the sample table use the search function in the Data Collection Developer Library documentation to search for the text Sample Table and in the search results open the topic with that title Mapping Fields in the Text File to Required Columns in the Sample Table If a field in your participants text file has the same name as a required column the Participants activity automatically maps the field
139. Interviewer Server Administration gt Type http servername SPSSMR InterviewBuilder The Interviewer Server Administration login page is displayed gt Enter your Interviewer Server Administration user name and password and click Login Build starts and the main screen is displayed Creating a New Questionnaire or Library File If you are using Build outside IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration you can create a new questionnaire or library file as a blank file or based on an existing library file of your choice To Create a Blank File gt Choose File gt New gt Blank The Build start up page is displayed with links for inserting a new question or a shared list To Base the New Questionnaire on a Library File 74 Chapter 7 gt gt gt Choose File gt New gt Base on Library This displays the Open dialog box Z Open Web Page Dialog Upload Download Fiename Filemask mad Open Close Folders Name Type Date i E Root Age Question categorical mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 44 08 PM H Role Library OPMAdmins Age Question numeric mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 44 10 PM y Shared Library Birth Month Question mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 44 12 PM Customer Satisfaction Birth Year Question mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 44 14 PM a 5 Children Age Question mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 44 16 PM Demographics
140. Participants Phone Edit Sample Mgmt script with Particpant Rules Send invitations to participate with Email Active mi Re activate project in Launch ode with Check change quotas with Quotas Monitor session engine activity with Interviewing Activity Reports takes Live interviewing place Download mdd file to your computer using Files Define quotas using Quota Setup 4 Upload mdd file to your user folder using Files Download mdd file to your computer using Files y Translate texts in mdd file using the Translation Utility 4 Upload translated mdd file to your user folder using Files Review interview status with Status Monitor telephone interviewers with Interviewer Monitoring i Review telephone interviews with Review Interviews View telephone interviewing reports with Phone View topline tables with Survey Results Export data for analysis with Export Data 7 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide The usual path from creating a questionnaire through to analyzing the data is as follows Build the questionnaire Create the questionnaire using the Build activity in Interviewer Server Administration Alternatively you can use IBM SPSS Data
141. Participants will not open on a station with an unrecognized position and an error message will be displayed instead For more information about positions see Dialer Administration 161 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Ring time You can choose the minimum length of time that an unanswered phone call must ring before the autodialer terminates the call To change the ring time enter the number of seconds in this field Make sure that you set a value that allows participants plenty of time to pick up the phone In addition your local laws might specify the minimum value that you must use Name of silent call announcement file Silent calls can occur when an autodialer generates more calls than there are interviewers available to handle the calls You can specify the name of a wave sound wav file that contains a message that will be played to the participant when a silent call occurs To do so enter the name of the wav file in this field for example SilentCall wav The wav file must be located in the autodialer s audio folder the location of which is defined in the autodialer s dialer ini file You can also specify a wav file that is located in a sub folder of the audio folder by including a relative path for example Projects MyProject SilentCall wav Make sure that the name and relative path if specified is correct because Interviewer Server does not log an error if it cannot find the wav fil
142. Press the keyboard shortcut that is shown alongside the special response that is Ctrl 1 for the first special response in the list Ctrl 2 for the second and so on m For interviews that use the mouse Click on the appropriate check box To cancel a special response select the same special response again Your answer will usually be rejected if you select a special response in addition to entering an answer or if you select more than one special response Ending a Review You end a review in one of two ways either by accepting or rejecting the interview Accepting the Interview This is the usual way to end a review The status of the interview will be defined as both completed and reviewed In addition the call outcome on the participant s sample record will be changed to Reviewed but the sample record will remain in the COMPLETED queue On the left of the main screen click on the name of the last question so that the last question is displayed Click Next or press ENTER This accepts the interview and ends the review Use the options displayed in the center of the main screen to select another interview to review or click Exit to close the Review Interviews activity Note You might also be able to accept an interview and end the review by clicking the Stop button if one is displayed or by pressing the ESC key Rejecting the interview You can reject the interview if it does not meet your organization s standards When you
143. There is anew Sample Usage Across Projects report that shows a frequency table of the number of participant records in each queue across projects for each project For more information see the topic Phone on p 230 Phone Surveys You can now specify answering machine detection settings on the Dialer Settings tab For more information see the topic Autodialer Settings on p 159 x64 64 bit support x64 64 bit editions are now provided for the Data Collection applications note that IBM SPSS Data Collection Author Server Edition and IBM SPSS Data Collection Survey Reporter Server Edition are only provided as x86 32 bit Refer to the appropriate Data Collection installation guide for more information Fix pack and hotfix information You can now view information regarding which fix packs and hotfixes are installed via the application s Help menu Help gt About Data Collection gt Details What s New Information for Previous Releases What s New information for previous Data Collection Dimensions releases can be found in the Data Collection Dimensions What s New document The document is in Adobe Portable Document Format pdf Viewing and printing the document requires Adobe Reader If necessary you can download it at no cost from www adobe com Use the Adobe Reader online Help for answers to your questions regarding viewing and navigating the document 3 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide
144. This expression selects respondents whose gender is male and whose age is either 17 20 years or 21 24 years Combine expressions with the Or operator when you want to define a quota for respondents who satisfy at least one of the sub expressions 331 IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup The syntax is Expression1 Or Expression2 For example to define a quota for men of all ages and all women between the ages of 17 and 24 you would specify gender ContainsAny MALE Or age ContainsAny E1720 YEARS E2124 YEARS The gender expression selects all men and rejects all women The age expression selects anyone aged 17 to 24 and rejects anyone outside that age range A man passes the gender expression regardless of his age A woman fails the gender expression but passes the age expression if she is in the specified age group Not Use the Not operator when you want to define a quota for respondents who do not have a particular characteristic The syntax is Not Expression1 For example to define a quota for male respondents who are not in the 17 20 or 21 24 age groups that is they are younger than 17 or older than 24 gender ContainsAny MALE And Not age ContainsAny E1720 YEARS E2124 YEARS Arithmetic Operators in Expression Quotas You can define quotas in which the quota characteristics are based on the results of arithmetic calculations The arithmetic calculations consist of numeric variable
145. User s Guide should be placed Note that your IBM SPSS Data Collection administrator can customize the behavior of the fields in this frame so that for example you cannot change the names of the server database and sample table or you cannot choose which queues to copy from m In Server choose the name of the database server the default is the database server for the destination cluster If the server s name does not appear in the drop down list click Enter name and type the name when prompted to do so m In Database select the name of the sample database in which the sample table should be created the default is a database with the same name as on the originating server If you want to create a new database click New and enter the database name when prompted to do so m In Table select the name of the sample table to which the participant records should be added the default is a table with the same name as on the originating server If you would prefer to create a new table click New and enter the table name when prompted to do so m Select Copy participant records if you want to copy participant records from the local database server onto the destination machine s database server Note that if the sample table already exists on the destination machine only new records will be copied This matches the behavior of the Participants activity that uploads only records with new IDs m In From queues use Shift Click or Ctrl Cl
146. You can display variable names or variable labels the question text m You can display variable labels in any language in which the labels exist in the case data m The context for which labels are to be displayed should always be Question Extra choices may appear for some options These are label types not yet in use The Results section determines how your results are displayed Currently tables are always displayed even if Display table is not selected You can set between 0 and 4 decimal places If you want to display charts in addition to the table of frequency counts you may select Bar The Text Results section controls the amount of output displayed for text results You can choose to display the first 10 50 100 500 responses or an unlimited number of responses and to display the first 10 50 100 500 characters or an unlimited number of characters per response 229 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide To Set Options gt Choose Actions gt Options View Log View Log is an optional facility that displays the action log for the current session This shows the SQL commands that have been executed to display information about questions and variables selected in the Question frame on the main screen or to generate tables The View Log window also provides buttons for refreshing or clearing the log file Note Logging places an additional overhead on the server and should therefore be used with caut
147. a number of projects that have quotas based on the same combinations of variables you can save yourself time by copying an existing mqd file into the new project rather than recreating the file from scratch A typical example would be when you have a number of projects that all require quotas on the same demographic variables As long as the demographic variables are the same in all projects you can create the mqd for one project and then copy it to all the other projects source directories If the targets vary between projects or you want to add extra quotas for some projects you can edit the copied mqd file to make these adjustments as you would on the original file Note The mqd file contains a number of references to the project name If you copy mqd files between projects your first step after copying must be to edit the new file and change these references to point to the new project name For example if you copy cars mqd into the travel source directory you must change its name to travel mqd and then edit it to replace all references to cars with references to travel The mqd file is a text file containing XML code so you can edit it using any text editor Lines in the file are very long so it is usually best to make the replacements using a global search and replace command You must be very careful when editing the file because if you make the wrong changes the file can become unusable Chapter 3 IBM SPSS Data Collection
148. a or respondent details to be extracted from other files In addition log files are not project specific and many log entries contain the project name making it easy to locate information for a particular project Since these things are likely to be security issues in companies that provide Data Collection services to a number of external clients or where different teams work on different clients projects this first release of Manage Logs is available only to Data Collection administrators It is planned that future releases will automatically filter log entries so that users see only the entries that refer either to the system as a whole or to their own projects Administrators will of course still have access to all records Starting Manage Logs gt From the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration menu choose Tools gt Manage Logs View Settings The View Settings tab is where you specify the types of records you want to view and the number of records to display per page You can also specify a date range This applies to the log files themselves not to the records they contain The start date is the date on which the file was created 297 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide and the end date is the date that the file was last modified Some log files grow more quickly than others so in order to see records for a problem that arose on 26 October you may need to request log files for
149. activates all routing contexts that it finds but only sets one as the default Typical routing contexts are Paper for printed questionnaires Web for inbound interviews and CATI for outbound calling The Sample Management Quota and Interview Web Pages lines show whether these options have been set for this project The settings change according to the specifications on the other tabs Defining project information gt Select the Project Info tab gt Enter or select values as described above 111 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Sample Management f Project Info Quota _ Interview Web Pages Launch Launch Project Id TOTALAWARENESS Project Name TotalAwareness Description Please select the launch options you require pisampledb Id Queue Active Serial Test PreviousQueue Ap 56PubsServer i a Interviewer Server 5 6 Last updated Feb 11 2009 NAERAA erator hth EAE DE AIEN IIA EUEN A ANEA multimodel_sample mrs This is the standard CATI script that supports both without dialer and Web interviewing The script pends and completes quotas if a Quota nam exists KA 1 is gt If you select Use Sample Management on the Sample Management tab you will be prompted to enter the Sample Management requirements You must provide the following details With Phone Interviewing Select this checkbox if the project will use CATI for outbound calling Server The name of the ser
150. agrees to be interviewed now click the Start Interview button Figure 1 41 Start Interview button The first question will be displayed For more information see the topic Conducting interviews on p 194 When you reach the end of the interview the telephone call is automatically terminated You might now be required to review the answers that you have just entered For more information see the topic Reviewing interviews on p 200 Click the Start Dialing button to connect to another participant Scheduling an appointment If the participant agrees to be interviewed later on choose the call outcome that lets you make an appointment For more information see the topic Making appointments on p 192 Enter the appointment time that the participant asks for and click Submit The appointment is made and the telephone call is automatically terminated Click the Start Dialing button to connect to another participant Reconnecting to a participant Occasionally you might be disconnected from a participant before you have finished an interview For example m There is a fault with the telephone network or the autodialer m You or the participant accidently hang up the phone m You clicked the End Call button because you heard a loud noise on the telephone line In this situation you can normally click the Start Dialing button to recall the participant If a dialog box opens and asks you to select a call outcome click Cancel to
151. aler it is no longer able to generate calls but it does allow any active calls to finish If a telephone interviewer requests a call when the autodialer s current state is Stopped or Failed a message will explain that the autodialer is unavailable Connecting to an autodialer gt Inthe Real Time display select the check box on the left of the autodialer you want to connect to Only select an autodialer if its current state is Stopped or Failed Tip To connect to more than one autodialer select more than one check box To select all autodialers select the check box on the left of the header row gt Click the Start button as shown below The autodialer state changes to Starting and after a short pause changes to Active The autodialer is now able to generate calls Disconnecting from an autodialer gt Inthe Real Time display select the check box on the left of the autodialer you want to disconnect from Only select an autodialer if its current state is Active Tip To disconnect from more than one autodialer select more than one check box To select all autodialers select the check box on the left of the header row gt Click the Stop button as shown below The autodialer state changes to Stopping and the autodialer is no longer able to generate calls When all active calls have come to an end the autodialer state changes to Stopped 291 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Autodialer remova
152. alification Passed Review Audio Passed Answering Machine Detection Passed VoIP Passed Phone Reports Passed Remote Mode Passed Fail Over Passed Load Test Passed 50 concurrent interviews Benchmark N A 293 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide The Sytel dialer group dialing load test with 50 concurrent interviews details are provided below Hardware environment Single machine Intel Core 1 86Ghz 4GB RAM Software environment Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Server version IBM SPSS Data Collection Server 6 Patch 1 Sytel dialer version 1 0 9 Concurrent interviews 50 Loading mode interview per 2 seconds Duration 120 minutes Project Multimode Dialing mode Sytel group dialing Table 1 4 Timing results Timing Min Max Average Std Dev Time to login to Interviewer Server 0 82 1 45 0 97 0 98 Administration Time to start Phone Participants 1 46 2 22 1 73 1 74 Wait time 0 23 4 15 0 40 0 43 Time to start interview 0 22 2 05 0 26 0 27 Interviewing Activity Reports You use the Interviewing Activity Report to monitor the current status of the session engines that are responsible for running interviews Depending on the size of your site and the way it has been set up you may have one session engine that runs all interviews for all projects or you may have a number of engines that share the interview load between them
153. aling Uploading Records from the Text File gt gt On the Upload tab click Import Participants A progress box reports the number of records uploaded When all records have been processed click OK to close the progress box Notes m The Participants activity uploads all records in a text file in one go It is not possible to load only part of a file 93 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide If the text file you are uploading contains a record with the same Id as a record that is already in the sample table the Participants activity rejects the record and continues with the next record in the text file At the end of the upload Participants displays a list of rejected records If the upload process fails with the message CREATE DATABASE permission denied in database master the problem might be that the Anonymous IIS User account does not have permission to create databases Contact your IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server administrator for assistance Only values from newly added fields are added to existing records when uploading samples into an existing database Existing database values are not updated even when they differ from values in the newly uploaded file Viewing and Editing Participant Records You can view participant records that have already been loaded into the sample table The Participants activity has two options for this The View tab displays the rec
154. alize based on choose the field that should map to this required column Alternatively choose new to specify that no field should be mapped to this column Note If a column doesn t have a field mapped to it or if it does have a field mapped to it but the text file record contains no value for that field the upload process will insert the Default value in that column gt Click the Update symbol the blue check mark to save the change or the Cancel symbol the red cross to cancel it 89 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Adding Other Information to the Sample Table You use the Additional Fields tab to view or change the default mappings for fields in your participants text file that do not correspond to the required columns in the sample table Participants automatically maps these fields to additional columns and sets the column name to be the same as the field name The upload process will subsequently copy the value of that field to that column For example for telephone interviewing projects you might want to upload the participant s name and address In addition for projects whose participants speak different languages you might want to upload the participant s language so that you can use interviewer qualifications to match interviewers to participants For more information about interviewer qualifications search the JBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration User 5 Guide
155. also known as Decimal or Real The minimum value is 1 797693 13486232E308 and the maximum value is 1 797693 13486232E308 The smallest negative value is 4 94065645841247E 324 and the smallest positive value is 4 94065645841247E 324 Text Can in theory be up to 2 billion characters in length In reality the length is limited by the database being used to store the response In a I BM SPSS Data Collection relational MR database the maximum length is 4 000 characters Date also known as Date Time The earliest value is 1 January 100 and the latest value is 31 December 9999 Categorical also known as Single Response or Can in theory contain up to 2 billion categories Multiple Response In reality the number depends on the available memory and the Data Source Component DSC being used A category name must contain between 1 and 128 characters All A question name must contain between 1 and 128 characters Shared Lists Shared lists are a quick and efficient way of dealing with single and multiple choice responses that are common to a number of questions A typical example might be a five point rating scale that you want to use for rating various aspects of product Rather than retyping the five responses for each question or copying and pasting them from one question to another you can set them up as a shared list with a unique name and then insert them as a block wherever they are needed Shared lists are shown at the end of the
156. ame and then closes the original file and opens the new one If you want to save the questionnaire with a new name without opening the new file use Save Copy As instead gt Choose either File gt Save As or File gt Save Copy As This opens the Save As dialog box 76 Chapter 7 gt gt Z Save As Web Page Dialog ee xj Filename Filemask mdd Save As ab Close Folders Name type E Root Buying Questionnaire mdd mdd 5 10 2004 12 50 34 PM H Role Library OPMAdmins Car Satisfaction Questionnaire mdd mdd 5 10 2004 1 11 20 PM J Shared Library Conference Evaluation Questionnaire mdd mdd 6 2 2004 11 26 42 AM da uee General Customer Satisfaction Questionnaire short mdd mdd 5 10 2004 12 46 38 PM a Demographics Health and Safety Questionnaire mdd mdd 5 10 2004 12 44 38 PM H B Human Resources Product Evaluation Questionnaire mdd mdd 5 10 2004 1 10 08 PM Seminar Evaluation Questionnaire mdd mdd 5 11 2004 4 11 58 PM H A Products and Sewices Sawice Representative Evaluation Questionnaire mdd mdd 5 11 2004 4 12 56 PM a Ratings and Frequencies Store Evaluation Questionnaire mdd mdd 4 19 2004 9 31 46 PM Website Tourist Attraction Questionnaire mdd mdd 5 24 2004 11 56 06 AM Training Evaluation Questionnaire mdd mdd 6 2 2004 11 26 42 AM University Student Satisfaction Questionnaire mdd mdd 4 28 2004 1 33 00 PM In the Filename box type a name for the new file
157. and to disconnect from an autodialer Note To use an autodialer you also need to specify for each of your telephone interviewing projects that an autodialer should be used For more information see Interview Settings Creating a dialer configuration file A dialer configuration file is a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet that contains two worksheets named Dialers and Positions To help you create your first dialer configuration file an example spreadsheet called DialerConfiguration xls is included with the IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library and by default is installed in folder INSTALL_FOLDER IBM SPSS DataCollection 6 DDL Administration Tools Dialers worksheet You define each autodialer on a separate row of the Dialers worksheet The first row must contain the column headings A E c a E maa par 1 DialerName Description Address Dialertype RemoteTrunkGroup Port Status _InternationalAccessCode 2 Dialer1 Description for dialer1 mrDialer 7000 00 a T The following table describes the columns in the Dialers worksheet Column Description DialerName A name that uniquely identifies the autodialer For example ChicagoDialer03 Description A free format description of the autodialer Address The network address of the autodialer For example an IP address 285 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Column Description DialerType When utilizing a 3rd party d
158. anging the Default Settings on p 169 Configuring Answering Machine Detection IBM SPSS Data Collection Dialer supports a simple answering machine detection AMD that can be useful when dialing residential numbers It is based on the observation that human greetings are usually short whereas answering machine messages are long When an auto dialed participant record is dialed and Dialer detects that an answering machine picked up the call the call is automatically ended with the Answering Machine call outcome when the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server is properly configured to support the feature Answering machine detection is currently configured through the DPM Explorer tool When answering machine filtering is in effect amd 1 calls are only connected to an interviewer if the greeting is shorter than max All other calls are dispositioned as answering machines and hung up by the dialer The dialer can optionally play a sound file amfile to the answering machine A DSP listens for the greeting The DSP asserts voice when the received audio signal raises above a threshold db dBm decibels relative to 1 mW power Start of voice also starts timer max m Ifthe DSP asserts end of voice before timer max expires the call is connected to an interviewer Since the interviewer does hear the respondent s greeting the dialer plays a distinct beep WBeep that informs the interviewer to start talking m If timer max expires b
159. anging the settings in catifields_default mdd e Adding a field to catifields_default mdd See this topic Editing catifields_default mdd to call outcomes e Changing the settings in DPM s site properties e Adding a call outcome to DPM s site properties e Changing the mapping of autodialer status codes Editing DPM s Site Properties Editing catifields_default mdd This topic describes how to carry out the following tasks Changing the settings in catifields_default mdd m Adding a field to catifields_default mdd 170 Chapter 7 Changing the Settings in catifields_default mdd To edit the catifields_default mdd file you will need to use MDM Explorer as follows In Windows Explorer run MDM Explorer exe which by default is located in the following directory m x86 32 bit installations INSTALL _FOLDER IBM SPSS DataCollection 6 DDL Code Tools VB6 MDM Explorer m x64 64 bit installations INSTALL _FOLDER IBM SPSS DataCollection 6 DDL Code Tools VB NET MDM Explorer From the File menu choose Open Document Open catifields_default mdd which by default is located in folder FMRoot Shared Cati In the left pane click the MDM collection that contains the property that you want to change see the table below In the upper right pane double click the MDM property that you want to change see the table below This opens a dialog box In the dialog box change the value as required and cli
160. ant may have given you This is particularly useful in business to business calling where you may arrange the appointment with the participant s secretary All comments are stored in the sample record and are displayed in the Comments box at the top of the interviewing screen A note next to the box tells you how many comments there are You can view the comments by scrolling through the text but it s easier to click the edit button next to the Comments box to display them in a new dialog box 191 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Figure 1 48 Comments dialog box 2 Comment Web Page Dialog Friday 1 June 2007 3 33 PM AUS Eastern Standard Time acarleton Sec says he is in a mtg now then out of office until Tues Call back Tues and speak to Annie to arrange date Call outcome chosen Not available Tuesday 5 June 2007 10 02 4M AUS Eastern Standard Time acarleton Spoke to Annie call later today to make an appt Tuesday 5 June 2007 2 03 PM AUS Eastern Standard Time acarleton She just looked at her calendar and said tomorrow is better Call outcome chosen Not available Wednesday 6 Jun 2007 9 08 4M AUS Eastern Standard Time acarleton Will be out of the office for the rest of the week but next week is good Call outcome chosen Appointment 2007 06 11 11 00 Each comment is displayed on three lines The first line shows the date and time local to th
161. anual Station modem Modem Station modem Modem Station E109 Interviewer Extension Pos9 The following table describes the columns in the Positions worksheet Column Position Description A name that uniquely identifies the position For example RO2 S18 for station 18 in room 2 Remember that someone will have to enter this name on the corresponding telephone interviewer or supervisor station so do not make names too long or difficult to type For more information see the topic Setting up stations to use an autodialer on p 287 The maximum Position length is 80 characters DialerName The autodialer that will be used by this position For example ChicagoDialer03 This value must match one of the entries in the DialerName column in the Dialers worksheet RemoteTrunkGroup Identifies a particular ISDN trunk to support connecting remote interviewers and or supervisors This setting can be overridden on a per position basis If this setting is not specified for the position the dialer s RemoteTrunkGroup should be used If RemoteTrunkGroup is not set for the dialer a trunk group should not be specified when establishing the remote connection it will be left to the dialer to determine which trunk group to use Interviewers cannot specify the RemoteTrunkGroup value 286 Chapter 7 Column Description Extension The telephone extension used at this position For the IBM SPSS Data Coll
162. anually 58 Sample database which to use 82 Sample fields changing 80 Sample file uploading records 92 Sample management allow use of 109 setting up 111 Sample script changing 79 testing 80 Sample table column set up parameters 89 deleting records from 93 downloading records to a text file 93 required columns 84 segment field 89 viewing and editing records 93 which to use 82 Script library loading Routing statements from 60 Scripts converting v2 3 to v3 3 Segments including in sample table 89 reporting on for telephone interviewing projects 260 Settings tab 337 Shared lists creating 42 overview 42 using 44 Silent calls monitoring 272 Single multiple response questions changing type 20 34 creating 16 using shared lists with 42 44 Site properties default settings for Phone Surveys changing 169 Site to site activation 118 Special characters displayed in telephone interviewing reports 230 Specified other single multiple response grids 32 single multiple response questions 18 Stations using for audio monitoring 287 using for autodialing 287 using for playback of audio recordings 287 Status activity on demand refreshing 218 overview 216 starting 218 Superversions expressions for 271 Survey Results adding new variables to an existing table 223 boxes instead of text in the Build Filter window 229 categorical variables in tables 222 clearing filters 226 clearing filters a
163. appens those interviews are automatically transferred to a different engine the respondent or interviewer is not normally aware of this The report will show that the engine has failed and you will see the 294 Chapter 7 information for other engines change accordingly for example you may see that a previously unused engine has now taken over some of those interviews You can look at interviewing activity in two ways m Engine status reports the status of each engine showing which engines are running which projects and how busy they are m Project status reports the status of each project showing the engines on which interviews for each project are running Both reports show the current numbers of live and test interviews per project If interviews are taking place on projects to which you do not have access the information about those interviews and projects is summarized in a single Other Projects entry Starting the Interviewing Activity Report gt From the menu choose Tools gt Interviewing Activity The page displays a table showing the status of each interviewing engine Engine Status The Engine Status report takes each engine in turn and reports the percentage loading that is how busy it is where fully loaded is 100 how many interviews are currently running and how many projects this covers You can expand the projects count to see the project names if you wish If an engine is running interviews for p
164. ared area and in your Users folder they do not mean that you have exclusive access to the files in the Shared folder When you have finished working on a project you should always check in all the files and then unlock the project Leaving Build gt f Click the Home button This closes your session and returns you to IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration Do not close your browser with Build still running as this leaves the questionnaire definition file open and unavailable to other users until Build times out Questions Build supports the following question types m Single and multiple response Numeric Text Single and multiple response grids Numeric grids It also supports Shared Lists as an efficient method of defining responses that are common to a number of questions and Display Text items for defining instructional and other non question text that you want to include in the questionnaire Build has its own questionnaire library that comes with a number of standard questionnaires that you can use or modify as required You can also add your own questionnaires to the library For more information see the topic Using the Questionnaire Library on p 47 Single and Multiple Response Questions 17 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Single and multiple response questions also known as categorical questions have a predefined set of answers from which choices can be ma
165. asho What is your overall opinion of the products Suds What is your overall opinion of the products and so on These texts are unlikely to be what you want to see in your tables To Create a Single Multiple Response Grid Question gt Click Insert Item This opens the New Item dialog box Aj New Item Web Page Dialog xi Routing Items iO ce Single Response Question 0 Multiple Response Question 2 Numeric Question 5l Text Question B O Display Text Ez C Single Response Grid E c Multiple Response Grid E Numeric Grid gt Choose Single Response Grid or Multiple Response Grid and click OK 32 Chapter 1 Project holidays n r BARBARA Primary Language English United States EQuest4 Apply Undo Name rating Question Text How would you rate the hotel for the following Question Subjects Enter one subject on each line Friendliness of staff Cleanliness of room Room serice Leisure facilities Business facilities Breakfast menu Responses Enter one response on each line Previous Insert tem gt In Name optionally replace the default item name with a name of your choice gt In Question Subjects type the subjects that you want to ask about In Responses type the answer texts one per line See Question Limits for information about the maximum number of responses you can place in a list To Set Advanced Options gt Select the Advanced tab 33
166. asked you to write down the participant s text responses instead of typing them in you can use the reviewing phase to type them in When reviewing an interview you might find that if you change the answer to a question typically a multiple choice question additional questions appear that did not appear when you conducted the interview Your supervisor will tell you what to do if this should happen You might be asked to leave these questions unanswered or your supervisor might tell you which answers to enter Starting a review If the review does not start automatically when you end an interview or choose a call outcome click the Review Current Interview button in the center of the Phone Participants main screen Note that you can only review the interview that you have just completed It is not possible for you to review any other interviews 201 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide The Review screen Figure 1 54 The Review screen 1D30002386 a 555 edit RECALL Please rate the following characteristics of the service representative on a scale from 1to5 If you did not deal with a service representative please choose 6 1 2 3 7 5 6 Poor FairGood v e4 ExcellentN A ood Knowledge of the mont HO MH 0o OB 1 Sa eyo oO BE eee Oo Bn Eficiencyfqicimess 1 0 BI Ability ti ee es 6 iE When the review starts the Phone Participants activity shows t
167. ata will use the column allocations made using Metadata Model to Quantum rather than making new allocations Note If you downloaded the mdd in order to run Metadata Model to Quantum remember to upload it into the shared area before running Export Data 264 Chapter 7 Exporting data In Export to choose the data format in which you want to write the exported data Hierarchical data is supported in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Data File and Data Collection XML Data File formats Note When the MDM document contains unbounded loop questions and you select IBM SPSS Data Collection Data File or Data Collection XML Data File the export will use HDATA otherwise VDATA is used If the data format allows more than one file type use the File type box to select the one you want to use If the questionnaire definition mdd file contains more than one language use the Language box to select the language you want to use for question response and other texts The default is the project s default base language In System variables choose how you want to deal with system variables You can export all system variables no system variables or only the common system variables If you do not want to export all data variable types do the following m In Variable types choose Select below Export Data displays one checkbox for each variable type below the Variable types box m Uncheck the boxes for the variables you do not want to exp
168. ata Collection Interviewer Server Activities in IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration 0000 c cect teens 4 Getting Started with the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Activities 5 Managing Your Work 0 0000 cece tenet een eee 8 BUG eiccdcd sae anada mnada aa Gite Coie hind abe aaa eee RCA a eee aie 9 Participant RUNES edadea pode ated eek Gd Boe whee h ees te dae eke Bad we 78 Participants egsa ead nnd eae a a EE arene a wie e ae Ua ag ae Rane aiai 81 LAUNCH 42 can cada eee eet OH Kea Haden ead eae ak Sake ead da wee eae 108 Promote Proje Ctesi maaana aiaa deiig ena diss nO hiat aaa i AEn Roatan de dom ian deride a ata e aa ai 118 Emaili i taia anna a gid aa al a ate ered iaa aaea ahia a aroa aaa aia a Aa iA arene aoe oa 121 Phone Surveys 000 c cette eee 128 Phone Participants siccis eani araa aieeaa VS ae dais Bee dee es Seed Pee 177 Review Interviews 2 0 0 0 0 ccc een nent teen eee 203 QuGtaS 3 6 toes Het See Sh atlas Gane ai i aea Pade dees Moen 211 Status ssaa e ds Pea ade bax ee be dawsiadwia deeds hei degan Mate tema de r a 216 Survey Results sacca aiia a anna aia a ana iaia aeaa a a a a a aaa E aT E AEAEE a Ea a EE 218 PHONG ss aisre g ee ee 230 Export Data posms massana ee RW eet ae BES Salad ew are E eda E E AE EEEE ase es 261 Interviewer Monitoring 0 ccc ccc en ee ete nent nee eens 272 Dialer Administration 2 0 0 0 cc cece een teens 284 In
169. ault settings for other parameters by typing new values into the text boxes When entering calling times you can specify times in 12 hour hh mm am pm or 24 hour hh mm format but the next time you open the Phone Surveys the times will be shown in 24 hour format If you want calls to be assigned to interviewers based on interviewers qualifications select Interviewer Qualifications 139 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Changing the Default Settings If you find that for every new project you always change the settings on the Parameters tab to the same new values you can instead change the default settings that Interviewer Server provides so that you no longer need to do this For more information see the topic Changing the Default Settings on p 169 Ordering Settings The Ordering tab provides options for defining the order in which records are retrieved from each individual queue For example you may want to first dial records with a higher number of attempts when scanning the Recall queue The Ordering tab lists the current queue order settings Fields Parameters _ Appointments Overrides Call Outcomes Interview Settings Dialer Settings Manage Phone Survey Project Id BASICQUOTA Project Name BASICQUOTA Description Order records by Ordering Weighting has not yet been specified Order records within each queue by Appointment AppointmentTime ASC HandleQueue_REFUSED ReturnT
170. ays taken from the most recent version and there is special handling of changes to loop definition ranges and the minimum and maximum values of variables between the versions The version expression syntax is lt version gt lt version gt lt version gt VersionName VersionName VersionName where VersionName is the name of a major or minor version and indicates that the following range is to be excluded You can specify the name of versions that do not exist in a range MDM will then automatically use the next highest or lowest name it encounters depending on whether the name is specified at the start or end of the range and whether the range is in ascending or descending sequence 272 Chapter 1 Examples Expression Description Include all versions in the MDM Document If there are no versions this selects the unversioned Document 2 3 7 Include versions 2 3 and 7 and give highest precedence to version 7 the next highest precedence to version 3 and the lowest precedence to version 2 5 1 Include versions 5 through 1 giving the highest precedence to version 1 2 7 9 Include versions 2 through 7 and version 9 2 11 43 1 5 4 Include versions 2 through 11 but exclude versions 3 1 to 5 4 inclusive i Include the most recent version in the MDM Document LATEST Select the most recent version in the versions collection whether or not it
171. b 52 Chapter 7 ENET x Questions 2 note EI C it coto Bl C Goto C Exit E Bookmark TE insert trom Script Library DD C iom Script advanced Import from Library gt Choose Note and click OK This displays the Edit tab for notes m Admin Primary Language English United States hye Name Apply Undo Note Note Text Insert tem gt In Name optionally replace the default item name with a name of your choice gt In Note Text type the note Bookmarks 53 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide The bookmark item identifies a particular point in the questionnaire with a unique name It is most commonly used in large or complex questionnaires where respondents can reach a certain point in the questionnaire via a number of routes By placing a bookmark in the questionnaire you can easily gather all respondents together before proceeding with the rest of the questionnaire Bookmarks are also useful as destinations for Gotos when you do not want to jump directly to a question gt Click Insert Item This opens the New Item dialog box gt Select the Routing Items tab New Item Web Page Dialog m Bookmark Oeser trom Script Library Dc iom Script advanced Import from Library gt Choose Bookmark and click OK This displays the Edit tab for bookmarks U Primary Language English United States
172. b In Name enter the name of your new filter The maximum filter name length is 128 characters In Filter expression enter the expression for your new filter The maximum filter expression length is 512 characters For more information see Writing a Filter Expression at the end of this topic Click Add This adds your new filter to the list of filters To save your new filter and close the Set Filters dialog box click OK Alternatively click Cancel if you do not want to save your new filter Note An alternative for adding either a date or sample filter is using the Copy button This will copy the selected filter allowing you to rename the filter and edit the syntax Editing a sample filter From the Tools menu choose Set Filters This opens the Set Filters dialog box Select the Sample Filter tab In Filters select the filter you want to edit and click Edit In Filter expression amend the expression and click Update For more information see Writing a Filter Expression at the end of this topic To save your revised filter and close the Set Filters dialog box click OK Alternatively click Cancel if you do not want to save your amendment 258 Chapter 7 vy v vy vy y Deleting a sample filter From the Tools menu choose Set Filters This opens the Set Filters dialog box Select the Sample Filter tab In Filters select the filter you want to delete and click Delete This opens a confirmation dialog box
173. be displayed with a text other than the one shown on this tab type the text in the Text box To define routing for a special response select the routing destination from the GoTo dropdown list for that response If you want to skip forwards in the questionnaire you must define the question you want to route to before you can select it from the dropdown list To Set Presentation Options gt Select the Presentation tab Project holidays m BARBARA f Overview Edit Advanced ERA ei ee Primary Language English United States AN Eis Page Presentation Style g Apply Undo Question Size of Response Box Width Characters Height Characters Previous Insert tem gt In Presentation Style select a layout template m Click the button next to the empty box m On the Select page locate the template file and click Select For more information see the topic Copying Pictures and Presentation Templates on p 50 The filename appears in the Presentation Style box gt In Width and Height enter the dimensions of the response box in characters To Set Export and Analysis Options gt Select the Export Analysis tab 30 Chapter 7 Figure 1 5 Export Analysis tab t Buildtest bhorton These settings will apply when the collected data is downloaded using the Export Data activity or when the data is analyzed using the Tabulation activity To change the current settings for a question sele
174. be selected for use in Build To Download a File from the Project s Folder gt On the Select dialog box choose the file you want to download from the list of filenames on the right of the dialog box gt Click Download This opens a standard Windows File Download dialog box gt Either click Open to open the file from its current location or click Save to save the file in a location of your choice Non Question Items You can add the following non question items to your questionnaires Notes for inserting general comments about the questionnaire m Bookmarks for naming specific locations in the questionnaire m Mandatory and conditional routing for jumping over questions that are not appropriate for the current respondent Exit codes for forcibly terminating the interview IOM script items for inserting Routing statements written in the Interview Scripting language directly into the questionnaire There is also an Insert from Script Library item for inserting Routing statements from a library file Notes Use a Note item when you want to include notes or other information that is not part of the questionnaire Typically you might use this item type to make notes about further work that needs to be done on the questionnaire or on special information about the questionnaire that needs to be recorded for future reference gt Click Insert Item This opens the New Item dialog box gt Select the Routing Items ta
175. ber of calls made to this record after an appointment was set Audit A list of the changes that interviewers have made to this record CallOutcome The call outcome code for the previous call to this record CallRecordingsCount The number of call recordings for this record Call recording is an option when a telephone interviewing project uses an autodialer Comments Additional information about the participant ConnectCount The number of connect returns for the record DayPart Ensure that records are called at specific times of the day in order to increase the chance of success in reaching participants ExpirationTime Defines the participant record expiration date and time For example a project may dictate that participant records can only be called within a specific date range Expired records are not available for dialing except for retrieving appointments 86 Chapter 7 Column Description InternalDialerFlags Freeform string that can be used to store whatever your dialer requires For example this field could contain Name Value pairs that you need to store after calling the record This could be useful when the record is dialed again InterviewMode How the record can be used set to Web for an inbound self completion interview or Web CATI for outbound telephone interviewing NoAnswerCount The number of no answer returns for the record PhoneNumber
176. bles if you wish The Details Pane lists the categories responses in the variable that is currently selected in the List Pane The Quota Construction Area is where you define the quotas by dragging in variables from the List Pane and then adding targets The List and Details Panes are undockable This means that you can convert them into windows resize them and move them anywhere on the screen even outside the Quota window Options in the View menu also allow you to hide components of the Quota window which can be useful when you have finished defining quotas on a large grid and you want to see the whole grid on the screen 310 Chapter 2 Docking Undocking the List and Details Panes To Undock a Pane gt Double click the double bars at the top of the pane To Dock an Undocked Pane gt Double click the pane s title bar Changing the Layout of the List Pane gt Click one of the following buttons in the toolbar Display a small icon followed by the variable name Display a list of icons and variable names ezaz Display a list of icons and variable names Return to the default four column layout Displaying All Variable Types in the List Pane It is less common to define quotas based on numeric and text variables so the List Pane does not display them unless requested To Display All Variable Types in the List Pane gt Choose All Variables from the drop down list at the top of the View Pane
177. can be used to override default was received actions z Start recording for use with recfile option beg 3 6 Call outcome QSAMP_RINGING does not map to a supported CallOutcome in Interviewer Phone 5 6 7 Call outcomes can be mapped to other tipcode values in section qsamp map in the qts sms ini file 8 Precise tone meaning the 480 620 Hz busy tone of the North American Precise Audible Tones Plan 9 Condition S silence is only generated in AMD filtering or calibration mode amd 1 or amd 2 10 Condition W waiting is generated by signaling events with the action announcemt in causes cfg Controlling Access to Phone Survey s Features You can control access to the various tabs in Phone Surveys by assigning users or roles to Phone Survey s activity features The activity features that you can use are shown in the following table Tab Name To View this tab To Edit this tab To Delete records from this tab Fields Can view fields Can edit fields Not applicable Parameters Can view parameters Can edit parameters Not applicable Call Outcomes Can view call outcomes Can edit call outcomes Can delete call outcomes 169 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Tab Name To View this tab To Edit this tab To Delete records from this tab Interview Settings Can view interview Can edit interview Not applicable settings settings Dialer Settings Can view
178. category of a single variable or they can be two dimensional cross tabulations using one or more variables on the side and top of the table Tables can be filtered to include certain categories of respondents only for example only women aged between 21 and 30 or to include or exclude interviews that terminated in a particular way for example to include all completed interviews or to exclude test interviews Survey Results uses the questionnaire definition mdd file in the Master project folder and reads the location of the case data from that file If the mdd file contains more than one version Survey Results uses the versions labelled LATEST Support for hierarchical data Starting with version 6 Survey Results supports hierarchical data in the form of unbounded loop questions Unbounded loop questions are read from the MDM document fields which include all questions as fields Starting Survey Results gt Select the project you want to work on and click Survey Results 219 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide The Main Screen IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration iO OwnCar B OwnCarQuotaPendResu NumCars OldestCar E EverOwnedcar A WhyNoCar Y InternetAccess a InternetAccessQuotaPe amp InternetHours A DescribeInternetTime TestQuotaResults Select a variable from the list on the left Or Choose Build Table from the Actions menu
179. changing their values in a dialog box m Advanced This option allows you to write your selection criteria by typing an expression similar to the WHERE expression in an SQL SELECT statement If you select this option you can also update the selected records by typing another expression similar to the SET expression in an SQL UPDATE statement Note You can select the Advanced option only if you have been assigned the Participants activity feature Can advanced edit participants For more information see the topic Controlling Access to Data and Features on p 107 96 Chapter 7 gt gt In Table Setup choose which fields will appear on the View tab as follows m To add a field to those displayed click on the field name in the Available Fields list and then click Add To remove a field from those displayed click on the field name in the Displayed Fields list and then click Remove Tip In Table Setup you can select multiple fields by pressing Ctrl or Shift while you click Note that Table Setup shows only those fields that you have access to For more information see the topic Controlling Access to Data and Features on p 107 In Table Setup choose the order of the fields displayed on the View tab as follows m To move a field towards the left of the page click on the field name in the Displayed Fields list and then click Move Up To move a field towards the right of the page click on the field name in t
180. ck OK When you have finished choose Exit from the File menu and when prompted save the file to its original location Can Edit During Survey Can Tabulate expand the Fields collection then expand the node for the desired field and then click the Custom Properties collection are very similar to the setting names with the exception of the Editable property which corresponds to the Can Edit During Survey setting Tab Name Tab Setting Corresponding Corresponding Valid Values MDM Collection MDM Property Fields Label Expand the Fields Label A string that collection and in describes the field the left pane click the field required Fields Required Show In the left pane The property names True or False 171 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Tab Name Tab Setting Corresponding MDM Collection Corresponding MDM Property Valid Values Interview Settings Dialing Options Custom Properties DialerType 0 for Manual Interviewer dials numbers manually 1 for Modem Show Dial Contact button on the Interviewer screen 2 for Dialer Extension Show Start Dialing button on the Interviewer screen or 3 for Dialer Group Predictive Show Start Dialing button on the Interviewer screen The installation value is 0 Interview Settings Show Specific Contact button on the Interviewer
181. ck Update To Delete a Code Select the code you want to delete and then click the Delete call outcome button Figure 1 28 Delete icon x To Display a Code when Interviews are Running Select the code you want to change and then click the Edit call outcome button Figure 1 29 Edit icon ny Select the Show During Interview check box Click Update To Specify which Codes should Prompt for Appointment Details Select the code you want to change and then click the Edit call outcome button 153 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Figure 1 30 Edit icon ny gt Select the Show Appointment Page check box gt Click Update To Specify which Code should be used for Canceled Contacts gt Select the code you want to change and then click the Edit call outcome button Figure 1 31 Edit icon ey gt Select the Cancel Code check box gt Click Update To Hide a Code from Interviewers gt Select the code you want to change and then click the Edit call outcome button Figure 1 32 Edit icon ny gt Select the Always Hidden check box gt Click Update Changing the Default Settings If you find that for every new project you always change the settings on the Call Outcomes tab to the same new values you can instead change the default settings that Interviewer Server provides so that you no longer need to do this By editing the default settings you can also do the follow
182. ck box gt Ifyou do not want Participants to make the column name in the sample table the same as the field name in the text file change the value of New column name Note Column names in the sample table must comply with the rules for SQL column names In general a column name must start with a letter or an underscore and be followed by any combination of letters numbers underscores and the or characters For more information use the search function in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library documentation to search for the text Rules for Regular Identifiers and in the search results open the topic with that title gt Ifyou do not want Participants to set the value of this column to Null when the record in the text file does not contain a corresponding value for this column enter the new default value in Default Note The default value must be a valid for the data type of the column as specified in Type gt In Type choose the data type that matches the type of data the field contains Note This column shows the IBM SPSS Data Collection Data Model data types When Participants creates the columns in the database it converts these data types into the data types used by your database application Most database applications have a wider range of data types than the Data Model so Participants chooses the database data type that best matches the data that it finds in the text field For e
183. columns for start and finish times in a specific time zone Select time zone O Interview Server time zone Respondent time zone other Time zone GMT Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London Filter Options Select a preset filter None View Preset Edit Presets Select filtering based on data collection status Select Respondent data only O Test data only Oall data Where interviews Completed successfully o Active in progress C Timed out o Stopped by script o Stopped by respondent O Interview system shutdown O Reviewed O Signal O Select cases finished after a certain date time Date 4 1 t Time 06 C Select cases finished before a certain date time Date 4 18 2011 Time 06 10 21 Export Data uses the project s DataLocation property in DPM to find the questionnaire definition mdd file and the case data If DataLocation points to a project folder in the User area and there is no mdd file there Export Data will instead look for a mdd file in the Shared project folder If the mdd file contains more than one version Export Data uses the superversion that is a combination of all versions which results in data for all questions that appear in any version being exported If you are exporting data in IBM SPSS Quantum format and IBM SPSS Data Collection Metadata Model to Quantum has previously been run on the case data Export D
184. ct the question from the list on the left and change the options in the table below Apply Undo What is your name Question Text Variable Lahel i is your name Previous gt In Variable Label type the text you want to use as the variable label in place of the question text Single and Multiple Response Grid Questions Q30 How interested were you in the museum displays SELECT ONE ANSWER ON EACH UNE ACROSS Hot Hot at all particularly Slightly Very interested interested No opinion interested interested Dinosaurs o o o o o Conservation m m o o o Fish and reptiles o o o o o Fossils m m o o o Birds o o o o o Insects o m o o o Whales o o E o o Mammals o o o o o Minerals o o o o o Ecology o o o o m Botany o m o o o Origin of species o o o o o Human biology o o Oo g o Evolution o o E o o Wildlife in danger o o o o o Other o o o o o Grid questions are an efficient way of asking the same question about a number of related topics The question is displayed in a tabular or grid form with the subquestions subjects forming one dimension of the grid and the responses forming the other A typical example of a single multiple response grid is a question that asks respondents to rate a number of products on a scale of Excellent to Very Poor Build provides separate options for creating single response and multiple response grids but you can still change the response type of individual responses within a grid if
185. ct uses an autodialer the autodialer returns a status code at the end of each call attempt to indicate whether a successful call was generated IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server then maps the status code to one of the call outcomes for the project For example if the autodialer returns the status code Congested meaning that it was unable to make the call because the telephone network is congested Interviewer Server maps that code to the NetworkBusy call outcome and as a result the participant record is assigned to the RECALL queue by the sample management script You can change the default mapping of autodialer status codes to call outcomes as follows gt Start DPM Explorer and expand the site s Properties node as described in Changing the Settings in DPM s Site Properties above gt In the left pane expand the DefaultDialerCallOutcomes collection and click the autodialer status code whose mapping you want to change gt In the upper right pane double click ReturnCode gt In the lower right pane change the value to the name of the call outcome that should be mapped to this autodialer status code gt Click the Apply button which is in the lower right corner Phone Participants You use Phone Participants to conduct interviews by telephone Each interview has a dialing phase The actions you take in this phase depend on whether the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server project you are working o
186. date the shift Otherwise click Cancel to discard the changes To Delete a Shift Select an existing shift in the Regular Shifts table 148 Chapter 7 gt Click the Delete regular shift button Figure 1 22 x Date overrides The table lists all date override shifts currently defined for the selected sub schedule Date overrides allow you to specify specific dates and or times where appointments are not allowed as well as define specific dates and times that will override the shifts defined in the Regular Shifts table To Create New Date Override Shifts for a Sub Schedule Select a sub schedule from the drop down field If no sub schedules exist you must either create a new sub schedule or load an appointment schedule template both explained above Click the Add button in the Date Overrides table Figure 1 23 The Date Override dialog displays providing options for defining a new date override Ono appointment OP s Start time End time March 2009 Wed Thu 26 i 3 23 2 9 16 23 30 No appointment Select this option when you want to define specific dates where no appointments are allowed Date override Select this option when you want to define specific dates and times that override the shifts defined in the Regular Shifts table Start time When No appointment is selected the starting time at which participants may not be called Enter the starting time When Date overrid
187. de Build provides separate options for creating single response and multiple response questions and you must choose the one that matches the types of responses you want to allow You can filter the response list so that when interviews take place only responses that were or were not mentioned at a previous question are displayed This is particularly useful for spontaneous and prompted awareness questions where you want to prompt only for the responses that were not mentioned spontaneously In a multiple response question you can flag some of the responses as single response for example if there is a None of the above response If the response list contains an Other response respondents can also give answers that are not in the predefined list You can associate pictures with responses These can be in any of the following formats gif jpg jpeg png or bmp When you export categorical questions the export process exports the question and response texts exactly as they appear in the questionnaire Sometimes you ll want to use different texts in your analyses than you used during interviewing A typical example is question text where you ll tend to use a more wordy approach in interviewing than in analyses saying for example What is your overall opinion of the product rather than simply Overall opinion Categorical responses are exported as numeric codes where codes are assigned to responses in the order
188. definition in two sections The Metadata section contains the questions and the Routing section contains statements that display or print the questions in the order they appear on the Overview tab In most surveys you ll want to do more than this For example you might want to add a page banner to display the survey title at the top of each page or you ll want to present a block of questions in a different order for each respondent These and other such tasks are controlled by the Routing section of the questionnaire You can always use an IOM Script item to insert statements in the Routing section but Build comes with a library of script snippets for common tasks that you can load into the questionnaire Some of these script snippets can be used exactly as they are but others will need to be modified once they have been loaded for example to replace dummy question or response names with the corresponding names from your questionnaire Each script file is named according to what it does and contains comments explaining how it should be used When you insert statements in this way Build creates a single IOM Script item for all the statements in the file You can then edit these statements in the usual way if necessary To Insert Code from the Script Library Click Insert Item This opens the New Item dialog box Select the Routing Items tab x Questions note EI lt i coto z C Goto C Exit m Bookmark D C Insert
189. dering tab 141 Quota control allow use of 109 prioritization of multiple responses 214 see also Quotas activity 211 see alsoIBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup program 315 setting up 113 Quota files reusing in different projects 333 346 Index Quotas functions in expressions 328 Quotas activity changing targets behavior flags cell priorities 212 checking quotas 211 overview 211 prioritizing quotas 214 starting 211 Refused 182 Rejected 182 replicates 91 Reports for telephone interviewing projects 230 RequiresManualDial 92 Response lists filtering based on previous questions 20 34 Response types for shared lists 43 single multiple response grids 32 38 single multiple response questions 18 Response subject lists adding responses subjects to 65 deleting responses subjects 65 moving responses subjects in 65 Responses common to several questions 42 44 Review Interviews accepting an interview 210 audio recordings playback 287 changing the answer to a question 208 closing 211 conducting a review 207 ending a review 210 keyboard shortcuts 204 207 208 main screen 204 overview 203 rejecting an interview 210 selecting an interview to review 206 Routing for single multiple responses 18 grid response lists 32 38 Routing goto s conditional 54 unconditional 53 Routing in scripts 53 54 Routing section name of 70 Routing statements adding from script library 60 adding m
190. dialer settings Can edit dialer settings Not applicable By default the CATISupervisor role is assigned to all the activity features shown apart from Can edit fields Can edit call outcomes and Can delete call outcomes For more information about activity features search the JBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration User 5 Guide for the topic Assigning Users or Roles to Activity Features Changing the Default Settings When you create a new project the settings in Phone Surveys tabs are populated with default settings provided by IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server You can change Interviewer Server s default settings so that when you create a new project Phone Surveys tabs will be populated with the values that you defined Depending on the tab the default settings for that tab are stored in different locations as shown in the following table Tab Name Location of Default Settings Fields In the catifields_default mdd file Parameters In DPM s Distributed Property Management s site properties Call Outcomes In DPM s site properties Interview Settings In the catifields_default mdd file and in DPM s site properties Dialer Settings In DPM s site properties For instructions on how to change the default settings click the appropriate topic in the following table To carry out one of these tasks e Ch
191. display in the Activation History tab Options include m All E Successful activation E Failed activation Activation status The check boxes allows you to select the activation status to display in the Activation History tab Options include E Active 304 Chapter 1 gt E Inactive mE Test Project Allows you to define specific projects to display in the Activation History tab Click Find to locate questionnaire projects on the Interviewer Server Use the Add gt gt and lt lt Remove buttons to select which projects will display in the Activation History tab User Allows you to define projects activated by specific users to display in the Activation History tab Click Find to locate users on the Interviewer Server Use the Add gt gt and lt lt Remove buttons to select which users projects will display in the Activation History tab Activation date between Allows you to select an activation date range Only activations that occurred between the specified date will display in the Activation History tab Click Apply to save your settings Desktop Tools IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server comes with some programs that can only be run from your desktop These are m Quota Setup for creating a quota database and defining quotas m Activate Console for activating projects from a batch file or from the command line Activating Projects from the Command Line You can activate projects f
192. dy been filled 6 Early completion You can use this code to treat an interview that is only partially completed as if it were a fully completed interview You might decide to do this if the respondent has reached a certain point in the questionnaire 8 Premature termination without This code is not applicable to data IBM SPSS Data Collection products which always write data 9 Interview stopped with no data This code is not applicable to written Data Collection products which always write data 10 Interview stopped with data You can use this code to identify written interviews that have been stopped pending completion at a later date To Define an Exit Code gt Click Insert Item This opens the New Item dialog box gt Select the Routing Items tab 3 New Item Web Page Dialog Questions note A C it coto BA C coto C Ext m Bookmark Denr Script Library E C 10m Script advanced Import from Library 58 Chapter 7 gt Choose Exit and click OK This displays the Edit tab for exit items Primary Language English United States Exit Apply Undo Exit Predefined Exit Code Successful completion 1 Custom Exit Code i Previous Next Insert tem gt In Name optionally replace the default item name with a name of your choice gt To use a predefined exit code click Predefined Exit Code and select a code from the dropdown list
193. e Cancel dialing if interviewer not connected after When a telephone interviewer clicks the Start Dialing button on the main screen of the Phone Participants activity the autodialer attempts to connect the interviewer to a participant If the number of connected calls being generated by the autodialer is low compared with the number of interviewers available to handle the calls there might be a delay of several minutes or more before the interviewer is connected You can choose the numbers of minutes that interviewers must wait to be connected to a participant before the autodialer cancels the connection attempt allowing interviewers to leave their stations if they need to To change the wait time enter the number of minutes in this field Percentage of calls to record You can choose the percentage of calls that the autodialer will record Both individual questions and entire calls are recorded and the recordings are saved as sound files in the autodialer s file system To record calls enter a whole number from 0 to 100 inclusive in this field To record no calls or all calls enter 0 or 100 respectively If you enter any other value that percentage of calls will be selected at random for recording with the following exceptions m All subsequent calls to a participant whose previous call was recorded will also be recorded This includes calls to keep an appointment or calls to complete an interview that was interrupted by a disconnection
194. e INSTALL _FOLDER IBM SPSS DataCollection 6 DDL Code Tools VB NET DPM Explorer Net folder gt Inthe left pane expand the top level node the site name and then expand the following nodes Servers gt lt your server name gt gt SampleManagements gt lt your IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration project name gt gt Queueing gt Queues gt Properties gt From the Add menu choose Property This opens a dialog box gt In Name type ReadOnlyFieldColumns In Value type a comma separated list of the column names in your sample table that you want to be read only gt Click OK This adds the ReadOnlyFieldColumns property to DPM 108 Chapter 1 Controlling Access to Features You can control access to the various features in Participants by assigning users or roles to Participants activity features The activity features that you can use are shown in the following table Activity Feature Name Description Can advanced edit participants Whether the advanced option can be used for selecting and updating records on the View tab Can create databases Whether a new database can be created on the Upload tab Can delete participants Whether participant records can be deleted on the View tab Can download participants Whether participant records can be downloaded on the View tab Can edit participants Whether participant records can be edited on the View tab Can up
195. e In the project s sample table participant records are defined as either real or test by the value of the Zest column If the value is Null the Phone activity will treat the record as being both real and test For more information see Mapping Fields to Required Columns in the Sample Table To include a chart with your report select Include chart and choose the chart type from the drop down list Note 1 To be able to select the Include chart option you must have first enabled charts in the Phone activity For more information search the Interviewer Server Installation Instructions and Configuration Notes for the topic Enabling Charts in the Phone Reports Activity Note 2 Not all reports can include a chart see the individual description of each report in Phone for details To save your settings and close the Options dialog box click OK In the frame on the left of the Overview tab you can select an existing Date Filter or Sample filter from the provided drop down lists as shown below 255 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide April 21 2011 No limit To enter your own date and time range select Other from the Date Filter list and then specify the start and end dates and times using the drop down lists Note that the start and end times refer to times in the Interviewer Server server s local time zone which might not be the same as your local time zone To specify that no filtering is
196. e interview gt In Presentation choose one of Check Box or List Box If you are creating a single response question the selection list also includes Dropdown Box To Set Export and Analysis Options gt Select the Export Analysis tab 22 Chapter 7 vy v v vy y Figure 1 3 Export Analysis tab barbara f Oranian Edt Avance rset i These settings will apply when the collected data is downloaded using the Export Data activity or when the data is analyzed using the Tabulation activity To change the current settings for a question select the question from the list on the left and change the options in the table below O Gender Apply Undo Question Text F yuani Variable Label youri Category Label Previous Next In Variable Label type the text you want to use as the variable label in place of the question text In Category Label make any changes you want to the response texts In Export Value enter the code you want to use to represent each response Select the Set as Missing checkbox for every response you want to treat as missing data To define factors for use when the questionnaire data is tabulated type a number in the Factor box for each response Factors may be positive or negative real or integer values Numeric Questions Numeric questions require answers that are integer or real numbers optionally within a specified range When you export numeric questions the export process exports
197. e interviewer who arranged the appointment and the project uses group predictive autodialing the interviewer will not be connected automatically to the participant who has an appointment Instead the participant s details are displayed on the interviewer s screen and the interviewer must then click the Start Dialing button to dial the participant s phone number Before an appointment by any interviewer and Before an appointment by the arranger only these are actually a single setting The number of minutes before the appointment time when a number with an appointment can be called either by any interviewer or the arranger only depending on the setting of No preference for appointments Give preference to the interviewer who arranged the appointment The default is five minutes After an appointment by any interviewer The number of minutes after the appointment time when a number with an appointment can be called by any available interviewer The sample management script uses this setting only when the No preference for appointments Give preference to the interviewer who arranged the appointment setting is to give preference to the arranger The default is five minutes Before a recall The number of minutes before the recall time when a number with an automatic appointment can be called The default is ten minutes Time zones The time zones in which participants are located The
198. e interviewing server at which the comment was entered the server s time zone and name of the interviewer who wrote the comment The date and time are shown in the long format that gives month and day names which makes the information easy to understand regardless of the date and time format you are used to The second line shows the comment itself If the comment is long this line will be split over a number of physical lines in the dialog box The third line shows the call outcome and if the interviewer arranged an appointment the date and time of the appointment in the format yyyy mm dd hh mm If there is more than one comment for a single call only the last one has a call outcome You cannot change or delete these comments but you can append new ones to them The Comments box on the main screen can display up to 2000 characters If the total size of all comments exceeds this the earliest comments are deleted and the words Earlier comments removed are inserted in their place It is therefore a good idea to keep comments as brief as possible perhaps by abbreviating or omitting commonly used words The Comments box normally displays comments in chronological order but your administrator may have changed this if your company prefers newer comments to appear at the top of the list Viewing and adding comments On the main screen click edit next to the Comments box The Comments dialog box is displayed showing any
199. e Methods menu choose Add Question This opens the Add MDM Object dialog box Enter values for Name Label and DataType Typically DataType should be one of mtText mtLong or mtDate Then click OK In the left pane expand the node for the field you have just created and click the Custom Properties collection From the Methods menu choose Add Custom Property This opens a dialog box Set the values in the dialog box as follows and then click OK Setting Value Name Required Value True or False Type Boolean Context Analysis This adds a custom property called Required to the field you created Repeat the last two steps three times to add the Show Editable and CanTabulate custom properties to the field you created When you have finished choose Exit from the File menu and when prompted save the file to its original location Editing DPM s Site Properties This topic describes how to carry out the following tasks Changing the settings in DPM s site properties m Adding a call outcome to DPM s site properties Changing the mapping of autodialer status codes to call outcomes Changing the Settings in DPM s Site Properties To change settings in DPM you need to use DPM Explorer as follows gt In Windows Explorer run DPMExplorer exe which by default is located in folder INSTALL _FOLDER IBM SPSS DataCollection 6 DDL Code Tools VB NET DPM Explorer Net gt Inthe left pane expa
200. e Phone Participants main screen Connecting to a participant gt Make sure that your telephone is off hook gt Click the Start Dialing button as shown below Figure 1 40 Start Dialing button The autodialer will attempt to connect you to a participant There might be a delay before you are connected If there is a long delay a message might tell you that the connection attempt has been canceled and that you need to click the Start Dialing button again Note Occasionally the system might display a participant s details without connecting you to the participant This happens when another interviewer has added comments to the participant s record so that you have the opportunity to read the comments before you speak to the participant When you have read the comments click the Start Dialing button to dial the participant s phone number gt When you hear someone answer the phone do the following m Ifthe participant details at the top of the page show the participant s name ask to speak to that person 186 Chapter 1 m Read the introductory text m Depending on the options that your supervisor has set you might be required to ask the participant for consent to having the phone call monitored and recorded by your supervisor If so make sure that you record the participant s response by selecting either the Yes or the No option above the introductory text Interviewing the participant If the participant
201. e and subject texts you should not need to change the names To Insert Responses or Subjects Select the response or subject above or below which the new response is to be inserted and then click Insert Above Selection or Insert Below Selection as appropriate A new line is added to the list In the Text column replace the New Response text with the response text and then make any other adjustments that are necessary For example it is usually a good idea to replace the default name with a unique name that matches or is similar to the text in the Text column To Append Responses or Subjects Click Append A new line is added to the end of the list In the Text column replace the New Response text with the response text and then make any other adjustments that are necessary To Delete Responses or Subjects Select the responses check boxes and then click Delete Selected To select all responses for deletion click the check box at the start of the responses menu bar To Move Responses or Subjects Select the response s check box and then click Move Up or Move Down as appropriate To Switch Multiple and Single Response Types Select the responses whose response type you want to change and then click Change to Single or Change to Multi Note Change to Multi is available only if the question allows multiple responses to be chosen To Switch the Question Type Between Single and Multiple Response In Question Type cl
202. e as the Interviewer Server Administration user name that you are currently using but if you do not have access to the destination server using this name then you may enter a different name here In Destination User Password type the password for this user In the Authentication drop down menu select either IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Authentication or Windows Authentication Refer to the Configuring for Single Sign on topic in the JBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library for more information Click Login to log in to the destination server Specifying the Activation Parameters Once you have logged on to the destination server the second Promote Project dialog box is displayed You use this dialog box to specify activation parameters Note that the Participants frame is displayed only if the project has already been activated with sample management 120 Chapter 7 Figure 1 9 Site to Site Activate dialog box G Promote Project Project Id MUSEUM1 Project Name MUSEUM1 Description Launch project to alternate site fa Status after Active lv Groups Roles activation Activate Notes O Analyst Analyst Access Role O catTlinterviewer CATI Interviewer Role F liCATIsupervisor CATI M O SurveyLauncher Survey Launcher Access Role Promote Subfolders Participants Server 60SERVER Database Participants Table MUSEUM1 Participants fie
203. e call may be monitored and recorded Is this acceptable to you The top of the main screen When the autodialer connects you to a participant or for projects that do not use an autodialer when you are given a number to call the section at the top of the screen shows various details about the participant as follows m The participant ID number m The participant s telephone number If you have been asked to manually dial a different number to reach the participant you might be able to change the value in the phone number field and the old number will be saved in the Audit field of the participant s record with a note of the date on which it was changed m The queue from which the number has been selected If the queue name is FRESH then the participant has not been contacted before on this project Numbers from other queues have been called before and the queue name will often indicate the outcome of that call For example numbers from the RECALL queue were probably busy or not answered when last called whereas numbers from the APPOINTMENT queue have had an appointment 180 Chapter 7 time arranged between the participant and a previous interviewer so the participant will be expecting your call m The participant s name if available Your supervisor might ask you to update this field when you speak to the participant Comments associated with this number These comments generally contain
204. e check box To cancel a special response select the same special response again Your answer will usually be rejected if you select a special response in addition to entering an answer or if you select more than one special response Playing a sound to the participant If the project you are working on uses an autodialer some questions might require you to play a prerecorded sound to the participant For example the question might ask for the participant s opinion on an advertising jingle The question text will normally indicate that you must play a sound after you have asked the question Sometimes there might be a separate sound for each answer in a multiple choice question and you will need to play these one after the other If you are required to play a sound the following buttons will appear close to the question text or for some multiple choice questions the answer texts Button Description Play the sound m Stop playing the sound To play the sound again click the Play button again For interviews that require the keyboard only The following table describes the keyboard shortcuts that you can use Item that has a sound Keyboard shortcut to play or stop playing the sound A question Ctrl Shift P An answer to a multiple choice question Shift n where n is the answer number shown on the screen For example Shift 4 for answer number 4 If the answer number is 10 or more hold down the Shif
205. e database but not in the project s mqd file If you later reactivate the project and you choose the option to update the quota tables with the information in the mqd file any changes that you made with Quotas will be overwritten with the information from the mqd file Prioritizing Quotas When a quotas are defined for multiple response categorical questions the quotas for all responses chosen by the respondent are pended If the interview is completed then the corresponding complete counts are incremented When a respondent chooses more than one response this results in more than one quota cell being incremented Quota prioritization lets you decide how many cells to pend and allows you to choose the method by which those cells are chosen There are four possibilities Priority Pending Pend the cell with the highest priority if this response is chosen If this response is not chosen try the cell with the next highest priority and so on Cells with no priority defined have the lowest priority of all Random Pending Pend a cell at random from the cells for the responses that have been chosen If an interview times out and is restarted after a cell has been pended the same cell will be pended if the interview is restarted If the questionnaire contains routing or other logic based on the value of the pended cell this ensures that the interview behavior will be the same whether or not it times out LeastFull Pending based on the ra
206. e directory or in INSTALL_FOLDER IBM SPSS DataCollection 6 Interviewer Server Server mrlWeb Templates In both cases you select the file using a simple filename not a pathname When the project is activated templates that exist in the project s source directory will be copied to the project s directory INSTALL_FOLDER IBM SPSS DataCollection 6 Interviewer Server Projects When interviews take place the interviewing program will look for the templates first in the project specific directory and then in the main Projects directory Selecting non default Web pages gt On the Interview Web Pages tab deselect Use Default Web Pages gt For each page that you want to define in the first box type the name of the template file or the full URL that defines the page to be displayed Note Templates must be entered as simple filenames not as pathnames gt In the second box choose Template or URL Alternatively to deactivate an existing page without replacing it with a new page choose None Activation Process When you have entered all the necessary information on the four tabs you can activate the project The flowchart illustrates the activation process which is described in more detail below the flowchart 116 Chapter 7 Figure 1 8 Activation flowchart mdd in Shared User runs Launch activity mdd in Users No Fail with error message Yes Master files ot in Shared Fail with
207. e empty box m On the Select page locate the template file and click Select For more information see the topic Copying Pictures and Presentation Templates on p 50 The filename appears in the Presentation Style box To Set Export and Analysis Options gt Select the Export Analysis tab 26 Chapter 7 Figure 1 4 Export Analysis tab Buildtest bhorton Faron Edt EERTE These settings will apply when the collected data is downloaded using the Export Data activity or when the data is analyzed using the Tabulation activity To change the current settings for a question select the question from the list on the left and change the options in the table below Apply Undo ou Question Text Mow old are yon Variable Label i old are you Previous gt In Variable Label type the text you want to use as the variable label in place of the question text Text Questions gt Text questions accept any answer When you export text questions the export process exports the question texts exactly as they appear in the questionnaire Sometimes you ll want to use different texts in your analyses than you used during interviewing For example in an interview you ll ask What is your name but in tabulations you may prefer the text Name or Name of respondent To Create a Text Question Click Insert Item This opens the New Item dialog box New Item Web Page Dia
208. e g Preview C Swimming pool C Sauna Jacuzzi Steam room C Gym Exercise classes gt In Shared list name select the name of the list you want to insert The responses in the list are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box gt Click OK to insert the responses in the question s Responses section gt If necessary assign pictures or factors to the responses you have just inserted Display Text Items Display Text items place text or other non question information in the questionnaire They are often used for general instructions to the interviewer or respondent To Create a Display Text Item 46 Chapter 7 gt Click Insert Item This opens the New Item dialog box F New Item Web Page Dialog x Routing Items Be Single Response Question m is Multiple Response Question 2 C numeric Question El Text Question E bispiay Text E single Response Grid EB C mutiple Response Grid E numeric cria Apply Undo Quest4 Previous Next Insert gt In Name optionally replace the default item name with a name of your choice gt In Display Text type the text you want to use To Set Presentation Options gt Select the Presentation tab 47 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Primary Language English United States H intro Undo Page Presentation Style a Insert tem gt In Presentation Style sel
209. e in the Real Time display 278 Chapter 7 gt In Table Setup choose which columns will appear in the Real Time display as follows m To add a column to those displayed click on the column name in the Available Fields list and then click Add m To remove a column from those displayed click on the column name in the Displayed Fields list and then click Remove Tip In Table Setup you can select multiple columns by pressing Ctrl or Shift while you click In Table Setup choose the order of the columns displayed in the Real Time display as follows m To move a column towards the left of the page click on the column name in the Displayed Fields list and then click Move Up m To move a column towards the right of the page click on the column name in the Displayed Fields list and then click Move Down In the Sort table by drop down list select the column that will determine the order of the records in the Real Time display When you have completed your changes click OK To undo your changes click Cancel The Real Time display will automatically refresh to show your changes Note For information about using the Dialer Monitoring Table Options settings see Customizing the Dialing Activity Display in Monitoring Silent Calls Navigating the Real Time Display By default all interviewer records are displayed on a single page However you can customize the Interviewers Real Time display to display th
210. e interviewing program displays it and if it is still correct you can move straight to the next question 200 Chapter 1 Terminating interviews part way through If the participant starts an interview but is unwilling to finish it you should try to terminate it by selecting an appropriate call outcome from the list For example if the participant refuses to continue the interview you should select the Abandoned call outcome This terminates the interview immediately and leaves you ready to request the next participant You might also be able to terminate the interview using one of the following methods m For interviews that require the keyboard only Press the ESC key m For interviews that use the mouse Click the Stop button if one is displayed Your supervisor will normally tell you if you can use one of these methods Reviewing interviews The project that you are working on might require you to review the participant s answers after the interview has completed The reviewing phase might start automatically at the end of the interview or you might need to click a button to start the review Depending on the options that your supervisor has set you might be able to review all answers or only answers to text questions As you conduct the review you can amend any answers that you did not enter correctly during the interview for example if a text response contains a spelling mistake In addition if your supervisor
211. e is selected the earliest time at which participants may be called Enter the earliest call time End time When No appointment is selected the end time at which participants may not be called Enter the end time When Date override is selected the latest time at which participants may be called Enter the latest call time 149 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Date The calendar allows you to select specific No appointment or Date override dates Select the appropriate date s All selected dates display in the field immediately beneath the calendar gt Click OK after entering the desired parameters to save the date override to the Date Overrides table Otherwise click Cancel to discard the new date override To Edit a Date Override gt Select an existing shift in the Date Overrides table gt Click the Edit override date button Figure 1 24 The Date Override dialog displays with the preexisting override parameters filled in gt Apply the appropriate changes and click OK to update the date override Otherwise click Cancel to discard the changes To Delete a Date Override gt Select an existing shift in the Date Overrides table gt Click the Delete override date button Figure 1 25 x Setting Up Project Overrides The Overrides tab provides options for changing the parameters that control dialing for a subset of records All records except those in the specified subset continue t
212. e number and percentage of completed and pending interviews per cell You cannot change anything in the table 212 Chapter 1 Do Not Edit gt iraia i Internet May 20 2004 15 08 07 At work Key Target Quota Type Complete Complete Pending Pending z i a To Check Quotas gt Click the button for the quota whose details you want to see Changing Quota Targets Behavior Flags and or Cell Priorities When you select one of the Edit options you will be able to change the targets and the counts of completed or pending interviews in a cell If priority pending has been set you will also be able to change the cell priorities 213 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Review Quotas travel Internet July 19 2006 10 00 54 Prioritization Normal fo Normal v 0 3 2 3 D ix ix D n n gt E a Zo 3 ye J E O ix OD N n 2 DO Target Type Complete Complete Pending Pending Note The menu points for these options are toggles Once you select an option it remains selected until you choose a different option or until you leave Quotas This allows you to make the same type of changes to a number of quotas without having to reselect an option from the menu each time To Change Targets and or Behavior Flags gt Do one of the following m To change targets choose Target from the Edit selection list m To change
213. e of the case data database The default is to store each project s data in a separate database with the same name as the project However if your site is configured to allow it several projects can write case data to the same database You may also be able to create a new database for the project with a name of your choice If so the drop down list will contain the Create New Custom Database option Select this option and then type a name for this database in the Custom box that appears next to the Project Database box Default Survey Language The default language for the questionnaire With multilingual questionnaires the language in which you write the questionnaire automatically becomes the default or base language for that script If the questionnaire does not specify the language in which it is to run and the information cannot be obtained from the participant record the interview will run in this language Once you start translating a script other languages are added to the questionnaire definition file and you may want to select one of those languages as the base language for the questionnaire The language list contains only languages that are present in the questionnaire definition file If the computer s default language does not appear in the questionnaire definition file the language list defaults to US English Default Routing Context The routing context to set as the default for this project The activation process
214. e only one or the other For projects that do not use an autodialer selecting this report might display an empty table or an error message Interviewer Time Idle Time Interviewer ID 0d 00 04 32 0d 00 03 34 0d 00 00 20 1d 18 45 09 0d 01 35 03 0d 00 13 44 0d 00 07 10 6 0d 00 00 25 0d 01 48 52 BuildUser10 0d 00 13 37 7 0d 00 00 38 0d 01 17 33 BuildUser100 0d 00 14 35 11 BuildUser1 234 Chapter 7 Busy Wait and Idle Time Across Projects This reports provides busy wait and idle information across projects for each interviewer and project for the last 8 hours This report is similar to the Busy Wait and Idle Time report except this report always includes data for both real and test interviews and it cannot specify a time period Note Due to a Microsoft SQL server limitation this report is limited to a maximum of 128 projects When working with customers accounts this report will only include data for projects in the selected customer account m Total Total amount of time the interviewer spent working with the project m Wait Total amount of time the interviewer waited for the dialer to return a connected respondent m Idle Total amount of time between interviewer interactions with the Phone Participants activity when not speaking to a respondent or waiting Busy Total amount of time spent speaking with respondents Average The average wait time per dialer connection Total Time
215. e or disable the special responses below e I Dont Know l he T No Answer OF next 7 Refuse to answer next yA Previous Insert tem gt In Require a response to this question choose whether or not this question must be answered Note If a question may be left unanswered and you do not insert a No Answer response in the category list Build inserts one automatically This is because the interview script that is generated from the Build questionnaire requires this in order for respondents to be able to click Next without having to select an answer You will not see the No Answer category until your screen is refreshed for example when you change tabs At this point Build also displays a message telling you that it has added No Answer If you set this option to Yes and then edit the question later on and change this option to No Build does not automatically remove No Answer If you want to disallow No Answer response you must delete it yourself gt In Hide this question choose No if the question should be displayed to the respondent If this is a dummy question that is to exist in the questionnaire but not be displayed to respondents choose Yes Typically the responses to hidden questions are set by statements defined in IOM Script items They provide an efficient method of merging the responses to a number of related questions 25 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide into a single
216. e questionnaire has been created using IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration activities you will need to download the mdd file from the Interviewer Server Licensed Materials Property of IBM Copyright 308 IBM Corporation 2000 2011 309 IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup Administration project folder onto your computer You can do this from Interviewer Server Administration using the Files activity gt Go to the folder containing the project s mdd file gt From the Start menu choose Programs gt IBM SPSS Data Collection gt IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server 6 0 1 gt Quota The IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup Window The IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup window is divided into three panes List Pane sejond uoisseidx3 sezono lqeL Details Pane Quota Construction Area The List Pane lists the variables that are present in the project s mdd file For each variable you see its name variable number data type and description question text You can change the layout of the List Pane so that only icons and names are displayed if this is what you prefer The List Pane normally shows only categorical variables as these are the ones most commonly used for quotas but you can display numeric text and boolean variables as well Quota Setup also hides system variables as these are rarely useful for quota ing but you can choose to display system varia
217. e records over multiple pages instead If you have already done this you will need to use the icons at the bottom of each page to navigate between pages The icons are described in the following table Icon Description a4 Display the first page lt q Display the previous page 1 2 3 Display page 1 page 2 page 3 and so on P Display the next page PP Display the last page Monitoring an Interviewer You can monitor an interviewer who is conducting an interview When you monitor an interviewer the question being asked and the previous question asked are displayed in the Monitor tab When the interviewer navigates to another question the Monitor tab will automatically refresh to show that question When the interview finishes the Monitor tab will show the call outcome selected by the interviewer If the interviewer then starts another interview the Monitor tab will refresh to show the first question of the new interview 279 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Because the Monitor tab is refreshed only when the interviewer navigates to another question you cannot see the answer to the current question as it is being entered by the interviewer However the answer if any to the previous question is displayed as is the answer to the current question if it was asked earlier in the interview You can pause monitoring for example if you need more time to read a text re
218. e sample table or create the required columns with default values You use the Required Fields tab for this m Define new columns that you want to create in the sample table to store other information from the participant records You use the Additional Fields tab for this When you have completed these tasks you can then Upload Records from the Text File Participant File Format Participants reads text files The first line of the file must contain the names of the fields in each record in the order in which the data appears in the records the remaining lines contain the participant records The standard field delimiter is a semicolon if you have used a different field delimiter such as a comma or a colon you must specify this on the Upload tab when you upload the file Note that you cannot use a non printing character such as a tab character as a field delimiter Here is an example of a participant records file Id name region password 001 Benjamin Brown South East pry6354 002 Veronica Burr Midlands qre9510 003 Rebecca Noakes West mtev037 If your file contains non English accented characters such as those with umlauts or Chinese Japanese or other double byte characters make sure that you save the file using the Unicode text encoding option UTF 8 before uploading The upload will stop with an error message if a file containing these characters is not a Unicode file If you intend to upload any datetime fields from your file
219. e the Set Filters dialog box click OK Alternatively click Cancel if you do not want to save your new filter Note An alternative for adding either a date or sample filter is using the Copy button This will copy the selected filter allowing you to rename the filter and edit the syntax Editing a date filter gt From the Tools menu choose Set Filters This opens the Set Filters dialog box Select the Date Filter tab 257 vy v Vv v Yy vy v v Yy vy v v y IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide In Filters select the filter you want to edit and click Edit In Filter expression amend the expression and click Update For more information see Writing a Filter Expression at the end of this topic To save your revised filter and close the Set Filters dialog box click OK Alternatively click Cancel if you do not want to save your amendment Deleting a filter From the Tools menu choose Set Filters This opens the Set Filters dialog box Select the Date Filter tab In Filters select the filter you want to delete and click Delete This opens a confirmation dialog box Click OK This removes the filter from the list of filters To delete the filter and close the Set Filters dialog box click OK Alternatively click Cancel if you do not want to delete the filter Adding a sample filter From the Tools menu choose Set Filters This opens the Set Filters dialog box Select the Sample Filter ta
220. e used whether telephone interviewer stations not configured for autodialing can be used to conduct interviews and how long an interviewer must wait to be connected to a participant before the connection attempt is abandoned Whether monitoring and recording is allowed and whether interviewers must obtain consent from each participant for monitoring and recording Whether interviewers must review completed interviews whether the review starts automatically or must be started manually and whether all questions or only text questions can be reviewed Starting Phone Surveys gt Select the project you want to work on and click Phone Surveys 129 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Making Sample Data Available to Interviewers When an autodialer connects a telephone interviewer to a participant or for projects that do not use an autodialer when the interviewer requests a number to call the interviewing program displays a page showing information about the participant and a list of possible call outcomes Some items of information are always displayed whereas other items are displayed only if selected by the supervisor The supervisor can change the selection of optional fields during the course of the project Supervisors can also specify for each displayed field whether or not interviewers can change the field s contents For example if the Comments field is displayed you might want interviewers to be able
221. e version of the ActivateServer dll component installed as is installed on the machine you are working on If it finds a mismatch activation fails at that point and you will have mismatched project files on the interviewing servers When this happens you may usually continue by manually copying the project files to the servers that have not been updated However the best solution is to ensure that all machines in the cluster are running the same version of IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Launch copies the mdd file from the Shared folder back to the User folder effectively doing a check in and check out This ensures that if merges took place you have the most up to date version of the file in your User folder If there are other files in the Shared folderthat are newer than the versions in the User folder these are also copied If all these steps run successfully the files are deleted from the Temp folder 118 Chapter 7 Activating a project Click Launch When activation is complete a message box lists two URLS for running interviews The first one is for live interviews you can copy this URL to the clipboard for pasting into a Web page The second one is for designers wishing to test their questionnaires data for these interviews is flagged as test data in the case data database so that it can be ignored in analyses and exports of the final survey data If activation is successful and you want to run a te
222. ea a aaaea amaaa a aha aaa gel dd aada dab le belo end les 315 Defining Table Quotas 1 0 0 0 0 0 c ete teens 316 Creating More Than One Table Quota 0 00 ccc tees 317 Deleting Table Quotas 1 0 0 0 2c cette eee 317 Expression Quotas saygi eas mi medadi a aad ai cane b dae cb aa d de a da ped eesedea 318 Filter on Categorical Variable Dialog Box 0 0 0c eee 319 Filter on Numeric Variable Dialog Box 0 0 000 cece eee 320 Filter on Text Variable Dialog Box 2 2 2 0 ccc 321 Filter on Boolean Variable Dialog Box 00 0000 c ccc tees 322 Filter on New Variable Dialog Box 00 00 c eects 323 Defining Expression Quotas 0 000 c eect teens 323 Defining Quotas for Categorical Variables 0 00 ccc eee eee eee 324 Defining Quotas for Numeric Variables 0 0 0c eee eee eee 325 Defining Quotas for Text Variables 2 2 2 0 0c eee 325 Defining Quotas for Boolean Variables 0 0000 c cece eee eee 325 Expression Quotas using Two or More Variables 20 0000 e cece eee eeee 325 Advanced Expressions 00 0 cece cece cece tte eens 325 Editing Expression Quotas 0 00 cece cece ete eens 332 Deleting Expression Quotas 0 00 ce cece 333 Reusing a Quota Definition File in Another Project 0 0 00 cece eeeeeee 333 3 IBM SPSS Data Collection Activation Console 334 Activation H
223. ecessary gt Ifyou changed the common label text or a subject text and you want the changes to be saved in the mdd file click Update Grid Variable Values gt In Category Label make any changes you want to the response texts gt In Export Values enter the codes you want to use to represent each response gt Select the Set as Missing checkbox for every response you want to treat as missing data gt To define factors for use when the questionnaire data is tabulated type a number in the Factor box for each response Factors may be positive or negative real or integer values 37 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Numeric Grid Questions Q30 How interested were you in the museum displays SELECT ONE ANSWER ON EACH UNE ACROSS Not Hot at all particularly Slighthy Very interested interested No opinion interested interested Dinosaurs o o o o o Conservation o m o o o Fish and reptiles o o o o o Fossils o o o o o Birds o o o o o Insects o o E o o Whales o O o o o Mammals o o o o o Minerals o o oO o o Ecology o o o o o Botany m o o o o Origin of species o o o o o Human biology o o o o o Evolution o o o o o Wildlife in danger o o o o o Other o m E o o Grid questions are an efficient way of asking the same question about a number of related topics The question is displayed in a tabular or grid form with the subquestions subjects forming one dimension of the grid and the responses forming
224. ecords If you specify a limit to the number of records on each page you can use the navigation icons to move between pages m The columns that are shown and in what order they appear m The sort order of the records For example you might want to sort the records into Project ID order so that it s easier to see all the interviewers working on a specific project 277 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide To Customize the Real Time Display gt In the toolbar at the top of the Interviewer Monitoring main page click the Table Setup button as shown below Figure 1 66 Table Setup button State No Description This opens the Real Time Display Setting dialog box as shown below Figure 1 67 Real Time Display Setting dialog box Real Time Display Setting Web Page Dialog Interviewer Monitoring Table Options Display Number of records per screen fail 7 Table Setup Available Fields Displayed Fields Interviewer Id Project Id Session Time Display order Add gt gt Idle Time in table Seen Busy Rate Move Up Contacts Since Last Completed RDN Project Type Interview Time Is Monitored Question Id Question Time xl D Sort table b Select all Interviewer Id z Dialer Monitoring Table Options Table setup Display projects and groups Display projects only Sort table b Project z gt In Display select the number of records that you want to appear on each pag
225. ecords upon which the override parameters are based Enter an appropriate criteria No answer delay The callback delay in minutes for numbers that are not answered Enter an appropriate value Busy delay The callback delay in minutes for numbers that are busy Enter an appropriate value Answering machine delay The callback delay in minutes for numbers that are answered by an answering machine Enter an appropriate value Web callback delay The callback delay in minutes for surveys that are started on the web Enter an appropriate value Maximum tries for any day parts Specifies the maximum number of callback attempts for each participant Enter an appropriate value Setting Up the Call Outcome List Interviewers working on a telephone interviewing project are provided with a list of call outcome codes from which they must select the outcome of each call that they make IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server comes with a default list of call outcome codes that cover most requirements so you should never need to build a call outcome list from scratch Note For projects that use an autodialer Interviewer Server automatically maps the status codes returned by the autodialer to one of the call outcomes The Call Outcomes tab lists the call outcome codes for the current project 151 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Project UploadSample u admin Call Times Appointments lutcorr Inte
226. ect a layout template m Click the button next to the empty box m On the Select page locate the template file and click Select For more information see the topic Copying Pictures and Presentation Templates on p 50 The filename appears in the Presentation Style box Using the Questionnaire Library The Library is the central storage place for questionnaires or questionnaire sections that you want to make available for inclusion in other questionnaires For example if most of the questionnaires that your company creates have a standard set of demographic questions it makes sense to store them in the library so that they can be imported into every questionnaire This saves time and ensures that the questions are identical in all questionnaires The standard Questionnaire Library is divided into two sections The Shared section FMRoot Shared Questionnaire Library Items contains questionnaires that are available to anyone who uses Build The Roles section is divided into subfolders containing questionnaires that are accessible only by members of a particular role so for example only members of RoleA will be able to access questionnaires saved in the RoleA area of the library FMRoot Roles RoleA Questionnaire Library Items Note Build does not support personal libraries although if a role has only one member that library is effectively a personal library Build comes with a collection of predefined surveys that are installed in different
227. ection Dialer and QTC autodialers extensions must be entered in the format Ennn for example E101 or E123 To specify that this position is not able to use an autodialer set the value to either Modem or Manual which defines that only modem or manual dialing can be used at this position If the position will be used by a supervisor for interviewer monitoring an extension must be specified When using Remote Interviewing this property must be defined as remote The maximum Extension length is 40 characters Description A free format description of the position The worksheet does not need to include this column AccessNumber The telephone number of the remote interviewer The maximum AccessNumber length is 50 characters the characters lt and gt are not valid Starting Dialer Administration gt From the I BM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration menu choose Phone gt Dialer Administration The Dialer Administration main screen opens Importing a dialer configuration file In Dialer Administration you add autodialers or update the information for existing autodialers by importing a dialer configuration file This file contains one entry for each autodialer and one entry for each station that will use an autodialer For more information see the topic Creating a dialer configuration file on p 284 Before you import a dialer configuration file be aware of the following m An exi
228. ection Interviewer Server with Quancept Support installed Questionnaires created with Build To use these questionnaires with Interviewer Server 6 0 1 do the following gt Open the project using Edit Project and on the Properties tab change the value of the InterviewScriptType property from Quancept to IBM SPSS Data Collection gt Click the Add Application link above the project properties frame In the Select application dialog box choose Interviewer Server Data Collection from the drop down list This adds a set of Data Collection project properties to the project Click OK to save your changes and close Edit Project gt Open the questionnaire in Build and replace any version 2 3 templates with corresponding version 6 0 1 templates 4 Chapter 7 gt Reactivate the project gt If you have IBM SPSS Data Collection Base Professional installed you can convert version 2 3 templates to version 6 0 1 by running the HTML Tidy tool on them See Validating an Interview Template File in the Base Professional section of JBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library for details IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Activities in IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server activities are activities that you can run from IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration when you have Interviewer Server installed They are as fol
229. ed in INSTALL _FOLDER IBM SPSS DataCollection 6 Interviewer Server FMRoot Shared Cati on the primary application server Review Interviews You use this activity to review the interviews that your telephone interviewers have completed If necessary you can amend the answers that the interviewer entered Starting Review Interviews gt Select the project you want to work on and click Review Interviews This displays the Review Interviews main screen 204 Chapter 7 When Autodialers are Used If the call center that you are working in uses autodialers to call participants a dialog box might open and request that you enter a position name as shown below Figure 1 57 Position dialog box Specify your position details in the field s below to enable audio playback Click cancel to continue without audio Supervisor Position g eae ARSE In the Supervisor Position field enter the position name and click OK If you click Cancel instead the Review Interviews activity will still open but you will not be able to listen to audio recordings of participants answers Remote Supervisors When the Supervisor Position is defined as a remote position in the dialer configuration file the following dialog is displayed Figure 1 58 Supervisor Position dialog box for remote supervisors J Specify your position details in the field s below to enable audio playback Click cancel to continue without audio
230. ed so that you can see the Display All and Display Selection options Select the Display Selection option A group of drop down lists text boxes and buttons appears You use these to specify the selection criteria that will determine which records are displayed For example your criteria might select only records that are in the COMPLETED queue In the Field drop down list select the field that you want to use in your selection criteria for example Queue Note that the Field drop down list includes only those fields that you have access to For more information see the topic Controlling Access to Data and Features on p 107 In the drop down list to the right of Field select the comparison that you want to use in your selection criteria for example equal to In the Value text box type the value that you want to use in your selection criteria for example COMPLETED However if your sample database is not case sensitive you could instead type completed ouu zlfen JOOWPLETED Awor 98 Chapter 7 gt Yy v Vv Vv v y Click Apply The list of participant records will now include only those records that match your selection criteria If there are more records than will fit on one page use the icons at the bottom of the page to navigate between pages Notes m A quicker method for displaying all the records in one queue is to click on the Summary tab and then click the View Queue icon on the right of t
231. efore end of voice is asserted the dialer dispositions Answering machine Ifno amfile is specified the dialer simply hangs up the call Otherwise the dialer awaits end of voice before playing amfile The dialing algorithm proceeds in dialing further calls without waiting for the playback to complete Notes m These instruction assume that you have a working knowledge of DPM Explorer Refer to the DPM Explorer topic in the JBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library for information on working with the tool m Simple answering machine detection is not suitable when dialing business numbers with long greetings mobile numbers with loud background noise or persons with disabilities who may be slow in answering the phone 1 Launch the DPM Explorer tool INSTALL_FOLDER IBM SPSS DataCollection 6 DDL Code Tools VB NET DPM Explorer Net DPMExplorer exe 164 Chapter 7 2 Create the following properties under Site gt Properties gt DefaultCatiProjectProperties m AmdMode The answering machine detection mode Possible values include Disabled Filtering and Calibration AmdParameters The answering machine detection parameters All of the optional parameters off max on db and so on are encapsulated in this property For example max 4 5 0n 11 using commas as the delimiter AmfFile The name of the sound file to play for an answering machine including the pathname relative to Audio
232. egorical mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 44 08 PM H Role Library OPMAdmins Age Question numeric mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 44 10 PM 3 Shared Library Birth Month Question mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 44 12 PM Customer Satisfaction Birth Year Question mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 44 14 PM ige mE Children Age Question mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 44 18 PM grap i GS Human Resources Children Question mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 44 20 PM a Education US Question mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 44 22 PM 7 Nad Products and Services Ethnicity Question mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 44 24 PM Ga Ratings and Frequencies EU States Questions mdd mdd 4 28 2004 1 41 16 PM Sa Website Gender Question mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 46 00 PM Household Size Question mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 48 12 PM Income Euro Question mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 46 06 PM Income UKI Question mdd mdd 4 15 2004 2 460 PM gt Inthe Folders frame navigate to the folder containing the questionnaire you want to work on gt In the right hand frame double click on the questionnaire you want to open Build opens the questionnaire definition file and displays a summary on the Overview tab Saving a Questionnaire If you are working outside IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration you can save the questionnaire with a new name You will normally do this when you want to create a new library file based on the contents of an existing questionnaire or library file Build saves the original questionnaire with its new n
233. elected e Email settings Web Page Dialog lt p gt Dear Sample field Name lt p gt lt p gt Please take a few moments to complete this confidential survey lt p gt i tae survey will only be available for a limited time so we ask that you Ee Eero as zoon as possible Thanks in EAR far all vnur heln AE Sess _ S EMG gt In Job name enter a name for this email job gt In Subject enter a short description of what the email is about This will appear as the message subject in the recipient s message box gt In Reply email address enter your name or email address or the name or email address of the person on whose behalf you are sending the message Whatever you type here will appear as the sender s name in the recipient s message box gt In Priority choose the email priority from the drop down list You can choose either a High Medium or Low priority gt In Project status choose the status that the project must have in order for the email to be sent You may choose more than one status if you wish gt In Subject type a subject for the message gt The Text of email box displays a suggested message text complete with substitution markers for inserting respondent or project specific information in the text You can either accept this text as it is modify it or replace it with a new text of your own 125 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide If you want to inse
234. elephone interviewing 284 Bookmarks in scripts 52 Boolean variables quotas for 318 Build adding statements from script library 60 Advanced tab 11 answer prompt 13 applying amp undoing changes 66 bookmarks 52 changing questions 65 conditional routing 54 copying shared templates to library 77 creating questionnaires library files 73 cutting amp pasting questions 68 deleting questions 68 341 Index display options for Overview tab 14 display text items 45 downloading questionnaires 72 downloading templates pictures 50 duplicating questions 68 Edit tab 11 editing response amp subject lists 65 exit codes 56 file movement between Users and Shared folders 14 filtering response lists 20 34 getting started 12 importing library questions 49 inserting IBM SPSS Data Collection WordCapture files 64 interview scripting statements 58 item names 13 leaving 16 library structure 47 main screen 11 making questionnaires live 70 more than one question per page 67 moving questions up down 68 name of routing section 72 naming external files in shared templates 76 notes comments 51 numeric grid questions 37 numeric questions 22 opening existing questionnaires 74 options 13 overview 9 Overview tab 11 presentation style 13 Presentation tab 11 previewing questionnaire 14 process flowchart 14 questionnaires created with IBM SPSS Data Collection Base Prof
235. en you analyze the data you can use the exit code as a means of filtering the data to include only interviews that terminated in a certain way or to provide simple counts of the various ways in which interviews were terminated Build provides a standard set of exit codes but also allows you to define your own codes with your own meanings Exit codes may be any whole number in the range 0 to 2147483647 Predefined exit codes are as follows Code Meaning Remarks 1 Successful completion Any interview in which all relevant questions have been asked is flagged as successfully completed This is the default 2 Premature termination with data You can use this code to identify interviews that were not completed for whatever reason This is a useful exit code for paper questionnaires or CATI surveys where the respondent can simply choose not to continue answering questions It allows you to differentiate between these interviews and interviews that were stopped where the respondent may have had the intention of continuing with the interview 57 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Code Meaning Remarks 5 Terminated by quota control Interviews that are terminated by quota control can often be confused with successfully completed or partially completed interviews Use this exit code to flag interviews that were terminated because the respondent belonged in a group whose quota had alrea
236. end the problem description you may do so by editing the file and saving it back into the zip file There is no need to rerun the download simply for this IBM SPSS Data Collection Remote Administration The IBM SPSS Data Collection Remote Administration activity allows you to monitor the remote interviewers working on a given project Remote Administration is the server component of IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer which remote interviewers use to conduct interviews and synchronize their data The Remote Administration activity provides status information on each remote interviewer including the number of interviews completed the number of suspended interviews and the last time the interviewer synchronized Starting the IBM SPSS Data Collection Remote Administration Activity gt Select the project you want to monitor and click IBM SPSS Data Collection Remote Administration The IBM SPSS Data Collection Remote Administration Interface The IBM SPSS Data Collection Remote Administration interface provides status information on each remote interviewer for the selected project Figure 1 76 The IBM SPSS Data Collection Remote Administration interface Monitoring The table below is an overview of the interviewers currently logged in n To monitor an interviewer directly select him or her in the list and click the monitor button fasa Cl Automatically refresh the table every 30 Y sec Select inter
237. ender The expression that describes the cell for men is that the gender variable should contain Male the expression for the cell for women is that gender should contain Female If you wanted you could replace the Table Quota for gender with two Expression Quotas using the expressions noted here With numeric variables you can define quotas based on single values or ranges of values For example if age is a numeric variable you can define quotas for people aged 21 people aged 18 to 21 or people who are older than 21 With text variables you can define quotas based on words that are present or not present in a variable for example people who mention the word expensive when saying why they would not buy a product Note Expression Quotas exist only for the characteristics you define If your expressions do not cover all possible values for a variable there will be no quotas for the missing values This is not the same as Table Quotas where choosing a variable automatically creates quotas for all categories in the variable For example if you define a single expression for people aged 35 years and below there will be no quota for respondents aged over 35 and respondents in this age group will not be checked This is not wrong but you may prefer to create a counter quota for these respondents instead When a quota has more than one characteristic the expression that defines the quota will consist of a number of sub express
238. entage of cases that are present in that category The percentages are based on the number of cases present in the variable not the number of cases in the dataset as a whole The chart does not have a base row SpontaneousQ romptedQ Project MultiModet Date Thursday July 29 2010 Q io PROE lt lt Table Which of these brands do you use E HowoftenLoop Filter Brand2 HowOftenQ Interview Respondent data only with status Completed successfully io HowOftenLoop Filter Brand3 HovOftenQ io HovOftenLoop Brand4 HovOftenQ HovOftenLoop Brand5 HovOftenQ PER Brand 1 Brand 2 Which of these brands do you use Brand 3 Brand 4 Brand 5 Information About Numeric Variables If you hover over a numeric variable a pop up displays the variable s description and its minimum and maximum values as they are defined in the questionnaire definition file If the data was gathered using IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server these will be the minimum and maximum values defined for the question in the script If you select a numeric variable in the Question List Survey Results displays a table showing the base mean minimum maximum and standard deviation based on the values found in the data There are no charts for numeric variables person trip country E B person trip daysaway B person trip satisfaction B person trip transportmodes person trip purpose
239. ents If there is no name or user ticket specified in the Activate document the activation process attempts to log in as a trusted Windows user t ticket The user ticket to use for activating the document It is recommended that tickets are not stored in Activate documents This option is valid for command line activation only r Display a progress box c Write information to the screen 306 Chapter 1 Option Description l Display a login dialog box 2 Display help In dialog box mode Activate displays a dialog box in which you specify the activation parameters this is the mode in which Activate runs in IBM SPSS Data Collection Base Professional You can include options on the command line that pre populate the dialog box with certain types of information such as the project name or interview script type When you have completed the dialog box click Activate to start activation This mode is ideal for creating new Activate Documents To activate in this mode type activate g p proj_ID s script_type foldername d DPMservername w webservice URL 1 Optional parameters are as follows Option Description 9 Displays the Activate dialog box Use this option when you want to create an Activate document If this option is not present a is required p project_id The project ID s script _type Interview script type Must
240. eport might display an empty table or an error message 232 Chapter 1 gt Ss Ga sl 1 7 7 2 7s 14 21 Frequency B33 35 345 spon 1D NII CIM COLO A D A A O A O A D O O Frequency ONO COU AZER EZ 40 60 ColPercent Busy Wait and Idle Time For projects that use an autodialer this report shows the busy wait and idle times for each interviewer who has worked on the project The definition of these times is as follows m Busy time This is when the interviewer is interacting with the participant 233 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Waittime This is when the interviewer has clicked the Start Dialing button in the Phone Participants activity and is waiting to be connected to a participant m Idle time This is when the interviewer can click the Start Dialing button but has not done so Each cell which corresponds to the busy wait or idle time for one interviewer shows the mean time the total time the minimum time and the maximum time All times are shown in days hours minutes and seconds If you specify a time period when you run the report the report includes only interviewers who made calls during that time period The Busy Wait and Idle Time report does not include a chart even if you have enabled the charting feature Note that this report always includes data for both real and test interviews you cannot choose to includ
241. er criteria the respondent is not allowed to continue the survey and the Screener field is recorded as Failed If respondent answers meet the Screener criteria they are allowed to continue the survey and the Screener field is recorded as Passed 87 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Column Description Sortld This integer column can be used to define the order in which participant records are selected from the FRESH queue by the sample management system If you are using the telephone interviewing sample management script that is supplied with IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server the script will select the record with the lowest value in this column You can populate this column in one of two ways by including your own values for SortId in your text file or by specifying that this column should be populated with random values automatically when your file is uploaded To specify that you want random values select the Re randomize all participant records option on the Upload tab Note that this will also result in new values being assigned to any existing records in the sample table If you choose not to populate this column Participants sets its value to Null when loading a participant record The telephone interviewing sample management script that is supplied with Interviewer Server will then select the record from the FRESH queue that has the lowest value in the
242. er Activities 6 0 1 Support for reserved names and keywords in metadata IBM SPSS Data Collection now provides full support for SQL and mrScript reserved names and keywords in metadata variables In previous releases the use of reserved SQL keywords could cause issues when using the I BM SPSS Data Collection Data Model to query data for processes such as DMOM the use of reserved mrScript keywords could cause syntax errors when referenced within a routing script Refer to the Reserved Keywords and Keyword Summary topics in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library for more information Export Data The activity has been updated to support the following new features m You can calculate and then generate two extra data columns that contain the start and finish times for each case The start and finish times are based on the selected time zone of your choosing For more information see the topic Exporting Data on p 262 m You can include only records that relate to a specific filter condition such as time period or survey status Export Data provides several filters that you can modify to suit your requirements You can also create your own filters or delete filters that are no longer needed Licensed Materials Property of IBM Copyright 1 IBM Corporation 2000 2011 2 Chapter 1 These new features are supported via the new Set Filters dialog For more information see the topic Edit Preset Filters dialog on p
243. er the record s AppointmentTime then the record is chosen Appointments are returned sorted by appointment time from the APPOINTMENT queue so that the first appointment chronologically is chosen Sat gt gt On the Script tab make whatever changes are necessary to the Sample Management script gt Optionally click Validate to validate the script This checks that the script is syntactically correct without you having the save the script first A message is displayed above the script frame at the end of the validation process gt To save your changes choose Save If there are errors in the script an explanatory message is issued and the original version of the script is reinstated 80 Chapter 7 Changing Sample Fields and Authentication Fields EditSampleScript Sample Columns Sample Table Column Sample Field Authentication Field Id Queue Active Serial PreviousQueue AppointmentTime RecallTime ReturnTime TryCount AppointmentTry Count PhoneNumber InterviewMode CallOutcome TimeZone TIGA IIWAAWIAWAIAWAWIAAA ROAAnAAOAnDAADAAAOAO Comments gt Select the Columns tab gt To select new sample fields or to cancel existing sample fields click the check boxes of those fields in the Sample Field column gt To select new authentication fields or to cancel existing authentication fields click the check boxes of those fields in the Authentication Field column Notes m All authenticatio
244. erences a sample management object then the value set in the sample management property Queueing gt Queues gt Properties gt INIT_catalog is used as the server name Otherwise the Database box is empty Tables If there is a project in DPM with the same name as the current mdd or mqd file and that project references a sample management object then the value set in the sample management property Queueing gt Queues gt Properties gt Table is used as the server name Otherwise the Tables box is empty In Server choose the name of the database server you want to use In Database choose the name of the participants database 313 IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup gt In Table choose that name of the table that holds the project s sample records The names of the columns in the table appear in the Columns box gt In Columns choose the variables that you want to use for quotas The default is to make all sample variables available It may be quicker to click Clear all and then select the columns you want to use rather than canceling unwanted columns individually gt Click OK Hiding Components of the IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Window gt Choose one or more of the following from the View menu List Pane Show hide the List Pane Clicking the X button in the top right hand corner of the pane also hides the pane Details Pane Show hide the Details pane Clicking the X button in the top right hand corner of t
245. es and factors These changes apply to the current question only they do not affect any other questions in which the shared list is used m Ifyou insert a multiple choice shared list into a single response question the responses in the list are changed to single response types for that question only If you subsequently change the overall response type for the question any responses that are defined as multiple choice in the shared list will revert to being multiple choice in the question Shared responses that are defined as single choice never change their response type Do not insert more than one shared list into a question as this may result in responses that have duplicate names If you try to do this Build issues an error message to this effect If you need to use more than one shared list for a question create a new shared list containing all the responses in the two existing lists and use that instead Do not insert a shared list into a question that already contains ordinary responses unless those responses are flagged as the special No Answer Don t Know or Refused responses as this could result in responses with duplicate names To Insert a Shared List in a Question gt Select the question s Advanced tab 45 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide gt Inthe Responses section click Append Shared List This opens the Insert Shared List dialog box Select Shared List Shared list nam
246. es audible notifications whenever activation messages are generated The Play this sound file field allows you to specify a sound file Click the Browse button to select a sound file gt Click Save changes to save your settings Appendix A Notices This information was developed for products and services offered worldwide IBM may not offer the products services or features discussed in this document in other countries Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area Any reference to an IBM product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead However it is the user s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non IBM product program or service IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document The furnishing of this document does not grant you any license to these patents You can send license inquiries in writing to IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation North Castle Drive Armonk NY 10504 1785 U S A For license inquiries regarding double byte character set DBCS information contact the IBM Intellectual Property Department in your country or send inquiries in writin
247. es gaps that are shorter than a qualification timer goff that is the end of voice is asserted when goff expires The dialer utilizes two qualification timers m off for humans determines when a call is connected to an interviewer The settings should be short lt 0 8 seconds otherwise the respondent might become impatient and hang up However a goff that is too short causes many false negatives because the timer fails to bridge well articulated greetings m qam for answering machines determines when amfile is played It should be long gt 2 seconds otherwise the playback might start before the answering machine is ready to record it Calibration Mode Calibration mode is a means to determine the optimum AMD parameters In calibration mode all calls are connected to interviewers just as when AMD is disabled The AMD measures the duration of the respondent s initial greeting During this phase the interviewer can hear the respondent but cannot talk When the AMD measurement is finished end of voice the interviewer hears a short beep WBeep and audio is connected in both directions In cases of long initial silence longer than coff seconds or persistent voice longer than con seconds the AMD measurement is aborted and audio is connected in both directions This makes it possible to try out different values of db and goff without losing the contacts The greet time measured by AMD is sent to the application and recorded
248. esentation Styles folder and displays a message to this effect gt Click OK to close the message box The name of the presentation template file is displayed in the Presentation Style box gt Click Apply To Set Export and Analysis Options gt Select the Export Analysis tab 36 Chapter 7 Figure 1 6 Export Analysis tab f onian Eat Aanes Peers These settings will apply when the collected data is downloaded using the Export Data activity or when the data is analyzed using the Tabulation activity To change the current settings for a question select the question from the list on the left and change the options in the table below Undo 7 Quostioniliaxt How would you rate the hotel for the following Common Part of How would you rate the hotel for the following Variable Label Subject Text Variable Label Cleanliness of rooms Cleanliness of rooms How would you rate the hotel for the following Room service Room service How would you rate the hotel for the following Leisure facilities leisure facilities How would you rate the hotel for the following Update Grid Variable Labels Responses for Each Variable Category Label fxcelert oo 4 fveryGood oo S a foot oo fSatistactory i s S S S Por Previous Next gt In Variable Label type the text you want to use as the variable label in place of the question text gt In Subject Text amend the subject texts as n
249. eshing 296 starting 294 Interviews monitoring 272 language changing 3 Language barrier 182 Language recall 182 Launch activation process 115 cluster to activate on 109 interview web pages 114 localization subfolders 109 overview 108 project database 109 project status after activation 109 quota control 113 344 Index routing context 109 sample management 111 starting 108 legal notices 338 Library copying templates to 77 importing questions from 49 Library files creating 73 75 Localization IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server 3 Manage Logs downloading log files 299 overview 296 view settings 296 viewing log files 297 zip file contents 300 Marketing Systems Group Pro T S certification 291 mdd file where read from 218 Missing values 21 31 37 modifying filters 265 Monitoring interviewers 272 Monitoring silent calls 272 More than one question on a page 67 mqd file quota definitions 313 mqd files reusing 333 Network busy 182 New questionnaire creating 73 No answer 182 Not Available 182 Notes in scripts 51 Numeric questions 22 Numeric variables quotas for 318 Overrides tab 149 Participant Rules changing sample script 79 changing sample authentication fields 80 overview 78 starting 78 testing the script 80 Participants access permissions for manually created databases 81 activity features 107 column set up parameters 89 colum
250. esigned to meet the needs of the market research industry For detailed information about the many functions that are available refer to the Function Library documentation in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library 326 Chapter 2 When you create a simple expression IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup converts the expression into the Expression Definition language automatically When you create an advanced expression you write the expression yourself in the Advanced Filter Specification window which is designed to make creating expressions easy The Advanced Filter Specification window has buttons for the operators and functions that you are most likely to use as well as lists of all of the variables and functions that are available You can build an expression by choosing variables and clicking operator buttons by entering the expression directly or by using a combination of the two approaches Expression Syntax At its most basic an expression is Variable Operator Value where E Variable is the name of a variable E Operator is a comparison operator such as gt greater than or equal to or one of the functions for selecting respondents on the basis the answers given to a question variable Value is one or more answers held in the variable You must enclose text values in double quotes for example noisy You specify values of a categorical variable by defining a comma separated list of categ
251. esponses as the rows Choose Arrange subjects in rows to have the subjects as the rows of the grid and the responses as the columns This is the default In Question Type choose whether this is a single or multiple response question By default the setting for this property matches the data type of the item you selected to create this question that is if you chose Single Response then Single Response will be selected automatically for this property You should only need to change this setting if you want to change the question type after the question has been defined Changing the question type here changes the overall question type in the questionnaire and also changes all the individual response types in the response list In Response Order choose the order in which responses should be presented Choose Default to present responses in the order they appear in the response list Random to present responses in a random order Rotated to present responses in rotation so that each response takes a turn at being first in the list or Reversed to present responses in reverse order so that the last response in the list appears first Use the Display Responses boxes if you want to filter the response list based on the respondent s answers to previous related questions m In the first box choose one of All Responses Chosen or Not Chosen m In the second box choose the question whose answer controls the responses to be displayed for the curren
252. essional 69 routing facilities 10 running from IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration 10 running outside IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration 10 73 saving questionnaires to library 48 saving questionnaires library files 75 setting activation parameters 71 shared lists 42 shared templates 76 shared templates folders 77 single multiple choice grid questions 30 single multiple choice questions 16 starting 11 terminating interviews 56 testing questionnaires 70 text questions 26 unconditional routing 53 unsupported item types 64 342 Index uploading loading templates pictures 50 user options 13 viewing changing routing section 72 Business 182 Busy 182 call outcomes translating 202 Categorical questions editing response subject list 65 Categorical responses switching between single and multiple response types 65 Categorical variables in expression quotas 325 catifields_default mdd default settings for Phone Surveys changing 169 Cell phone 182 certification dialer 291 Marketing Systems Group Pro T S 291 Sytel 291 Changes saving 66 undoing 66 Changing behavior flags 212 Changing cell priorities for Priority quotas 212 Changing targets 212 Changing the question order 68 cut and paste 68 Checking quotas 211 Cluster to activate on 109 Columns required in sample table 84 Comments in scripts 51 Completed interview page 1
253. esult in silent calls Maximum percentage of silent calls You can specify the maximum percentage of silent calls that are allowed to occur in the 24 hour period since midnight If the actual rate of silent calls approaches this value the autodialing system reduces the current rate of predictive calls to ensure that the maximum percentage of silent calls is not exceeded To change the maximum percentage enter a decimal number in this field Target percentage of silent calls You can specify the target percentage of silent calls that should occur at any time The autodialing system attempts to keep the actual rate of silent calls at this value by continually adjusting the current rate of predictive calls To change the target percentage enter a decimal number in this field The value must be less than the value of Maximum percentage of silent calls Reset Statistics The Dialers tab in the Interviewer Monitoring activity shows the percentage of silent calls that are occurring for this project To set that percentage figure to zero click this button on the Dialer Settings tab 163 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Changing the default settings If you find that for every new project you always change the settings on the Dialer Settings tab to the same new values you can instead change the default settings that Interviewer Server provides so that you no longer need to do this For more information see the topic Ch
254. evaluation order is as follows E Not Multiplication and division Addition and subtraction Comparison operators And and Or When operators are at the same level of precedence they are simply evaluated from left to right You can override the order of precedence by using parentheses Operators that are within parentheses are evaluated before operators that are not contained within parentheses However when more than one operator is contained within parentheses they are evaluated according to the normal order of precedence Editing Expression Quotas gt On the Expression Quotas tab click on the expression you want to change An arrow button appears to the right of the expression gt Click the arrow button The expression is opened for editing If the expression is a simple expression based on one variable the Filter On dialog box for that variable type appears If the expression contains sub expressions the Filter On dialog box for the last sub expression appears To access other 333 IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup sub expressions you will need to click the Advanced button to view the whole expression in the Quota Expression language Deleting Expression Quotas gt On the Expression Quotas tab click the red cross at the end of the line for the Expression Quota you want to delete gt Confirm your request when prompted to do so Reusing a Quota Definition File in Another Project If you have
255. existing comments 192 Chapter 7 gt To add new comments type them into the blank box at the foot of the dialog box Text wraps automatically in the box press Enter if you want to force a new line in the comment text gt Click OK to close the dialog box If you have entered a new comment it is added to the comments list Making appointments When you choose a call outcome that allows an appointment to be made you will see the Create Appointment dialog box Figure 1 49 Create Appointment dialog box Ue FRESH 456 7890 Ledit FRESH edit UploadSample Create Appointment Respondent s GMT 05 00 Easter Time US amp Canada j Respondent s Z L ance 3 9 2009 4 05 PM Appointment Specify using respondent s time Date lt March 2009 gt Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Valid appointment hours for this date 12 00 AM end of day Time J vi Oam pm Corresponds to 3 10 2009 4 15 AM Call Center Time Comments gt In Respondent s Time Zone select the time zone in which the participant is located Often the participant s time zone is defined in his or her participant record so you will not need to change this field gt Use the calendar to select the appointment date Click the date on which you want to call back today s date is preselected If necessary use the arrow keys in the month bar to move to a different month gt Inthe Time drop down lists select the time at which t
256. ext Name Address Email Gender Age Nvarchar Nvarchar Nvarchar Nvarchar Nvarchar Test Mapped to required field Int Item Description Original field name The name of a field in the participants text file Upload Whether to upload the field into a column in the sample table New field name Default The name for the corresponding column in the sample table If the field has already been mapped to a required column this is noted here and you are not able to change the field s settings on this tab The default value for this column if the record in the text file does not contain a corresponding value for this column Type The data type for this column Based on the data in the text file Participants suggests the best data type to use Length The maximum size of this column This can be set for some data types only 91 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide To Change the Mapping of a Field to an Additional Column gt Select the Additional Fields tab gt Click the Edit symbol the pencil on the right of the field whose mapping you want to change Choose only a field that has not been mapped to a required column Note If you want to change the mapping for a field that has been mapped to a required column use the Required Fields tab gt If you do not want Participants to load this field into the sample table clear the Upload che
257. f these brands do you use When the table is displayed it has a base row and by default the cells of the table show counts and column percentages Survey Results also shows the name of the project the date and time it was run and the filter applied at the top of the page Categorical Variables You can place a categorical variable on the top or the side of the table If you add a categorical variable to an existing table or specification you may also replace the existing top or side variable with the new variable or place the new variable to the right of the existing top variable or beneath the existing side variable Numeric Variables You can place a numeric variable on the side of the table and other variables can be placed below it Numeric variables cannot be placed on the top of the table and once a numeric variable is on the side of a table you cannot place any variable on the top Grid Variables You can place a grid variable on the side of the table No further variables can be added to the table To Build a Table 223 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide gt Select Actions gt Build Table This opens the Table Builder window gt In the Variable List select a variable that you want to use as the side or top of the table Survey Results displays a list of possible positions for that variable in the current table gt Select the position in which you want to use this variable g
258. f these settings so that your custom settings will be used whenever a new project is created See Changing the Default Settings at the end of this topic Dialer Settings Send caller identification Select this option to transmit the caller s telephone number when the autodialer makes a call Phone number to send By default the caller s telephone number is provided by a setting on the autodialer To specify the caller s telephone number enter the number in this field The phone number must contain only the digits 0 to 9 and the following characters and The presence of any other characters might cause caller identification to fail Error if login position is not in configuration If one or more autodialers have been added to the Dialer Administration activity in IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration every telephone interviewer station that is any computer on which the Phone Participants activity will be used must be assigned a position name When a position name is entered in Phone Participants IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server validates the name against those defined in the Dialer Administration activity For projects that use an autodialer you can choose whether stations with unrecognized positions can be used to conduct interviews that is Phone Participants will still open If so manual dialing must be used on those stations If you select this check box Phone
259. f you want to run test interviews or paste a URL into a Web document click the appropriate Copy to Clipboard to copy to the URLs onto your clipboard gt Click Close to close the message box 72 Chapter 7 Downloading the Questionnaire onto your Computer If you want to download a Build questionnaire mdd file onto your computer you can either use the Files activity or download it directly from Build A common reason for downloading Build questionnaires is to make changes to the routing section of a IBM SPSS Data Collection questionnaire Build creates a simple Routing section based on the information you have entered for each question plus any routing statements you have added using IOM Script items or the script library but there may be other changes that you want to make that cannot be done in Build The Routing section is called Paper and it is read only Note that this differs from the default Routing section name used by IBM SPSS Data Collection Base Professional which is Web If you want to view the change the routing statements you should download the questionnaire To Download a Questionnaire File gt Choose Tools gt Download Questionnaire This opens a standard Windows File Download dialog box gt Click Open to open the questionnaire file in IBM SPSS Data Collection Questionnaire Viewer or Save to save it in a location of your choice To View the Routing Section gt Download the question
260. for reducing clumping However if there are no yet any FRESH records randomizing the recall times can reduce the clumping of recalls after the first clump in a shift or daypart The multimodel_sample mrs script randomizes the recall time around the specified delay using the specified before a recall time as the margin and adjusting that recall time between 2 and 10 minutes as the recall time after For example when the busy delay is 30 minutes and the before a recall time is 10 minutes numbers will be recalled between 20 and 40 minutes from their return time Order records with each queue by The table displays the current field order for each queue Before performing the following task you must first select a queue row from the table Click the Edit queue order button to open the Queue Order Edit dialog and edit the selected queue s field order Figure 1 14 Fi For more information see the topic Queue Order Edit dialog on p 141 Notes m When queue ordering and field weight ordering are both specified queue ordering is used to resolve parallel ordering Records with values for which no order or weight are specified are retrieved last from the Appointment queue records are not retrieved from any of the other queues Field Order Dialog The Field Order dialog provides options for defining how record field values are ordered 141 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide e Bathe ies Webpage Dialog
261. for respondents to be able to click Next without having to select an answer You will not see the No Answer category until your screen is refreshed for example when you change tabs At this point Build also displays a message telling you that it has added No Answer If you set this option to Yes and then edit the question later on and change this option to No Build does not automatically remove No Answer If you want to disallow No Answer response you must delete it yourself In Hide this question choose No if the question should be displayed to the respondent If this is a dummy question that is to exist in the questionnaire but not be displayed to respondents choose Yes Typically the responses to hidden questions are set by statements defined in IOM Script items They provide an efficient method of merging the responses to a number of related questions 29 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide into a single variable for use elsewhere in the questionnaire For this reason the response list for the hidden question often consists of all the responses to the questions that are to be merged Note Because they are not displayed hidden questions are not valid in question groups If you want to allow No Answer Don t Know or Refuse to Answer as special responses to this question do the following m In Special Responses select the responses you want to allow m Ifyou want a response to
262. for the selected date that the project will expire Enter an appropriate time in the 24 hour format hh mm for example 17 00 for 5 00 PM Appointment Schedule Provides options for clearing the existing sub schedules loading schedule templates and saving schedule templates Click New Schedule to clear any currently defined sub schedules Click Load Template to load an existing appointment schedule template Templates are stored in the Distributed Property Management DPM Click Save As to save the current schedule settings as a template in DPM The Save As dialog displays allowing you to specify schedule template name Schedule name Save Cancel Enter an appropriate schedule template name and click Save Otherwise click Cancel to return to the Appointments tab without saving Sub Schedule Provides options for defining specific scheduling parameters You can define specific shift parameters and date overrides for each sub schedule For example the sub schedule Weekdays could include the shift 08 00 17 00 for Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri while the sub schedule Weekends could include the shift 12 00 19 00 for Sat Sun To Create a New Sub Schedule Click New Sub Schedule to open the New Sub Schedule dialog r Sub schedule name 0K cancel gt Enter an appropriate sub schedule name and click OK to save the sub schedule Otherwise click Cancel to discard the new sub schedule To
263. g to Intellectual Property Licensing Legal and Intellectual Property Law IBM Japan Ltd 1623 14 Shimotsuruma Yamato shi Kanagawa 242 8502 Japan The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication IBM may make improvements and or changes in the product s and or the program s described in this publication at any time without notice Any references in this information to non IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Licensees
264. g the questionnaire Activating the questionnaire for live interviewing using standard parameters Activating the questionnaire using manually set parameters Downloading the questionnaire file onto your computer Testing the Questionnaire Use Build s Test option to activate the project in test mode and optionally run a test interview Activating in test mode sets the project s Test Version property to be the latest version of the questionnaire and its Active Version property to None The following things happen when you activate in test mode m Build generates a read only Routing section for the questionnaire based on the questions it contains plus any statements you have placed in IOM Script items or loaded from the script library The Routing section is called Paper Note that this differs from the default Routing section name used by IBM SPSS Data Collection Base Professional which is Web m The Launch activity activates the project If the project s status is Inactive the activation process changes it to Test m A dialog box displays the URL to use for running a test interview Note You cannot run test interviews on projects whose status is Active If you want to run test interviews on an active project you must run the View Survey Link activity from IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration To Run a Test Interview Choose Tools gt Activate gt Test Mode A message box reports the progre
265. h Sample Management script to use do one of the following m Select a script from the predefined selection list in the Script drop down list The list you see here can be customized by your Data Collection administrator so the scripts that you see may differ from the scripts that your colleagues see m Ifthe script does not appear in the selection list click Browse and upload the file In both cases the script will then be displayed in the script listing box and may sometimes be edited Script editing is an optional facility that your Data Collection administrator can make available if required If the Script Type box is displayed and you chose a script of a different type to the one shown in the box for example a VBScript script when the box shows Data Collection the text in this box is updated to show the type of script you have chosen l For details of how to enable the facility to edit sample management scripts see Settings for the Launch Activity and the Desktop Activation Program in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server section of the IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library documentation 113 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Quota Project Info Sample Management f Interview Web Pages Launch Project Id QUOTA1 Project Name QUOTA Description Please select the launch options you require If you select Use Quota on the Quota tab you will be prompted for i
266. h version language context and label type you want to export le http 9 30 215 222 SPSSMR InterviewExporter AdvancedDialog aspx path 3CUserFolder 3E Projects MUSEUI English United States v Analysis _ vi Questionnaire definition mdd files typically contain versions which record any changes to the content of the questionnaire Typically when the questionnaire changes for example a question or category is added or deleted a new version is created and when the changes are complete the version is locked Using a combination of some or all of the versions is useful when for example you want to export case data for more than one version and there have been changes to the variable and category definitions that mean that case data collected with one version is not valid in another version Selecting all of the versions for which you want to export the case data means that generally you can export the case data collected with the different versions at the same time without encountering validity errors due to the differences between the versions However depending on the version changes some validity errors may still be encountered 270 Chapter 1 For more Current version Displays an expression that represents the selection you have chosen You can optionally select the versions you want to use by typing an expression directly into the text box Syntax Description Specifies all versions vl
267. hat the connection to the autodialer has failed The fields shown in the real time display are described in the following table Field Description Dialer The autodialer name as specified in the dialer configuration file State The current state of the autodialer which might be Starting Active Stopping Stopped or Failed Status For an autodialer in the Active state this field shows the number of interviewers who are dialing a participant or who are connected to a participant To see the number of interviewers by project expand the node to the left of the status For an autodialer in the Failed state this field shows the number of times that the connection to the autodialer has failed 290 Chapter 7 The top right of the real time display contains buttons that can be used for various tasks The buttons are listed in the following table Button Description Connect to this autodialer tu Disconnect from this autodialer x Remove this autodialer from the Dialer Administration activity A Refresh the real time display Note The real time display is refreshed only when you click one of these buttons Click the Refresh button periodically to keep the display up to date Connecting to and disconnecting from an autodialer When you connect to an autodialer it is able to generate calls for telephone interviewers that request them When you disconnect from an autodi
268. he Displayed Fields list and then click Move Down In the Sort table by drop down list select the field that will determine the order of the records on the View tab When you have completed your changes click Apply To undo your changes click Cancel Select the View tab to see your changes Changing the Default List of Fields Displayed on the View Tab When you create a new project the Displayed Fields list in the View Settings tab is populated with a default list of fields provided by IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server To change the default list that Interviewer Server provides you need to use DPM Distributed Property Management Explorer as follows In Windows Explorer run DPMExplorer exe which by default is located in the INSTALL _FOLDER IBM SPSS DataCollection 6 DDL Code Tools VB NET DPM Explorer Net folder In the left pane expand the top level node the site name and then click the Properties node In the upper right pane click the ParticipantsDefaultDisplay property In the lower right pane change the list of field names as required Make sure that you separate field names with semicolons and do not add any spaces Click the Apply button which is in the lower right corner Displaying a Selection of Records By default the View tab of the Participants activity displays all of the participant records in the sample table Because a sample table might contain thousands of records you can choose
269. he drop down lists m For the Appointments Summary report select the start and end dates from the calendars gt Ifyou have been prompted to enter additional information click OK to download the reports gt When prompted choose whether to open the zip file in its associated program or save it to the location of your choice About Segments Segments are a means of categorizing records using groupings of your choice If segment information is present in the project s sample table the Phone activity further breaks the data down by segment when running either the Call Outcome by Segment report or the Calls by Segment report Segment is not a required column in the sample table and if not present the report shows information at the top level only Alternative names for the Segment column in priority order are Market Location Region or Bucket That is if there is no Segment column the Phone activity looks for a column called Market and uses that if there isn t a Market column it looks for one called Location and so on Whatever its name make sure that you set the column s Can Tabulate option to True on the Fields tab of the Phone Surveys activity 261 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Export Data You use Export Data to export interview data for analysis using products such as IBM SPSS Data Collection Survey Tabulation or IBM SPSS Statistics The files that Export Data creates are w
270. he following information m The top of the main screen displays the same Participant s details that were displayed when the interview was conducted If any of the fields are shown as being editable you can update them while you are conducting the review m The left of the main screen displays a list of the questions that were asked during the interview You can click any question name to jump straight to that question m The center of the main screen displays the current question If you entered an answer to that question during the interview the answer is shown Conducting the Review You can navigate through the questions and amend any answer using the same methods that you use for conducting interviews That is you might be able to use the keyboard only or you might need to use the mouse as well For more information see Using the Keyboard or the Mouse in Conducting interviews You can also jump straight to any question by clicking the question name in the list on the left If changing the answer to a question would cause additional questions to appear that did not appear when you conducted the interview or cause existing questions to disappear a warning message is displayed When you click OK the question list on the left of the main screen will 202 Chapter 1 refresh to include any additional questions and to remove any existing questions that are no longer relevant If a question allowed you to record the partici
271. he order in which responses should be presented Choose Default to present responses in the order they appear in the response list Random to present responses in a random order Rotated to present responses in rotation so that each response takes a turn at being first in the list or Reversed to present responses in reverse order so that the last response in the list appears first In Number Type choose either Integer or Real depending on the type of numeric answer you want to accept In the Minimum Value and Maximum Value boxes type the range of values to accept as valid responses See Question Limits for information about the range of values you can use for numeric responses To associate a picture with a response do the following m Click the button to the right of the Picture box for that response m On the Select page locate the image file and then click Select For more information see the topic Copying Pictures and Presentation Templates on p 50 The name of the image file is displayed in the Picture box To Set Presentation Options t holidays BARBARA Primary Language English United States H rating Apply Undo Page Presentation Style H Previous Next Insert Item Click the image next to the empty Presentation Style box 41 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide gt On the Select page locate the htm file and click Select Build copies the file to the My Presentation Style
272. he pane also hides the pane Default Layout Return the window to its default appearance Main Toolbar Show hide the main toolbar Status Bar Hide show the status bar at the foot of the window Creating and Opening Quota Files IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup obtains its information about a project s variables from the mdd file and saves the quota definitions you create in a file with an mqd extension Note If quotas exist for a project you should always work on the mqd file rather than the mdd file If you open an mdd file when a mqd file exists Quota Setup will overwrite the original contents of the mqd file rather than adding the new quotas you have just created To Create a New Quota Definition File gt Choose File gt New This opens the Open dialog box gt Navigate to the project s source folder and choose the project s mdd file gt Click Open The List Pane displays the names of the project s categorical variables and the Quota Construction Area is prepared for defining quotas To Open an Existing Quota Definition File gt Choose File gt Open This opens the Open dialog box gt Navigate to the project s source folder and choose the project s mqd file 314 Chapter 2 gt Click Open The List Pane displays the names of the project s categorical variables and the Quota Construction Area shows details of the existing quotas Undoing and Redoing Actions IBM
273. he participant asks you to call Therefore the time that you select is the time in the participant s time zone If the participant says something like 193 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Call back in two hours you can calculate the appointment time by adding two hours to the time shown in Respondent s Local Time which is displayed just below Respondent s Time Zone If the participant says something like Any time after 3 pm it is a good idea to set the time to something like 3 15 pm to ensure that the number will not be selected before 3 pm Numbers with appointments might become eligible for calling a short while before the appointment time to cater for participants who ask to be called back around 3 pm Your supervisor will tell you what the requirements are for the project you are working on gt Ifyou have other information that might be useful to the next person who calls this number enter it in the Comments field and it will be appended to the list of comments in the main Comments box gt Click Submit Retrieving a specific participant Depending on the options that your supervisor has set you might be able to retrieve a specific participant You can use this feature to retrieve your last contact or search for another contact Retrieving a specific participant gt On the Phone Participants main screen click the Specific Contact button as shown below Figure 1 50
274. he queue m To return to displaying all participant records select the Display All option in the Participants pane To Display Records that fall within a Range of Values You might want to display only records that have a value that falls between two values for example records that have an Id between 100 and 200 Enter the first part of your selection criteria for example Id greater than 99 Click the And Or button A second group of drop down lists text boxes and buttons appears under the first group In this second group enter the second part of your selection criteria for example Id less than 201 fo lgeatertian fo ane fo esen do Awor Derete Click Apply to display the records that match your selection criteria Note To remove a line from your selection criteria click Delete on the right of the line that you want to remove To Display Records that have one of Several Values You might want to display only records whose value is equal to any one of several values for example records that are in the FRESH queue or the ACTIVE queue or the FAILED queue Enter the first part of your selection criteria for example Queue equal to FRESH Click the And Or button In the And Or drop down list select Or Enter the second part of your selection criteria for example Queue equal to ACTIVE Click the And Or button and select Or from the drop down list Enter the third part of your selection criteria fo
275. he server to which the questionnaire is being activated m User The name of the user who initiated the activation E ProcessingServer The server that performs the activation In a cluster environment the server to which an activation is submitted is not necessarily the server that performs the activation m StartTime The time at which the questionnaire was submitted for activation This is the time as reported by the Interviewer Server m EndTime The time at which the questionnaire completed activation This is the time as reported by the Interviewer Server Link The URL for the activated live questionnaire Test Link The URL for the activated test questionnaire Projectld The activated questionnaire project s unique ID The ID is generated by the Interviewer Server Refresh Click to refresh the activation status View Messages Select a completed activation and click to view any messages generated during activation Removing pending activations gt Select the appropriate project s from the Pending Activation section Alternatively you can select all project by clicking Select all gt Click Cancel selected or right click and select Cancel 336 Chapter 3 Note You cannot remove activations initiated by other users You can only remove your own activations Filters tab The Filters tab provides options for defining how activations are displayed on the Activation History tab Acti
276. he side variable When the structure of the quota grid is complete you can start defining targets Select one or more cells in the target grid as follows To Select Do the following A single cell Click in the cell Double click to select the cell and open the Quota information dialog box all in one go A number of nonadjacent cells Hold down the Ctrl key and click on each cell in turn All cells in a row Position the cursor over a cell in that row right click and choose Select Row All cells in a column Position the cursor over a cell in that column right click and choose Select Column All cells in the grid Position the cursor over any cell right click and choose Select Table The selected cells turn blue and are the ones that will be affected by your next actions Right click and choose Edit from the pop up menu This opens the Quota information dialog box In Quota target type the target for the selected cell or cells Optionally click Allow Over Quota if you want to allow interviewing to continue all the time that the number of completed interviews in this cell is less that the target Once the target is met any interviews that were already in progress will be allowed to continue and complete so it is possible that the final number of completed interviews will slightly exceed the target Once the target has been met all new interviews in the cell will fail the quota test and will be dealt with as
277. hen an interviewer asks to be connected to a participant IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server uses the position name to route the request to the appropriate autodialer When a call has been successfully generated the autodialer connects the participant to the extension number specified for that position name so that the interviewer can speak to the participant If a station has not been assigned a recognized position name it cannot be used for autodialing For projects that use an autodialer you can choose whether the station can still be used to conduct interviews by manual dialing see Stations with Unrecognized Position Names later in this topic You must also assign position names to supervisor stations that will be used for either audio monitoring of interviewers or for reviewing interviews that include audio recordings see Stations used for Audio Monitoring and Stations used for Reviewing Interviews later in this topic Assigning position names Position names are assigned to telephone interviewer stations in one of two ways m By an administrator Make sure that you have been assigned the Phone Participants activity feature Can set up interviewer stations Then open Phone Participants on each station and when prompted enter the appropriate position name For example the name might be RO2 S18 for the computer at seat 18 in room 2 This needs to be done only once on each station Any interviewers who
278. her ID number name and telephone number If any of the fields are shown as being editable you can update them while you are conducting the review You might also see comments associated with this participant which have been added by interviewers who have called or interviewed this participant For more information see the topic Viewing and entering comments on p 190 The Left of the Main Screen The left of the main screen displays a list of the questions that were asked during the interview You can click any question name to jump straight to that question Above the list of questions are buttons for various tasks as described below Button Description Keyboard Shortcut see note below this table Reject the interview For more Alt R 3 l information see the topic Ending a Review on p 210 Close Review Interviews and Alt X P return to the main IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration page Display help for Review Alt H Interviews Note For some browsers pressing the keyboard shortcut alone will perform the action For other browsers you might have to press Enter after pressing the keyboard shortcut Navigating Using the Keyboard Depending on your browser you might be able to switch between the three sections of the main screen by pressing Ctrl Tab or F6 Selecting an Interview to Review Figure 1 60 Selecting an interview to review vw To
279. his column is used by the Phone activity to filter the participant records that appears in phone reports If the value of this column is 0 the Phone activity will treat the record as real data or live data If the value of this column is 1 the Phone activity will treat the record as test data If your text file does not contain a field with this information Participants will set the value of this column to Null and the Phone activity will then treat the record as if it is both real and test data If you are loading participant records into an existing table your table must include this column even if your project is not a telephone interviewing project Sample tables for telephone interviewing projects must also include the following columns If they do not exist they will be added automatically if you select the Use sample for phone interviewing option described later in this topic or if you activate the project using the With CATT option on the Sample Management tab of the Launch activity Column Description ActivityStartTime The StartTime of the latest record in history table for a specific sample AppointmentTime The time at which the respondent asked to be called Times are shown in UTC format The project s Sample Management script takes into account any time differences between interviewers and participants when it selects records for calling AppointmentTryCount The num
280. hree options full question question name and text or question name Whichever one you choose becomes the default for future sessions The setting you choose for the Overview tab does not affect any other tabs If the Overview tab displays question names only you will still see the full question text and response list when you switch to the Edit or Advanced tab Similarly it does not affect other actions such as question grouping that you perform on the Overview To Set Display Options In Display Options choose the setting you want to use and click Apply Previewing the Printed Questionnaire gt Choose File gt Print Preview A new browser window opens using IBM SPSS Data Collection Questionnaire Viewer to illustrate how the questionnaire will look when printed Refer to IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library for further information about Questionnaire Viewer This is available as a free download from http www spss com spssmr DDL Process Flowchart This flowchart summarizes the processes that run when you work on a questionnaire using Build and shows file movement between the Users Shared and Master folders Further explanation is provided below the flowchart 15 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Create new mdd in Users Figure 1 2 Build Process flowchart mdd in Users User Activates the questionnaire Activate Master to other interviewing servers Activation
281. ial Contact button to dial the participant s phone number you must click the End Call button to disconnect the modem after you finish the interview Figure 1 46 End Call button aa You might now be required to review the answers that you have just entered For more information see the topic Reviewing interviews on p 200 If your next number is not selected automatically click the Next Contact button to request another number Scheduling an appointment If the participant agrees to be interviewed later on choose the call outcome that lets you make an appointment For more information see the topic Making appointments on p 192 Enter the appointment time that the participant asks for and click Submit The appointment is made If you used the Dial Contact button to dial the participant s phone number you must click the End Call button to disconnect the modem after you make the appointment Figure 1 47 End Call button a If your next number is not selected automatically click the Next Contact button to request another number 190 Chapter 1 Other Outcomes For all other outcomes choose an appropriate call outcome from the list on the left of the screen Most call outcome texts are self explanatory but your supervisor will probably go through the list with you at the start of the project especially if the list contains specialized options If you used the Dial Contact button to dial the participant s ph
282. ialer this value must match the property collection that is added by the specific 3rd party dialer install kit RemoteTrunkGroup Identifies a particular ISDN trunk to support connecting remote interviewers and or supervisors This setting can be overridden in the sample management script Port The port number to use on the autodialer Status The worksheet does not need to include this column However to avoid having to manually connect to the autodialer after importing the dialer configuration file set the value to Active InternationalAccessCode The international access code that the autodialer should use to replace the plus at the start of international phone numbers If you enter an international access code that starts with one or more zeroes make sure that you format this column as Text so that the leading zeroes are preserved Positions worksheet You define each position on a separate row of the Positions worksheet The first row must contain the column headings A B 1 Position DialerName 2 Pos1 Dialer1 3 Pos2 Dialer1 4 Pos3 Dialer1 5 Pos4 Dialer1 6 Pos5 Dialer1 7 Pos6 Dialer1 8 Pos7 Dialer1 9 Pos8 Dialer1 10 Pos9 Dialer1 D E F RemoteTrunkGroup Extension Description AccessNumber E101 Interviewer Extension Pos1 E102 Interviewer Extension Pos2 remote Remote Interviewer Extension Pos3 15555555432 remote Remote Interviewer Extension Pos4 15555552345 manual Manual Station manual M
283. icipant records dialed Dials per hour Number of participant records dialed per hour Completes Total number of completed interviews Completes per hour Number of completed interviews per hour Appointments Total number of scheduled appointments Refusals Total number of refusals 239 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide m Refusal Rate Number of refusals the interviewer encountered tor the project divided by the number of potential respondents screened as defined in the denominator section for Incidence m Incidence As defined by CASRO Council of American Survey Research Organizations standards The calculation for net incidence Number of potential respondents screened and eligible or qualified who agree to participate divided by the number of potential respondents screened The numerator Number of potential respondents screened and eligible or qualified who agree to participate includes all contacts who have not been screened out by the screener section of the interview and who have not refused to participate The denominator Number of potential respondents screened includes all attempts made that resulted in contact with the respondent wherein the eligibility of the contact to participate can be evaluated Thus no answers hangups fax modem tritones not home busies are all excluded from this calculation In practice the numerator contains the respondents where the Screener
284. ick Edit T Delete x Download selected items a To select all records on the page use the top check box To download all pages click Download all pages ED Select records to display Display All Display Selection Participant Records The View tab consists of the Participants pane and the Participants Records table The Participants pane contains options for displaying all participant records or a selection of participant records For more information see the topic Displaying a Selection of Records on p 96 The Participants Records table displays the participant records See To Customize the View Tab below for more information about changing the number or order of the columns in the table Note that datetime columns are always shown in yyyy mm dd hh mi ss format Navigating the View Tab By default the View tab displays 50 records on each page At the lower left of each page the total number of records in the sample table and the total number of pages are shown The icons at the bottom of each page can be used to navigate between pages as shown in the following table Icon Description a4 Display the first page Display the previous page 1 2 3 Display page 1 page 2 page 3 and so on gt Display the next page gt gt Display the last page 95 To Customize the View Tab gt Select the View Settings tab ta paee View _J Participants Display Optio
285. ick Single or Multi as appropriate This changes all the individual response types in the Responses list to match the new question type as well as changing the overall data type for the question Applying and Undoing Changes to the Current Question Build automatically saves any changes you have made to the current question when the following events take place m When you move from the Edit Advanced or Presentation tab to another tab 67 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide m When you are working on the Edit Advanced or Presentation tab and you choose a question from the question list or you click Next or Previous When you click Insert Item or New List When you move group ungroup delete or paste questions on the Overview tab When you are working on the Advanced tab and you move add or delete responses subjects or elements in a grid or categorical question Build does not save changes in the following situations m When you choose an option from the menu For example when you leave Build or when you open a new questionnaire when one is already open m When you choose a picture for a response on the Advanced tab or when you choose a layout template on the Presentation tab Build provides Apply and Undo options on the Edit Advanced and Presentation tab for saving or undoing changes to the current question If you are working on any of these tabs you may want to save your changes manually before
286. ick to select the queues from which to copy records The default is to copy records from the FRESH queue only Click Activate to start the activation procedure During activation a progress dialog box tells you what the activation procedure is doing It s useful to watch these messages as they will help you locate problems if activation fails Promote Project attempts to create or update the schema definition of the sample table on the destination server so that it matches the schema of the table on the originating server If this is not possible perhaps because a field already exists in the destination table but with a different data type then Promote Project issues an error and you will have to choose a different table name The activation process checks that all interviewing servers have the same version of the ActivateServer dll component installed as is installed on the machine you are working on If it finds a mismatch activation fails at that point and you will have mismatched project files on the interviewing servers When this happens you may usually continue by manually copying the project files to the servers that have not been updated However the best solution is to ensure that all machines in the cluster are running the same version of IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server When activation is complete Promote Project displays the SPSS Activate dialog box giving URLs for running interviews on the destination server
287. ico City Monterrey Old Canada Central GMT 06 00 25 Standard Time Saskatchewan US Mountain GMT 07 00 15 Standard Time Arizona Mexico Standard GMT 07 00 13 Time 2 Chihuahua La Paz Mazatlan Old 137 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Setting Description Mountain Standard GMT 07 00 10 Time Mountain Time US Canada Mountain Standard GMT 07 00 2147483580 Time Mexico Chihuahua La Paz Mazatlan Pacific Standard GMT 08 00 4 Time Pacific Time US Canada Tijuana Pacific Standard GMT 08 00 2147483579 Time Mexico Tijuana Baja California Alaskan Standard GMT 09 00 3 Time Alaska Hawaiian Standard GMT 10 00 2 Time Hawaii Samoa Standard GMT 11 00 1 Time Midway Island Samoa Dateline Standard GMT 12 00 0 Time International Date Line West If you leave this field blank IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server will ignore time zones and calling times when selecting records for interviewers to call Use interviewer qualifications Whether or not to assign calls to interviewers based on interviewer qualifications For example if the participant s native language is Spanish then assign the call to a Spanish speaking interviewer The Parameters tab lists the current settings for the project 138 Chapter 1 Ste Site Manage Phone Survey Project Id UPLOADSAMPLE Pro
288. ics Overall Disposition Across Projects Queue Status Queue Status by Time Zone Review Calls Sample Usage Sample Usage Across Projects Time Zone Status Note that all reports display counts and percentages that are zero as a hyphen and counts and percentages that are rounded to zero as an asterisk Reports will include charts only if you have enabled the charting feature in IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server For more information see the topic Running Reports on p 253 The rest of this topic describes the reports in detail Answer Time Distribution For projects that use an autodialer this report shows a frequency table of the time taken by participants to answer calls The categories are one second to 20 seconds in one second intervals with an additional category for durations greater than 20 seconds Each cell shows a count a column percentage and cumulative column percentage You might want to use the statistics in this report to adjust the minimum length of time that an unanswered phone call must ring before the autodialer terminates the call However your local laws might specify the minimum value that you must use For more information search the Phone Surveys activity help file for the topic Autodialer Settings Note that this report always includes data for both real and test interviews you cannot choose to include only one or the other For projects that do not use an autodialer selecting this r
289. id responses Presentation tab Displays presentation details about a single question Work on this tab when you want to define how the question should appear on the screen or on the printed page 12 Chapter 7 Export Analysis tab Displays export values for a question including the label text and category values response codes Use this tab when you want to export the questionnaire for analysis purposes but do not want to use the default texts and response codes On all tabs if you hover over a question name in the list of questions on the left of the page Build displays a pop up showing the question text The menu bar at the top of the screen contains the following options File Create open or save questionnaires and preview them before printing Tools Activate a questionnaire and set Build options Getting Started When you open an empty questionnaire follow the instructions below to define the content of the questionnaire Note These instructions assume that you will define each question in full before inserting the next question If you prefer you can define the basics for every question using just the Edit tab and then fill in the Advanced and Presentation details for each question as a second phase of the questionnaire development Click Click here to insert first item This opens the New Item dialog box Choose the item type for the first question and click OK Build selects the Edit tab and displays a fo
290. iews apart from those that have a completed status Building Filters Build Filter opens a new window in which you select the variables and values that cases must match in order to be included in the tables Build Filter A filter specification consists of three things a variable name a logic operator and a value or set of values The logic operators and the prompt for a response or value vary according to the type of variable you select You can define filters based on one or more variables If the filter is based on more than variable you can choose whether the individual filters are combined using And or Or logic As you build the filter the Filter Expression panel at the bottom of the window displays the filter text that will appear on the table To Build a Filter 225 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide gt Select Actions gt Build Filter This opens the Build Filter window gt Inthe Variable List select a variable that you want to use as a filter Survey Results draws the Build Filter section of the window to suit the type of variable you have chosen gt In the Logic box select a filter operator gt In the Respondent s box select or enter the response or value that is to be used as the filter As you select responses the Filter Expression is updated to show the filter condition to be applied gt Click Apply to close the filter and apply it to the current table Alternatively clic
291. if the call is not answered the autodialer will not do this for you and the call will not be terminated until you do so m There are technical problems In this situation the relevant call outcome might be pre selected but if not your supervisor should tell you which call outcome to use If you are working on a project where participants speak different languages you will normally receive only records for participants whose language you speak If it does happen that you are unable to communicate effectively with the participant select either the Language barrier or the Language recall call outcome your supervisor should tell you which one to use Some call outcomes such as Abandoned should be used only after the interview has started It is important that you choose the most appropriate option from the list as this information will be used to plan future projects If you accidentally select the wrong call outcome let your supervisor know immediately so that it can be corrected Using manual dialing or a modem to make calls If the project that you are working on does not use an autodialer you will need to dial phone numbers manually For projects that use an autodialer you might still need to dial numbers manually if your supervisor wants you to do so However if there is a modem connected to your computer you might be able to use the modem to dial phone numbers When you request a number to dial the number and othe
292. il your screen is refreshed for example when you change tabs At this point Build also displays a message telling you that it has added No Answer If you set this option to Yes and then edit the question later on and change this option to No Build does not automatically remove No Answer If you want to disallow No Answer response you must delete it yourself gt In Hide this question choose No if the question should be displayed to the respondent If this is a dummy question that is to exist in the questionnaire but not be displayed to respondents choose Yes Typically the responses to hidden questions are set by statements defined in IOM Script items They provide an efficient method of merging the responses to a number of related questions 34 Chapter 1 into a single variable for use elsewhere in the questionnaire For this reason the response list for the hidden question often consists of all the responses to the questions that are to be merged Note Because they are not displayed hidden questions are not valid in question groups In Grid Variable Name enter a name for this question within the grid item as a whole The default is GVnumber so if the item name is Q5 the first line of code generated for this item will be labelled Q5 whereas the question itself will be labelled GVnumber In Grid Layout choose how the grid will be structured Choose Arrange subjects in columns to have the subjects as the columns and the r
293. iles subfolder DefaultTemplate htm is the default presentation template and DefaultTemplate htm_Files contains the files that the default template uses in this case the default grid template DefaultGridTemplate xml When you create a shared template that uses other templates stylesheets or images you will need to create the 4tm_Files folder in the Templates folder and copy all the files that the template uses into that folder When a questionnaire designer uses a shared template Build looks for an associated htm_Files folder for that template and copies the contents of that folder into the project folder with the chosen template file Build also recognizes templates that are available only to users belonging to a particular role These templates are stored in FMRoot Roles RoleName Templates for example FMRoot Roles SWGroup1 Templates for templates available only to members of the SWGroup1 role These Templates folders are the same as the shared Templates folder in all respects Copying Questionnaires that use Templates to the Library If you copy a questionnaire to the library and that questionnaire uses templates you must also copy the templates and any files that are used by the templates into a subfolder within the library Later versions of Build will do this for you The name and location of the subfolder depend on the name and location of the questionnaire in the library The subfolder for templates used by a questionnaire must
294. ime ASC Fresh SortId ASC Time out ReturnTime ASC Stopped ReturnTime ASC Transfer to web ReturnTime ASC Recall ReturnTime ASC Order Weight Defines the ordering of records by field in each queue gt Select either Order or Weight gt Select the appropriate field from the drop down menu gt Click Add Field Order Weight to open the Field Order dialog The dialog allows you to define how record fields are ordered For more information see the topic Field Order Dialog on p 140 Order records by The table displays the user defined record order Before performing any of the following tasks you must first select a field row from the table gt You can use the Up and Down buttons to reorder the Order records by list C 1 11 140 Chapter 1 gt Click the Edit record order by field button to open the Field Order dialog and edit existing field order definitions Figure 1 12 Click the Delete field order button to delete existing field order definitions Figure 1 13 x Prioritize recalls over fresh Allows you to specify the frequency in which recalls to busy and other unanswered calls take priority over calls to new numbers Specify a percentage to check the RECALL queue before the FRESH queue For example specifying a value of 25 would result in the RECALL queue being checked before the FRESH queue for one in four calls The default value is 90 Note Prioritizing recalls to less than 100 is the best option
295. in call log To determine the reliability of a given max setting for the AMD call dispositions make a frequency distribution of the call outcomes according to the following table Interviewer s Disposition AMD ReportedgreetValue 166 Chapter 1 greet 0 greet lt max greet gt max Human proceed appointment refusal and so on False positive M Correct human False positive Answering machine Semi correct AM 2 False negative Correct AM 1 greet 0 can be an artifact from using a too small coff value such that the AMD measurement was abandoned before the greeting started 2 greet 0 starts playback of amfile but possibly too early before the answering machine is ready to record it Summary of AMD Modes and Parameters Syntax mode param value param2 value2 Example amd 1 qgoff 0 40 log 1 Mode Meaning Description 0 Disabled No AMD analysis but the Call Progress parameter cp is used 1 Filtering Only live calls are through connected to an interviewer otherwise the amfile is played 2 Calibration Calls are connected in listen only mode during AMD analysis the result is reported in greet Name Default Unit Description Action if exceeded Applies to off 6 0 seconds Max silence at start of Hangup Filtering call QSAMP_NO_AUDIO coff 4 5 seconds Max
296. in range Boolean Questions Boolean questions require participants to answer by saying yes or no or true or false For some boolean questions you have to select from one of two options for example Yes wants to subscribe and No doesn t want to subscribe For other boolean questions there might be just a single option that you should select if the participant says yes or true To select an answer to a boolean question use one of the following methods m For interviews that require the keyboard only If two answers are shown press the number key either 1 or 2 that corresponds to the appropriate answer If only one answer is shown press 1 only if the participant answers yes or true m For interviews that use the mouse If the answer consists of two radio buttons click the appropriate radio button If the answer consists of a single check box click the check box only if the participant answers yes or true 210 Chapter 7 Special Responses Sometimes a numeric text date time or boolean question might include one or more special responses that you can select when the participant cannot or does not want to answer the question For example you might be able to select a special response that says Don t know or Refuse to answer To select a special response use one of the following methods m For interviews that require the keyboard only
297. ine the question you want to route to before you can select it from the dropdown list To associate a picture with a response do the following m Click the button to the right of the Picture box for that response m On the Select page locate the image file and then click Select For more information see the topic Copying Pictures and Presentation Templates on p 50 The name of the image file is displayed in the Picture box 21 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide gt You can add new responses to the list delete responses or alter the order of responses in the list using the options above the response list For more information see the topic Editing Response and Subject Lists on p 65 To Set Presentation Options gt Select the Presentation tab Overview Edt Advanced f Primary Language English United States O gender Apply Undo Page Presentation Style B Question Number of Columns Presentation Check Box o O E Dropdown Box ListBox Insert Item gt In Presentation Style select a layout template m Click the button next to the empty box m On the Select page locate the template file and click Select For more information see the topic Copying Pictures and Presentation Templates on p 50 The filename appears in the Presentation Style box gt In Number of Columns type the number of columns in which to display responses during th
298. ing m Define additional default call outcomes so that you no longer need to add them to every project m Change the mapping of autodialer status codes returned by the autodialer at the end of every call to call outcomes This is not relevant if your projects don t use an autodialer For more information see the topic Changing the Default Settings on p 169 Interview Settings On the Interview Settings tab you can define the following m Whether an autodialer is used to dial phone numbers or whether interviewers must dial numbers manually or can use modems to dial numbers m Whether interviewers can retrieve specific participants 154 Chapter 7 m Whether the interviewing program should select an interviewer s next contact automatically or whether interviewers should click a button to request their next contact m Whether interviewers can still start a survey after they have been disconnected from a call This option is only available when an IBM SPSS Data Collection Dialer option is selected m Whether interviewers should be prompted to select their qualifications at the start of each session m Whether supervisors can monitor and record interviewers and if so whether interviewers must obtain consent for monitoring and recording from each participant m Whether interviewers must review completed interviews and if so whether the review starts automatically and whether it includes all questions or o
299. ing GMT 05 00 Islamabad Karachi Tashkent Dialing GMT 05 30 Chennai Kolkata Mumbai New Delhi Dialing GMT 05 30 Sri Jayawardenepura Dialing GMT 05 45 Kathmandu Dialing GMT 06 00 Almaty Novosibirsk Dialing GMT 06 00 Astana Dhaka Dialing GMT 06 30 Yangon Rangoon Dialing GMT 07 00 Bangkok Hanoi Jakarta Dialing GMT 07 00 Krasnoyarsk Dialing GMT 08 00 Beijing Chongqing Hong Kong Urumqi Dialing GMT 08 00 Irkutsk Ulaan Bataar Dialing GMT 08 00 Kuala Lumpur Singapore Dialing GMT 08 00 Perth Dialing GMT 08 00 Taipei Dialin Notes You can customize many of the reports listed above or even add your own reports to the Phone activity For more information use the search function in the Data Collection Developer Library documentation to search for the text Customized Telephone Interviewing CATT Reports and in the search results open the topic with that title Instead of using the Phone activity you can produce all of the reports listed above by running a IBM SPSS Data Collection script The script is called RunAllPhoneReports mrs which by default is installed by the DDL in the INSTALL_FOLDER IBM SPSS DataCollection 6 DDL Scripts General mrScriptBasic folder By editing a parameter in the script you can select any of the following report formats HTML Microsoft Excel Microsoft Powerpoint Microsoft Word delimited text csv file You can also specify a date range for those reports that
300. ing on allows you to specify your interviewer qualifications you can use this button to set the interviewer qualifications If the project you are working Alt R on includes a reviewing phase you can use this button in the reviewing phase to reject the interview 182 Chapter 1 Note For some browsers pressing the keyboard shortcut alone will perform the action For other browsers you might have to press Enter after pressing the keyboard shortcut If you are using an autodialer and the project has been set up to select the next contact as soon as you end your current call you will see a checked Auto contact selection check box below the button frame Cancel it If you do not you will not be able to stop the dialer providing you connections Below the buttons the possible call outcomes for this project are listed This list will generally be standard across all the projects that you work on if there are variations your supervisor will tell you Nevertheless it is a good idea to familiarize yourself with the call outcome list at the start of each project Many call outcomes can be selected using keyboard shortcuts as shown in the following table Note that the standard name of each call outcome is shown below the names you see might be slightly different Call Outcome Keyboard Shortcut see note below this table Abandoned Alt Z Answering machine Alt M Appo
301. interviews 200 setting changing interviewer qualifications 183 single choice answers 196 starting 177 terminating interviews part way through 200 345 Phone Reports for IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server projects 230 Phone Surveys activity features 168 answering machine detection 163 Appointments tab 145 autodialer settings 159 autodialer status codes mapping to call outcomes 169 automatically select next contact 153 call outcomes 150 call outcomes adding to default settings 169 call times 142 change participant database 129 controlling access to features of 168 default settings changing 169 defining Sample Management parameters 131 dialer settings 159 display sample fields on interview page 129 elapse times for automatic soft appointments 131 fields 129 fields adding to default settings 169 interview settings 153 interviewer stations 159 interviewers can select qualifications 153 introductory text 153 maximum number of retries 131 monitoring interviewers 153 Ordering tab 139 Overrides tab 149 overview 128 parameters 131 positions 159 prioritizing automatic soft appointments 131 required sample fields 129 retrieving specific participants 153 reviewing interviews 153 sample fields changeable by interviewers 129 starting 128 using an autodialer 153 using modems to dial phone numbers 153 Pictures downloading from project folder 50 for grid responses subjects 32 3
302. intment Alt P Business Alt U Busy Alt B Cell phone Alt J Dialer Busy Alt 2 Disconnected Altt K Fast Busy Alt 3 Fax Alt Y Language barrier Alt O Language recall Alt L Network busy Alt 4 No answer Alt 1 one Not Available Alt 5 Refused Alt R Rejected Alt 6 Transfer to web Alt Q Wrong number Alt W Note For some browsers pressing the keyboard shortcut alone will perform the action For other browsers you might have to press Enter after pressing the keyboard shortcut If you see more call outcomes than appear in the above table the next eight call outcomes in the list are assigned keyboard shortcuts from Alt 2 to Alt 9 Any further call outcomes will not have a keyboard shortcut You can find out what the keyboard shortcut is for any call outcome by moving the mouse pointer over the call outcome The keyboard shortcut will then be displayed in a ToolTip 183 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide The top left corner of the screen A image in the top left corner of the screen shows the current interview status Status Image Description Displays when working in manual dialing or modem dialing mode and indicates that the interviewer is currently not connected to a participant and an interview is not running Displays when working in autodialing mode and indicates that the interviewer is currently not connected to a participant and an interview is not running Indicates
303. ion To Switch On the View Log Facility gt In Windows Explorer browse to Inetpub wwwroot SPSSMR InterviewReporter gt Right click Default aspx and choose Properties from the pop up menu gt On the Properties dialog box cancel the Read only attribute and click OK gt Edit Default aspx using a text editor such as Notepad and change the setting for LoggingEnabled from False to True gt Save your changes To View the Log File gt Select Actions gt View Log To Refresh the Log File gt View the log file and click Refresh To Clear the Log File gt View the log file and click Clear Troubleshooting Boxes Instead of Element Texts on the Build Filter Window Windows 2000 uses codepages to determine how to display characters in different languages The codepages for each language or language type are different and characters that appear in one codepage may not be present in another codepage For example a Western European codepage may not have all the characters that are required for displaying Japanese texts 230 Chapter 1 Your computer is set up with a default codepage that corresponds to the language in which you normally work For example if your normal language is English your default codepage will probably be the Western European codepage Survey Results HTML pages are encoded using UTF 8 encoding which in most cases causes any characters that are not on the default codepage to be displayed correctly Howe
304. ion For more information search the JBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Installation Instructions for the topic Things You Must Do on Local Machines If a station has access to more than one modem you can specify which one to use for more information use the search function in the Data Collection Developer Library documentation to search for the text Settings for the Phone Participants Activity and in the search results open the topic with that title 156 Chapter 1 If you select the option to use modems the project cannot use an autodialer Interviewers will still be able to dial numbers manually if they have access to a telephone keypad The modem option works only on Microsoft Windows computers Dialing Phone Numbers Manually To specify that interviewers must always dial phone numbers manually select Manual Interviewer dials numbers manually from the Dialing Options drop down list Interviewers should then manually dial the phone number displayed on the main screen of the Phone Participants activity If you select the option to dial phone numbers manually the project cannot use an autodialer or modems Letting Interviewers Choose Their Qualifications Interviewer qualifications control which sample records are allocated to each interviewer and are a good way of making the best use of your interviewers skills There are two ways of assigning qualifications to interviewers which can be used togethe
305. ion regarding csv files All downloaded csv files are encoded in 8 bit Unicode Transformation Format UTF 8 As such you must ensure that whichever tool you choose to open the encoded files is UTF 8 compliant Warning Downloading a very large number of participant records might affect the performance of IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server For more information see the topic Participant File Format on p 81 To Download All Records On the View tab click the Download All icon in the top right corner of the list of records as shown below When prompted choose whether to open the text file in the associated program or save it to the location of your choice To Download a Selection of Records On the View tab select the check box on the left of the record or records that you want to download Alternatively if you want to download all the records on the page select the check box on the left of the field names 107 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide gt Click the Download icon in the top right corner of the list of records as shown below gt When prompted choose whether to open the text file in the associated program or save it to the location of your choice Note When downloading a selection of records you cannot download more than the maximum number of records that can be included in a single page on the View tab By default this is 1000 records which is the largest value that can be
306. ions one for each characteristic So a quota for young men will consist of two sub expressions one for male respondents and the other for young respondents The two sub expressions will be linked by an operator that tells the quota system that respondents should be included in the quota only if they have both characteristics All women and men who are not young will be excluded from the quota 319 IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup Note Although each expression has a unique name they are normally stored as a single group under one title This means that the scriptwriter will not be able to choose to check some Expression Quotas but not others as is possible with Table Quotas Expression Quotas based on Sample Management variables are stored separately from Expression Quotas based on variables that are present in the script The default title for Expression Quotas for script data is Expressions whereas the default title for Expression Quotas for Sample Management data is tablename_sm Expressions where tablename is the name of the sample table in the sample database When you choose a variable for quotas IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup displays a Filter On dialog box that prompts you for the information required to create a quota for that type of variable The content of the dialog box varies according to the variable type Filter on Categorical Variable Dialog Box Figure 2 3 Filter on Categorical Variable dialog box Filter
307. ionxage A New As you build the quota table IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup prepares a grid in which you can enter the targets and other settings for the various cells Note Table Quotas are available for script variables only If you are defining quotas for Sample Management variables you must define them as Expression Quotas 316 Chapter 2 Defining Table Quotas gt gt gt gt In the List Pane choose one of the variables that forms part of the quota you are defining and drag it onto one of the drop lines in the Quota Construction Area You will know when you have the variable in the right place because the drop line will turn pink The variable s name and categories appear on the drop line and an empty grid appears in which to define the targets If you are defining a two dimensional quota drag the second variable from the List Pane into the Quota Construction Area but this time drop it on the other line The variable s name and categories appear on the drop line and additional cells are added to the target grid If you are defining a quota with more than two dimensions drag the additional variables to the appropriate positions relative to the other variables in the grid You can place the new variables above below and to the left or right of existing variables but in the context of defining quotas the most logical positions are above or below the top variable and to the left or right of t
308. ious interview Idle Time The time elapsed since the interviewer last submitted a page either by retrieving the next contact or pressing Next for an interview Interviewer ID The interviewer s IBM SPSS Data Collection user name Interview Time The time since the current interview was started If the interview has been restarted the time shown is that since the restart Is Monitored Whether the interview is monitored Is Review Whether the interview is reviewed Monitoring Allowed Whether the participant has given his or her consent to be monitored Off Hook Whether the interviewer s telephone is off hook This information is shown only if the interviewer is using an autodialer to make calls 276 Chapter 1 Customizing the Real Time Display Column Name Description Phone The extension number used at the telephone interviewer station This information is shown only if the interviewer is using an autodialer to make calls Position The position name for the telephone interviewer station This information is shown only if the interviewer is using an autodialer to make calls Positions prefixed with an R indicate a remote interviewer Access Number The telephone number of the remote interviewer The value is blank for local interviewers Question Time Project ID The Data Collection project name Project Type The value
309. ire completed activation This is the time as reported by the Interviewer Server m Status The project activation status pending processing success or failed Test Link The URL for the activated test questionnaire Link The URL for the activated live questionnaire gt You can click the refresh icon to update the activation status i Um Removing pending activations Select the appropriate project from the Pending Activations list gt Click the delete icon to remove the selected project from the Pending Activations list x Note You cannot remove activations initiated by other users You can only remove your own activations Filters Tab The Filters tab provides options for defining how activations are displayed on the Activation History tab Activation type Displays the status for the current activation When applicable the drop down list allows you to select which activation types display on the Activation History tab Options include m All m Activate the activation history for activations submitted via the IBM SPSS Data Collection Activation Console m Launch the activation history for activations submitted via the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server s Launch activity m Promote the activation history for activations submitted via the Interviewer Server s Promote Project activity Activation history The drop down list allows you to select which activations
310. is always Data Collection Question ID The name of the current question The time spent by the interviewer on the current question Interviewer Status An icon displays whether the interviewer s status is Idle Waiting Connected or Disconnected Last Call Outcome The outcome of the last call completed by the interviewer for example Refused or Completed Refused The number of times the interviewer has selected the Refused call outcome since last opening the Phone Participants activity Session Time The time since the interviewer last opened the Phone Participants activity Try Count The number of interviews completed plus the number of times that the interviewer selected a call outcome since last opening the Phone Participants activity This figure does not include participant records that the interviewer returned to the Sample Management system by clicking the Cancel Contact button Wait Time For an interviewer waiting to be connected to a participant the time since the interviewer clicked the Start Dialing button This information is shown only if the interviewer is using an autodialer to make calls You can customize the following aspects of the Interviewers Real Time display m The number of interviewer records that appear on each page By default all the records are shown on a single page and you might have to use the scroll bar excessively to see all the r
311. is includes null and silent null responses Is not blank empty The quota is for respondents whose answers contain any text at all Next Click to add another variable to the expression Finish Click to close the dialog box Cancel Click to close the dialog box and cancel the expression Filter on Boolean Variable Dialog Box Figure 2 6 Filter on Boolean Variable dialog box Filter on Boolean Variable Create the filter and press the Finish button If you want to filter on more variables press the Next button Filter on the boolean variable EEn zj Include cases where boolean value is True had mnidfern Finish Cancel Help You can define expressions that are based on the values in boolean variables A boolean variable can contain only one of two values true or false Filter on the boolean variable Displays the variable that you dragged onto the Expression Quotas tab To use a different variable click the arrow and choose another from the drop down list 323 IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup Include cases where the Boolean value is Choose whether you want the quota to count true or false values Next Click to add the values or categories from another variable to the expression Finish Click to close the dialog box Cancel Click to close the dialog box and cancel the expression Filter on New Variable Dialog Box Figure 2 7 Filter on New Variable dialog box Filter on New
312. is to be activated The information required is as follows Launch Notes Background information about the project that you want to save in the project database for reference by other users You can leave this box blank Status The project s status One of the following m Test The project is available for testing but any data collected will be flagged as test data m Active The project is available for live interviewing m Inactive The project cannot be used for test or live interviewing Project Expiry UTC Time Provides options for specifying a project expiration time m Date The project expiration date You can manually enter a date in the format mm dd yyyy or you can click the down arrow to display a calendar and select a date m Time The project expiration time This indicates the exact time of day for the selected date that the project will expire Enter an appropriate time in the 24 hour format hh mm for example 17 00 for 5 00 PM Launch Subfolders Select this option if the project s folder contains localization subfolders that must be copied to the Shared and Master project folders along with the main project files 110 Chapter 7 Cluster The cluster on which to activate the project If you are activating a project that has already been activated for example if you have changed and recompiled the questionnaire you must activate it on the same cluster as you used before Project Database The nam
313. istory tab 2 2 0 cette teens 334 Filters ha Dees isara unionas ase Ne En cee i aa RE dent ana EN E e EASE a aS DEAE a tice ees EEN 336 Settings tab eiid aai ded he hel ode Ugalde dean E ETA weed ae EOAR a E A a AEE BOR eee a 337 Appendix A Notices Index 338 341 Chapter L IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Users Guide Welcome to the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide This User s Guide describes how to use IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server and its associated applications to build and run Web based interviewing questionnaires It consists of the following sections IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Describes how to use the various activities that Activities in IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Interviewer Server makes available through Server Administration IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration The description of each activity is based on the online help that is available by clicking on the activity s Help button but it will often provide additional background information pictures or links to other sections of the User s Guide Desktop Tools Describes programs that are not part of Interviewer Server Administration but that are available from your desktop either as shortcuts in the Start menu or as commands that you can run from the command line What s New in IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Serv
314. ivations Note In general you are limited to viewing only your activations Activation Report Displays the status for each activation request Pending Activations The following information is provided m Project The project name as it appears in IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration Status The project activation status pending processing success or failed Server The name of the server to which the questionnaire is being activated User The name of the user who initiated the activation Submitted The time at which the questionnaire was submitted for activation This is the time as reported by the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Completed Activations The following information is provided m Project The project name as it appears in Interviewer Server Administration m User The name of the user who initiated the activation m Server The name of the server to which the questionnaire is being activated E ProcessingServer The server that performs the activation In a cluster environment the server to which an activation is submitted is not necessarily the server that performs the activation 303 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide m StartTime The time at which the questionnaire was submitted for activation This is the time as reported by the Interviewer Server m EndTime The time at which the questionna
315. ized Web pages for standard events such as starting and stopping an interview There are seven customizable pages of which five have defaults You can find the default files in the INSTALL _FOLDER IBM SPSS DataCollection 6 Interviewer Server Server mrIWeb Templates folder Authentication Page The page to display when a project uses Sample Management and you need to verify that the person taking the interview is a member of the participant group The default is a template called authenticate htm that displays the message Please enter your authentication information Authentication Failed Page The page to display when authentication fails The default is a template called authfailed htm that displays the message Your authentication information is incorrect Authentication Retry Page The page to display when authentication of a prospective participant against the participant database fails and you want the participant to re enter the authentication details The default page is a template called authretry htm that displays the message The authentication information you have entered is incorrect Please try again 115 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Completed Interview Page The page to display at the end of the interview that is when the participant has answered all relevant questions in the questionnaire There is no default page but IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server itself di
316. ject Name UploadSample Description Sample options Time in minutes to wait before retrying sample No answer delay Busy delay Answer machine delay Web callback delay Reject delay Silent appointment Time before after scheduled event when sample can be retried No preference for appointments Before an appointment by any interviewer O Give preference to the interviewer who arranged the appointment Before an appointment by the arranger only After an appointment by any interviewer Before a recall Time zones Use these time zones Participant filtering Interviewer qualifications You set these parameters at the start of the project and can change them throughout the interviewing period to match the current requirements of the survey For example if it is the last day of the survey and you are running low on new participants you might want to increase the maximum number of times that numbers may be called You might also wish to reduce the elapse times for automatically set appointments so that numbers with callbacks become available for recall more quickly To Define Sample Management Parameters Select the Parameters tab In Use these Time Zones enter the time zones in which the participants for this project are located If participants are located in more than one zone separate the zone numbers with semicolons Replace any of the def
317. k And gt gt or Or gt gt to define an additional filter Filtering on a Single Response Variable Logic operators for single response variables are as follows m Any of these Only cases that contain one of the selected answers m None of these Only cases that contain none of the selected answers Choose an operator and then select one or more filter responses from the list of available responses Filtering on a Multiple Response Variable Logic operators for multiple response variables are as follows All of these Only cases that have all of the selected answers m Any of these Cases that contain one or more of the selected answers m None of these Only cases that contain none of the selected answers a Exactly these Only cases that have the selected answers and no others Choose an operator and select one or more filter responses from the list of available responses Filtering on a Numeric Variable Logic operators for numeric variables are Less than Greater than Equal to Not equal to Less than or equal to Greater than or equal to 226 Chapter 1 Choose an operator and enter the value with which to compare the data Filtering on a Text Variable Logic operators for text variables are Contains Does not contain Is exactly Begins with Ends with Is blank empty If you choose any operator other than Zs blank empty you must enter a text to be used as a filter All operators except Ends
318. l You can remove an autodialer from the Dialer Administration activity Before you do this be aware of the following m Ifyou need to restore an autodialer after removing it you must import a dialer configuration file that contains an entry for that autodialer m When you remove an autodialer all positions specified for that autodialer are also removed To continue to use autodialing at those positions you must associate them with another autodialer For more information see the topic Creating a dialer configuration file on p 284 m You cannot remove an existing autodialer by deleting its entry from a dialer configuration file and importing that file Instead follow the steps below to remove an autodialer Removing an autodialer gt Inthe Real Time display select the check box on the left of the autodialer that you want to remove Only select an autodialer if its current state is Stopped or Failed gt Click the Delete button as shown below The real time display is refreshed and the autodialer is no longer shown Closing Dialer Administration gt On the main screen click the Exit button as shown below Dialer certification Marketing Systems Group Pro T S dialer Table 1 1 Marketing Systems Group Pro T S dialer certification Feature Status Comments Power Dialing Passed Group Dialing Passed Dialer Administration Passed Phonelnterviewing Login Passed Call Outcomes Passed Dia
319. lds will be created to match the original table Copy participants records APPOINTMENT RECALL UNUSABLE From queues If the project already exists on the destination server a message explaining this is displayed at the top of the dialog box You may continue activation and overwrite the existing project files or cancel it leaving the existing project files intact gt In Status after activation select the status that the project will have once it has been activated gt In Activate notes type any notes you want to make about this activation gt In Groups Roles select the roles that will have access to the project on the destination server If the project already exists on that server the check boxes show the current permissions for that project on that server If it does not Promote Project selects the roles that have access to the project on the originating server gt Select Promote Subfolders to indicate whether subfolders will be promoted with the project files This option is enabled by default Turning this option off should only be done if the project does not require subfolders or if the project already exists and the subfolder content has not changed gt Ifthe project has participant records that you want to copy as part of the activation procedure use the boxes in the Participants frame to specify where the records can be found and where they 121 Email IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server
320. lected number of participants and enter the number of participants you want to email in the box provided m Click First x to select respondents from the top of the list of those matching the selection criteria or Randomly selected to choose respondents from the list at random gt Ifappropriate select This message can be sent to the same participant more than once Note This option is available only if you chose to save the date and time at which the message was sent Email displays the name of the field that will be used for checking whether mail has 127 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide been sent before it is the same as the field that you chose in Write to sample field named on the Email text tab gt Click OK The jobs list is updated with the job you have just defined Running an Email Job gt Inthe Email jobs list click Send now for the job you want to run The Send Mail dialog box reports the job s progress Naming a User for Test and Problem Messages When you test an email project Email always sends the message to a single specified user This user is also the recipient of any emails that are generated if there are errors while an email job is running You define this user on the Email jobs list page so that the same name can be used for all jobs belonging to the project gt In the text box at the foot of the Email jobs list type the email address of the user who is to receive test
321. ler Settings Passed Interviewer Qualification Passed Review Audio Passed Answering Machine Detection Passed VoIP Passed Phone Reports Passed Remote Mode Passed Fail Over Passed 292 Chapter 1 Feature Status Comments Load Test Passed 50 concurrent interviews Benchmark N A The Marketing Systems Group Pro T S dialer group dialing load test with 50 concurrent interviews details are provided below m Server version IBM SPSS Data Collection Server 6 Patch 1 Marketing Systems Group Pro T S installation kit Beta version 3 Concurrent interviews 50 m Loading mode interview per 5 seconds Duration 120 minutes m Project Multimode Dialing mode Marketing Systems Group Pro T S group dialing m Dialer status Marketing Systems Group Pro T S demo dialer 50 local extensions and 10 remote extensions Table 1 2 Timing results Timing Max Average Time to login to IBM SPSS Data Collection 1 065672 0 8497719 Interviewer Server Administration Time to start Phone Participants 2 019375 1 716981 Wait time 22 7458 3 140847 Time to start interview 6 714832 0 2868351 Sytel dialer Table 1 3 Sytel dialer certification Feature Status Comments Power Dialing Passed Group Dialing Passed Dialer Administration Passed Phonelnterviewing Login Passed Call Outcomes Passed Dialer Settings Passed Interviewer Qu
322. ller identification and clear Phone number to send or set the value to a string that specifies the value of Phone number to send If specified the string must contain only the digits 0 to 9 and the following characters and The installation value is True Dialer Settings Error if login position is not in configuration DefaultCatiProjectPrdpeiseRositionError True or False The installation value is False Dialer Settings Ring time DefaultCatiProjectPrdserkieswerTimeout The number of seconds The installation value is 15 Do not set a value lower than that for MinimumRingTime below gt gt 176 Chapter 7 vy vyv vy Vy Vy y y corresponding setting in Phone Surveys but the MinimumRingTime property defines the minimum value that can be specified in the Ring time setting Tab Name Tab Setting Corresponding Corresponding Valid Values DPM Collection DPM Property Dialer Settings There is no Properties MinimumRingTime The minimum value that can be set in Ring time The installation value is 0 Dialer Settings Name of silent call announcement file DefaultCatiProjectPropdenes all A udioFile The name of a wav file including the full path The installation value is an empty string Dialer Settings The number of seconds that auto dialing should continue trying
323. load participants Whether the Upload Required Fields and Additional Fields tabs are visible Can view participants Whether the View and View Settings tabs are visible Can view summary Whether the Summary tab is visible By default the CATISupervisor role is assigned to all the activity features shown above apart from Can advanced edit participants Can create databases and Can delete participants For more information about activity features search the Interviewer Server Administration User s Guide for the topic Assigning Users or Roles to Activity Features Launch You use Launch to activate a compiled questionnaire so it can be used for interviewing This involves defining the location of participant records for the project naming the quota file if the project uses quota control and defining which Web pages to use for standard items such as the start and end of an interview You can run Launch from within Build or you can run it separately by selecting it from IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration Starting Launch gt Select the project you want to activate and click Launch 109 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Project Information tives Project Id TOTALAWARENESS Project Name TotalAwareness Description Please select the launch options you require The Project Info tab is where you enter general information about the project and where and how it
324. log x Routing Items o O Single Response Question m Multiple Response Question B Numeric Question A Text Question B O Display Text E 0 Single Response Grid E 0 Multiple Response Grid E Numeric Grid gt Choose Text and click OK 27 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Project holidays serene User BARBARA Primary Language English United States H Quest6 Apply Undo Quest6 Insert tem gt In Name optionally replace the default item name with a name of your choice gt In Question Text type the text of the question To Set Advanced Options gt Select the Advanced tab 28 Chapter 7 gt Project holidays a a User BARBARA Primary Language English United States E Name Apply Undo Question Text What is your name Properties Require a response to this question Yes gt Hide this question No v Special Responses ctions on left side to enable or disable the special responses below l Next zj T No Answer Next zj T Refuse to answer Next z Previous Insert Item In Require a response to this question choose whether or not this question must be answered Note If a question may be left unanswered and you do not insert a No Answer response in the category list Build inserts one automatically This is because the interview script that is generated from the Build questionnaire requires this in order
325. low Respondent Gender Matches any In the Interviewer Position field enter the position name that your supervisor has given you and click OK For some projects your supervisor might want you to dial phone numbers manually even though autodialers are available If so a message will inform you that you must use manual dialing to call participants Remote Interviewers When the Position is defined as a remote position in the dialer configuration file the following dialog is displayed Figure 1 36 Position dialog box for remote interviewers Specify your position details in the field s below Interviewer Position R911 Interviewer Access Number Select your interviewer qualifications below Respondent Gender Matches any 179 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide In the Interviewer Access Number field enter the telephone number for the remote interviewer and click OK The Phone Participants main screen The main screen has four sections along the top on the left in the top left corner and in the center Figure 1 37 Phone Participants main screen Introduction to Survey Good morning afternoon My name is lt your name gt 1 am calling on behalf of lt your company gt Would you mind answering a few questions on lt your survey topic gt It will take around lt average number of minutes gt minutes For quality assurance this phon
326. lows Design Activities Build for defining a questionnaire View Survey Link This activity simply displays a message box listing URLs for running live and test interviews Select the test link to test your questionnaire This opens a new browser window and runs an interview in the same way that a respondent would run an interview There is no menu bar and no online help Manage Activities Launch for preparing projects for interviewing Promote Project for activating a project from one cluster to another Participants for loading participant records into the participant database Participant Rules for editing Sample Management scripts Email for sending email messages to respondents Phone Surveys for defining parameters required for telephone interviewing Review Interviews for reviewing telephone interviews after they have finished Interviewer Monitoring for real time monitoring of telephone interviewers This activity is available from the Phone menu Dialer Administration for using autodialers with your telephone interviewing projects This activity is available from the Phone menu Quotas for checking quotas and changing quota targets Manage Logs for viewing and downloading Interviewer Server log files This activity is available from the Tools menu IBM SPSS Data Collection Remote Administration for monitoring remote interviewers Data Collection Activities Phone Participants for conducting telephone interviews Exp
327. lt Settings If you find that for every new project you always change the settings on the Interview Settings tab to the same new values you can instead change the default settings that Interviewer Server provides so that you no longer need to do this For more information see the topic Changing the Default Settings on p 169 Autodialer Settings You use the Dialer Settings tab to define settings that relate to the use of an autodialer You can ignore this tab if you have not selected the option on the Interview Settings tab to use an autodialer 160 Chapter 7 Fields Parameters Ordering Y Call Times Appointments Call Outcomes Interview Settings Manage Phone Survey Project Id Project Name Description Dialer Settings Send caller identification Phone number to send leave blank to use dialer s setting O Error if login position is not in configuration Ring time Name of silent call announcement file leave blank to use dialer s setting Cancel if interviewer not connected after Percentage of calls to record Answering machine detection AMD mode Disabled lv AMD parameter Leave blank to use dialer s settings off 6 0 max 1 15 0n 60 0 Name of AMD announcement file Leave blank to use dialer s settings Predictive Settings Initial dialing aggressiveness Maximum percentage of silent calls Target percentage of silent calls Ve Reset Statistics You can change the default values o
328. lumn percents in the Options dialog box and the grid is vertically oriented then column percents will also be shown If you choose row percents and the grid is horizontally oriented then row percents will also be shown Charts are not generated for grid variables E freq oth Project tea Tea survey Inbound and CATI Date 20 May 2004 YW takevith Time 16 39 46 io whenadd Filter m ttype Interview Respondent and Test data with status Completed successfully M shape Filter E thait z s z Base China India Japan Kenya South Africa Sri Lanka Don t know a differ Assam 2 1 1 age Black 2 1 al Ceylon 2 o genas Darjeeling 2 o mstat Green F io income Gunpowder 2 rE tgrid Lapsang Souchong 2 Oolong E places Puerh 2 Orange Pekoe E Rooibos 2 Tables You can build two dimensional tables in Survey Results If you are building tables while interviews are in progress there is no need to rebuild the table to include new interviews Instead use the Refresh facility to reread the data and update the table leaving any filters intact 222 Chapter 7 Building Tables Build Table creates a table with more than one dimension It opens a new window in which you select the variables that are to form the rows and columns of the table As you build the table the preview area is updated to show the current structure of the table Clear Table Table Builder YM SpontaneousQ YM PromptedQ M useg Which o
329. m are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries Microsoft Windows Windows NT and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States other countries or both Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States other countries or both 340 Appendix A Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies _ iila d and symbols in telephone interviewing reports 230 Abandoned 182 Activating projects Activate command 305 Activate command examples 306 Activate Document 304 converting ini files to xml format 307 converting ini files to Activate Documents 305 from command line 304 Activation between clusters 118 over the internet 118 Activation History Activation History tab 302 activity 302 Activation History activity Filters tab 303 Activation History tab 302 334 Activation process 115 Activities overview 4 using 5 what s new 1 Activity Activation History 302 Answering machine 182 answering machine detection 163 Appointment 182 Appointments tab 145 Audio monitoring of interviewers 272 287 Audio recordings playback during interview review 287 Authentication failed page 114 Authentication fields changing 80 Authentication page 114 Authentication retry page 114 Autodialers using for t
330. me if Action is or Call Progress Event pre post con nect Dialer Interviewer Phone IBM SPSS Quancept Dial tone steady tone for d D QSAMP_ BADNUMBER QSAMP_BUSY d_badsyn gt 3 s Ringback pulse duration r R QSAMP_RINGING n a 6 d_error 17 1 5 3s 168 Chapter 7 q End of ringback no pulse 4 Q QSAMP_ NOANSW coNoAnswer dna for gt 8 s b Busy tone cadence or b B QSAMP_BUSY coBusy d_busy precise tone 8 Congested reorder tone C QSAMP_FASTBUSY coFastBusy d_sitout cadence t Tritone Special t T QSAMP_TRITONE coTriTone d_sitout Information Tone f Fax modem tone f F QSAMP_ MODEM coFaxModem d_modem V Start of voice diffuse V V QSAMP_ANNOUNCEMT coAnnouncement d_sitout energy above db dBm End of voice for qoff E QSAMP_ANNOUNCEMT coAnnouncement d_sitout seconds a Voice for more than max a A QSAMP_ANNOUNCEMT coAnnouncement d_sitout seconds S Silence no voice for off n a S QSAMP_ANNOUNCEMT coNoAudio d error 7 seconds 9 W Call waiting ignore voice W W QSAMP_ BUSY coBusy d_busy events 10 Action identifiers Hangup immediately Start noansw timer Hangup if no CONNECT is received within Stop CP analysis ends AMD connecting the two seconds extension Connect to extension even ifno CONNECT No action
331. ments or other publicly available sources IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance compatibility or any other claims related to non IBM products Questions on the capabilities of non IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products All statements regarding IBM s future direction or intent are subject to change or withdrawal without notice and represent goals and objectives only This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations To illustrate them as completely as possible the examples include the names of individuals companies brands and products All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental If you are viewing this information softcopy the photographs and color illustrations may not appear Trademarks IBM the IBM logo ibm com and SPSS are trademarks of IBM Corporation registered in many jurisdictions worldwide A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the Web at http www ibm com legal copytrade shtml Adobe the Adobe logo PostScript and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Intel Intel logo Intel Inside Intel Inside logo Intel Centrino Intel Centrino logo Celeron Intel Xeon Intel SpeedStep Itanium and Pentiu
332. mes or more call outcome code numbers separated by semicolons The default value is 15 This property is only employed when used with IBM SPSS Data Collection Dialer Interviewers will need to exit and reenter the Phone participants activity in order to pick up changes to this property 175 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Tab Name Tab Setting Corresponding DPM Collection Corresponding DPM Property Valid Values Call Outcomes Always Hidden DefaultCatiProjectPrdfadtiesC odesList One or more call outcome code numbers separated by semicolons Interview Settings Enable monitor ing recording and The interviewer must get approval for monitoring recording both settings are controlled by the MonitoringA llowed property DefaultCatiProjectPrdpkntitoringA llowed 0 to clear Enable monitoring recording 1 to select Enable monitoring recording and clear The interviewer must get approval for monitoring recording or 2 to select both Enable monitoring recording and The interviewer must get approval for monitoring recording The installation value is 2 Dialer Settings Send caller identification and Phone number to send both settings are controlled by the CallerID property DefaultCatiProjectPrdpatteesD Set the value to False to clear Send caller identification or True to select Send ca
333. mote Project to activate projects over the internet when you do not have a direct connection to your cluster Starting Promote Project gt Select the project you want to activate and click Promote Project The Promote Project login dialog box is displayed 119 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Logging in to the Destination Server gt In order for activation to work you must be logged in to the Activate component on your current machine and the destination machine When you start Promote Project you are prompted to log in to the destination machine that is the project management server to which you want to activate The first time you use Promote Project you will need to complete all the fields on the login dialog box but after that all fields except password will be filled in with the values you used the previous time In Destination Server or IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration URL do one of the following m Ifyou are connected to your local network type the name of the project management server on the cluster you want to activate to m Ifyou are not connected to your local network you can activate across the internet by typing the URL for Interviewer Server Administration on the cluster to which you want to activate In Destination User Name enter the user name that you want to use for logging in on the destination server In many cases this will be the sam
334. mplates Build does not use the library for storing shared pictures and presentation templates although it uses a similar structure of folders and subfolders for templates Build stores templates that are available to all users in a Shared Presentation Styles folder and templates that are available to all members of a particular role in a role specific Presentation Styles folder Roles RoleA Presentation Styles for instance Select Web Page Dialog i g a xj Upload Download Fiename Poo Filemask htmi htm Select Close Folders Name _Twe Date E Root Card_Blue_1_Down htm htm 10 7 2003 8 38 42 AM H E My Presentation Styles Card_Blue_2_Down htm htm 10 7 2003 8 38 44 AM H E Presentation Styles OPMAdmins Card_Blue_3_Down htm htm 10 7 2003 8 38 46 AM 5 Shared Presentation Styles DefaultTemplata htm htm 7 22 2004 3 15 02 PM Diamond_Blue_1_Down htm htm 10 2003 8 38 46 AM Diamond_Blue_2_Down htm htm 107 2003 8 38 48 AM Diamond_Blue_3_Down htm htm 10 2003 8 38 50 AM Diamond_Green_1_Down htm htm 10 2003 8 38 52 AM Diamond_Green_2_Down htm htm 10 2003 8 38 54 AM Diarnond_Green_3_Down htm htm 10 7 2003 8 38 56 AM People_Working_Blue_1 htm htm 5 17 2004 3 35 38 PM People_Working Blue_2 htm htm 5 17 2004 3 35 54 PM The Presentation Styles folder represents the project s folder in your IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration user folder so it points to a different location depending
335. must get approval for monitoring recording check box Monitoring and recording are allowed only if the Select the Enable monitoring recording and The participant gives his or her consent interviewer must get approval for monitoring recording check boxes If you have selected The interviewer must get approval for monitoring recording Yes and No options will appear on the main screen of the Phone Participants activity whenever interviewers retrieve a contact As part of their introductory script interviewers must ask each participant if they give their consent for monitoring and recording and record the participant s answer by selecting either 158 Chapter 1 Yes or No The three options underneath The interviewer must get approval for monitoring recording determine the default settings of the Yes and No options as described below Option Description Interviewer must manually select an option The interviewer must always select either Yes or No Default setting is monitoring recording prohibited The No option is selected by default The interviewer can change the selection Default setting is monitoring recording allowed The Yes option is selected by default The interviewer can change the selection For more information see Interviewer Monitoring Reviewing Interviews You can choose whether interviewers can review the participant s responses after the interview has completed
336. n a IBM SPSS Data Collection project that you can access An interviewer will remain listed in the Real Time display while Phone Participants remains open even if there is no activity for a period of a day or more When an interviewer closes Phone Participants his or her record is removed from the Real Time display Note If an interviewer reopens Phone Participants after it closes abnormally the Real Time display might contain more than one record for that interviewer The current record will have a lower value in the Session Time column A record that isn t current will be removed automatically after one hour For each interviewer the Real Time display shows a number of statistics which are mostly of three types Statistics that relate to the period since the interviewer last opened the Phone Participants activity This period is sometimes referred to as the current session m Statistics that relate to the interview currently in progress if there is one m Statistics that relate to the current question being asked For more information about the statistics shown see Columns in the Real Time Display You can change the Real Time display to show additional columns or to display the interviewer records in a different order For more information see the topic Customizing the Real Time Display on p 276 In the Real Time display you can choose to monitor an interviewer who is conducting an interview For more information
337. n at least one of the interview result types gt Optionally enable the Select cases finished after a certain date time and or the Select cases finished before a certain date time options m When Select cases finished after a certain date time is selected and an appropriate date time is defined cases that finish after the specified date time are returned m When Select cases finished before a certain date time is selected and an appropriate date time is defined cases that finish before the specified date time are returned m When both Select cases finished after a certain date time and Select cases finished before a certain date time are selected cases that fall between the two specified dates times are returned Note The defined filter condition date time options do not correspond to the selected Respondent time zone When defining the Select cases finished after a certain date time and Select cases finished before a certain date time options the times are based on Coordinated Universal Time UTC gt Click Download Now after applying the appropriate settings This opens the Exporting dialog box Messages are displayed in this dialog box documenting the export s progress and when the export is complete the number of cases transferred Note that Export Data does not normally export dirty data but can be configured to do so Speak to your IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server administrator if you need to export dirty data
338. n fields must also be flagged as sample fields Queue is not a valid authentication field Testing the Script You can test how the Sample Management script will work by running a test interview This allows you to check that any authentication of inbound calls works as intended and that the script correctly handles records returned to it with different outcome codes gt Choose Test 81 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Any unsaved changes are saved before the test interview is started Participants You use the Participants activity to copy participant records from a text file into a table in a Sample participant database You can either use an existing database and or table or you can create new ones After you have loaded some records you can use the Participants activity to view and edit those records The Participants activity displays a page that contains six tabs The first three tabs are used to view edit delete and download records that have already been loaded into the sample table see Viewing and Editing Participant Records for more information The next three tabs correspond to the three tasks you need to perform before you can upload records These are m Specify the text file and then choose or define the sample database and table into which the participant records will be loaded You use the Upload tab for this m Map fields from the participant records to required columns in th
339. n in the mqd file any changes that you made with Quotas will be overwritten with the information from the mqd file You use the Status activity to monitor the current status of a project The report refreshes automatically every 60 seconds which is useful if interviews are in progress For a really up to date report you can request an immediate refresh 217 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Status Total Completed successfully Active In progress Timed out Stopped by script Stopped by respondent Interview system shutdown Reviewed Stopped by signal Undetermined Status oo oo O O P O NR Ww 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The report groups interviews using the following status codes m Completed successfully Interviews that were successfully completed because respondents answered all questions that applied to them Active In progress Interviews that are currently in progress Timed out Interviews that timed out before completion This generally happens when a respondent takes more than ten minutes to answer a question perhaps he she is interrupted in the middle of the interview If the respondent does not close his her browser the interview usually restarts when the respondent clicks Next otherwise you can restart from the URL As long as the time out period has not expired the status of the interview remains Active Note Ten minutes is the default time out period Speak to your IBM
340. n user name and password or your standard Windows account and enter a user name and password if required 312 Chapter 2 If you are not connected to your local network you can log in over the internet m Enter the URL for Interviewer Server Administration on the cluster m Enter your Interviewer Server Administration user name and password This type of connection does not support Windows logins gt For both types of connection click Login A message reports whether or not you are successfully gt gt logged in This opens the Open Participants dialog box Figure 2 2 Open Participants dialog box M Select the database columns to use Server Database Participants a Tables quobasic X Columns Select All Clear All Id Queue Active Serial Test UserName Address Email x The defaults for Server Database and Tables are set using information in the project management database also known as DPM as follows Server If there is a project in DPM with the same name as the current mdd or mqd file and that project references a sample management object then the value set in the sample management property Queueing gt Queues gt Properties gt INIT_DATASOURCE is used as the server name Otherwise the value of the DPM site property INIT_DATASOURCE is used Database If there is a project in DPM with the same name as the current mdd or mqd file and that project ref
341. n uses an autodialer m fan autodialer is used you click a button to ask the autodialer to connect you to a participant For more information see the topic Using an autodialer to make calls on p 185 m fan autodialer is not used you request a number to call and then manually dial the number you have been given Alternatively you might be able to use a modem to dial the number automatically For more information see the topic Using manual dialing or a modem to make calls on p 187 If the participant agrees to be interviewed now the call moves into the interviewing phase and the first question is displayed For more information see the topic Conducting interviews on p 194 An interview might also include a reviewing phase in which you review and if necessary amend the participant s answers after the interview has finished For more information see the topic Reviewing interviews on p 200 Starting Phone Participants gt Select the project you want to work on and click Phone Participants This displays the Phone Participants main screen 178 Chapter 7 When Autodialers are Used If the call center you are working in uses autodialers to dial participants phone numbers a dialog box might open and request that you enter a position name as shown below Figure 1 35 Position dialog box Specify your position details in the field s below Interviewer Position Select your interviewer qualifications be
342. naire file open it in Base Professional and select the Paper tab To Change the Routing Section gt Download the questionnaire file and open it in Base Professional gt Create a new Routing section with a unique name gt On the Paper Routing tab select any statements that you want to use in the new Routing section and copy them onto the new tab gt Make your changes to the statements on the new tab gt When you activate the project change the default routing context to point to the name of your new Routing section Refer to the Base Professional and Interview Scripting sections of JBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library for further information on these steps 73 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Running Build Outside IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration You run Build outside IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration when you want to create or edit library files that are not related to a specific project When you do this the following additional options are available in the File menu New Lets you choose whether to create a new file or whether to use an existing library file as a starting point Open Lets you open any questionnaire to which you have access Save As Lets you save the questionnaire with a new name Save Copy As Lets you save the questionnaire with a new name but continue working on the original file To Run Build Outside
343. nd concise description of the problem that has been observed If you have other information that will be helpful make a note of it here For example if a sample management script has recently been changed or the problem occurred after a system upgrade add it to this field so that the support representative is aware of the issue Click Download Logs Whats in the Zip File The zip file that Manage Logs creates contains the following files in the order shown Filename Description dpm_out txt A text file listing the contents of DPM ReadMe html Additional information about the files ApplicationEvents csv The Windows application and system event logs SystemEvents csv if requested tmp IBM SPSS Data Collection log files The exact files depend what was requested The ReadMe File The ReadMe himl file contains the following information m When the zip file was created and by which version of the log tool m Which versions of IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration and its associated applications are installed m The names of the machines whose log files have been included the function of each machine in the cluster interviewing server for instance each machine s time zone and how many log files have been collected from each machine m Information that you entered on the Download tab 301 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide If you need to am
344. nd tables 227 clearing tables 223 347 clearing the log file 229 frequency counts 219 grid variables as filters 226 grid variables in tables 222 log file 229 main screen 219 numeric variables as filters 225 numeric variables in tables 222 options 228 refreshing a table 223 refreshing the log file 229 replacing the side variables in a table 223 starting 218 text variables as filters 226 viewing connection string 229 viewing the log file 229 switch project 180 Symbols displayed in telephone interviewing reports 230 Sytel certification 291 Telephone interviewing using an autodialer 284 Templates copying to library 77 downloading from project folder 50 location of 77 referring to external files in 76 role specific 77 sharing with other users 76 uploading into project folder 50 Terminating interviews from the script 56 Testing questionnaires 70 Text questions 26 Text to display at end of interview 114 Text variables quotas for 318 trademarks 339 Transfer to web 182 translate call outcomes 202 unbounded loops 218 Unsupported item types list of recognized codes 64 Updating the records in a sample table 93 Uploading participant records 92 Versions expressions for superversions 271 Viewing the records in a sample table 93 Web pages assigning to projects 114 Index writing filter expressions 265 Wrong number 182 Zero values symbols for in telephone interviewing re
345. nd the top level node the site name and then expand the Properties node 173 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide In the left pane click the DPM collection that contains the property that you want to change see the table below In the upper right pane click the DPM property that you want to change see the table below In the lower right pane change the value as required and click the Apply button which is in the lower right corner Tab Name Tab Setting Corresponding Corresponding Valid Values DPM Collection DPM Property Parameters No preference for DefaultCatiParameterAppointmentPreferAlrtatgselect Give appointments preference to Give preference the interviewer to the interviewer who arranged the who arranged the appointment or appointment 0 to select No preference for appointments If the AppointmentPreferArranger property doesn t exist then No preference for appointments is implied Parameters Before an DefaultCatiParameterA ppointmentMarginBElieraumber of appointment by minutes The any interviewer installation value is and Before an 5 appointment by the arranger only both settings are controlled by the AppointmentMarginBefore property Parameters After an DefaultCatiParametearAppointmentMarginAfter number of appointment by minutes The any interviewer installation value is 5 This setting applies only if the AppointmentPreferArranger prope
346. nder When you change from the age filter to the gender filter or cancel case data filtering altogether the interview filter still applies 227 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide You can change the interview filter during a session and can remove it completely if necessary You can filter using the following interview status codes Completed successfully Active In progress Timed out Stopped by script Stopped by respondent Reviewed Stopped by signal Interview system shut down You may also choose whether to include only respondent data from live interviews only test data or both respondent and test data in the tables To Set an Interview Filter gt Select Actions gt Intv Filter This displays the Interview Filter dialog box Interview Filter eeg Vv B E E a E E a gt Choose whether to include only respondent data only test data or both types of data gt Select the interview statuses that you want to include in the analyses gt Click Apply Clearing the Current Table and Filters Clear All clears the current table and any filters that have been set 228 Chapter 1 gt To Clear the Current Table and Filters Select Clear gt Clear All Options Options lets you control how Survey Results works for you The defaults are as follows The Variables section determines which variables are shown in variable lists Display all system variables Sy
347. ne interviewers You can monitor telephone interviews in real time so that you can see the question that the interviewer is currently asking and the answer that he or she enters If the project uses an autodialer to call participants you can also listen to the interview For more information see the topic Interviewer Monitoring on p 272 Monitor interviewing status You can keep track of the number of interviews terminating which each status by running Status You can also run a number of telephone interviewing reports using the Phone activity Monitor interviewer session engine activity Interviewer session engines run interviews You can run Interview Activity Report to monitor the activity of each engine to check that it is not becoming overloaded You can also check the spread of projects across engines You should run these reports regularly all the time that interviewing is in progress as they can help you anticipate and deal with loading issues before they start to impact productivity Review interviews You might want to review completed interviews to check that telephone interviewers have conducting the survey correctly If necessary you can amend the answers that the interviewer entered For more information see the topic Review Interviews on p 203 View topline tables Use Survey Results to see at a glance how interviewing is progressing You can view data for a single question in the questionnaire or produce cross tabulations of two
348. nformation about the quota database for this project and how it is to be affected by the activation process When a project uses quota control and you activate it for the first time Launch creates a new quota database for the project using the information in the project s quota document mqd file The quota database is a set of tables whose names start with QUOTA and which the activation process creates inside the project database They contain definitions of the quota groups and their targets and once interviewing starts counts of completed pending and rolled back interviews for each group The quota document mqd file is the file that the IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup program creates when you save the quota definitions and targets Launch uses it to determine the structure and content of the quota database it is to create The mqd file is not used during interviewing Do not update the quota definitions on the server When selected quota definitions on the server will not be updated Publish new quota definitions but do not update existing quotas When selected any new definitions are updated to the server but existing definitions on the server remain unchanged Resynchronize quota database with this project s mqd Once a quota database exists this check box is always activated but is unchecked If you have made changes to the mqd file you should select this check box if you want these changes to be implemented in the
349. ng Question mdd Products and Services B Ratings and Frequencies D website E O Templates H O Users Each template subfolder contains a set of gif image files that are used to represent points in a standard 5 point rating scale Participant Rules Participant Rules is displayed in the application list whenever you choose a project that uses Sample Management It allows you to perform the following tasks m Change or debug a sample script and validate its syntax without having to reactivate the project Convert a column in the participant database into a Sample Field or Authentication Field Run a test interview using the revised script Starting Participant Rules gt Select the project you want to work on and click Participant Rules 79 Changing the Sample Script IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide EditSampleScript Sample Script Last updated May 13 2004 ce ee ee ee a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a Number Selection Rules The number selection rules define the default workings of the GetSampleRec function By default numbers will be called in the following order 1 Appointments Appointments are agreements that an interviewer makes with a respondent during the initial contact Appointments may also be arranged to continue an interview If the current time is AppointmentMarginBefore minutes before or AppointmentMargindfter minutes aft
350. ning test interviews the other is for production interviewing gt Click Close to close the message box Setting Activation Parameters Manually Use Build s Advanced option to activate the questionnaire using activation parameters of your choice When you select this option the following actions take place m The Launch activity starts so that you can specify the parameters needed for activation for example whether the project uses Sample Management or Quota Control and which Web pages to use for authentication A dialog box displays the URLs to use for running test and live interviews Note If the questionnaire was created in IBM SPSS Data Collection Author with the default context of routing when new questions are created in Build the context paper is automatically created The paper context includes questions created in both Author and Build When you activate the questionnaire routing is selected as the default context Unless you manually change the context to paper the activated questionnaire will not include those questions created in Build To Specify Activation Parameters gt Choose Tools gt Activate gt Advanced gt The Launch activity starts Specify the activation parameters you want to use and click Activate Now A message box reports the progress of the activation procedure When the process is complete the message box displays two URLS that can be used for interviewing on this project gt I
351. nitor the percentage of silent calls that are occurring for each project Silent calls can occur when an autodialer generates more calls than there are interviewers available to handle the calls For any of the listed projects you can also reset the silent calls figure to zero Figure 1 71 Dialers tab Interviewers Monitor f Monitoring The table below shows the current dialer activity M automatically refresh the table every 30 F sec Dialing Activity 2 1 Not predictive Dialer1 0 http KI TGROUTO1 80 mrlEngwS mrlEngws dll 1 a Not predictive Dialer1 1 http KI TGROUTO1 80 mrlEngwS mrlEngwWs dll 1 4 Not predictive MYFIRSTINTERVIEW You use the Dialers tab to monitor the autodialer activity for each project The columns shown in the Dialing Activity display on the Dialers tab are described in the following table Column Description Project The name of the Interviewer Server project Dialer The name of the autodialer being used by this dialing group 282 Chapter 1 Column Description Group The ID number of the dialing group A dialing group is shown only if the project is using an autodialer in predictive or group mode If the project uses interviewer qualifications there will be a separate dialing group for each collection of interviewers with the same qualifications Engine The URL of the interview session engine being used by this dialing group Total Inter
352. nly text questions You can also define the introductory script that interviewers should read to each participant Fields Parameters Ordering Call Times Appointments Call Outcomes y Dialer Settings Manage Phone Survey Dialing Options IBM SPSS Dialer Group Dial for the interview in a group with optional predictive dial x Other Interviewer Settings Interviewer to select qualifications Handle queue refused Languages spoken by interviewer Show Specific Contact button on the Interviewer screen o Automatically select next contact C Can start a survey after being disconnected from a call Enable monitoring recording M the interviewer must get approval for monitoring recording Interviewer must manually select an option x Review Interview Options No Review w Show the review button on the Interviewer screen O Interviewer must review Introduction to Survey mj Gooa morning afternoon My name is lt your name gt I am calling on behalf of lt your company gt Would you mind answering a few questions on lt your survey topic gt l t will take around lt average number of minutes gt minutes For quality assurance this phone call may be monitored and recorded Is this acceptable to you You can also change the default values of these settings so that your custom settings will be used whenever a new project is created See Changing the Default
353. nonymous User permission to access that database otherwise the Participants activity will be unable to load records into it In Table in database for storing participant records select the name of the table you want to load the records into Participants defaults to using a table with the same name as the project and will create it if it does not exist If you want to use or create a table with a different name click New and enter the table name when prompted to do so Note If possible create a separate table for each project You can create a sample table that is shared by a number of projects but you then run the risk of overwriting a project s data due to the interview serial number field being populated on one project and then being used in the second project For example if a record is used on project A and generates an interview with serial number 100 the number 100 is written back into the Serial field If the record is then used on Project B the interviewing program will read the serial number for the new interview from the sample record and will create an interview with that serial number If there is already an interview with that serial number its data will be overwritten To avoid this you should always prepopulate the Serial field in shared sample tables To specify that the Sort d column on the sample table should be automatically populated with random values select the Re randomize all participant records checkbox This
354. ns 1000 gt Number of records per page Table Setup Available Fields Active Serial Test PreviousQueue ReturnTime PhoneNumber InterviewMode Add gt gt lt lt Remove IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Pro _ l Upload Required Fields Additional Fields HEPIE Select and Edit Options Standard C Advanced Displayed Fields RecallTime AppointmentTime TryCount AppointmentTryCount TimeZone CallOutcome Display order in table Move Up Move Down Sort table by Id ct My First Interview dmin KI TGROUTO1L gt In Display Options select the number of records that you want to appear in each page on the View tab You can select from 25 to 1000 records Note The Participants activity can be customized by an administrator to show other values in the Display Options list for example to display more than 1000 records For more information use the search function in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library documentation to search for the text Settings for the Participants Activity and in the search results open the topic with that title records on the View tab as follows In Select and Edit Options choose the method you want to use for selecting and updating Standard This option allows you to construct your selection criteria by choosing values from drop down lists If you select this option you can update records on the View tab only by
355. ns required in sample table 84 database server 82 deleting records 93 downloading records to a text file 93 editing records 93 features controlling access to 107 force preview dial 92 overview 81 replicates 91 RequiresManualDial 92 sample data controlling access to 107 sample database amp table 82 sample file format 81 segment field 89 starting 82 updating records 93 uploading records 92 viewing records 93 Phone activity and symbols displayed in reports 230 charts including in reports 253 downloading reports 258 filtering reports 256 overview 230 running reports 253 segments 260 starting 252 Phone Participants autodialer using to make calls 185 cancelling calls 187 changing the answer to a previous question 199 closing 202 comments viewing entering 190 conducting interviews 194 grid questions 196 keyboard shortcuts 179 196 198 199 language problems 185 187 main screen 179 making appointments 192 making calls by auto dialing 185 making calls by manual dialing 187 making calls by using a modem 187 manual dialing using to make calls 187 modem using to make calls 187 multiple choice questions 196 numeric questions 196 overview 177 playing a sound to the participant 198 position name 177 recording the participant s answer 199 rejecting an interview during a review 200 retrieving a specific participant 193 returning uncalled numbers 187 reviewing
356. nt record organized by project and always includes both real and test data The report does not filter data and does not specify a time period Note Due to a Microsoft SQL server limitation this report is limited to a maximum of 256 projects When working with customers accounts this report will only include data for projects in the selected customer account 246 Chapter 7 Call Outcome Rejected JAnswer Business cel iater Diaier Early Failed Language Language Network No Not lover ie rong andone rachina APPOintment humer BUSY Canceled rone COmpieted puey tarea DCONNected Oy Fated erl FestBusyl Fan barer recan busy 10 182 answer avaiabiel quota Yong Refused Reectd by Reviewed Sient Stoppedi unknown Project Base n muL TmoDET 5 unoresT Note Refer to the Across project reports topic in the Data Collection Developer Library for more detailed information regarding across project reports Queue Status This report shows two tables The first is a frequency table showing the number of participant records in each queue Note that the FAILED queue is not included in this table For projects that use an autodialer this table includes the autodialer specific queues called CHECK _ NUMBER and SILENT The second table shows some additional statistics as follows m Resolved This sho
357. number of calls made by the autodialer Silent calls can occur when an autodialer generates more connected calls than there are interviewers available to handle the calls Each cell of the report shows a count and a row percentage Note that this report always includes data for both real and test interviews you cannot choose to include only one or the other For projects that do not use an autodialer selecting this report might display an empty table or an error message Connected A _Base_ _silent_ Base _ Silent noms rns 100 00 100 00 Appointment Distribution This report shows a frequency table of appointments arranged for the next two days The categories are 09 00 to 23 00 in one hour intervals with two additional categories for appointments taking place before 09 00 and after 23 00 Each cell shows a count and a column percentage 241 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide 21 03 2007 22 03 2007 Appointment Time 8 2 pwr ge om After 11PM SPM 11PM 8PM SPM 7PM 8PM 6PM 7PM 5PM 6PM 4PM SPM 3PM 4PM 2PM 3PM 21 03 2007 4PM 2PM E 2203 2007 124M 1PM 114M 124M SAM 114M Before 9AM 0 30 Appointment Time ColPercent 242 Chapter 7 Appointments Summary Lists all appointments arranged for a particular time period You specify the time period before running the report Appointments Summary Specify the date range for the repo
358. o create a new day part definition Figure 1 17 The Day Parts dialog displays providing options for defining a new day part Add a new day part Start time hh mm End time hh mm Days Omon tue Owed OTh Ofri Osat O Sun Name The day part name Enter an appropriate name Tries The maximum number of times that a record may be called Enter an appropriate value Start time The earliest time at which participants may be called Enter the earliest call time End time The latest time at which participants may be called Enter the latest call time Days Select the appropriate days of the week to contact participants Click OK after entering the desired day part parameters to save the day part to the Day Parts table Otherwise click Cancel to discard the new day part To Edit a Day Part Select an existing day part in the Day Parts table Click the Edit day part button Figure 1 18 145 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide The Day Parts dialog displays with the selected day part parameters filled in gt Apply the appropriate changes and click OK to update the day part Otherwise click Cancel to discard the changes To Delete a Day Part gt Select an existing day part in the Day Parts table gt Click the Delete day part button Figure 1 19 x Setting Up Appointments The Appointments tab provides options for defining a project expiry date and for creating appointment schedules for the
359. o delete the selected field value Figure 1 16 x gt Click OK to save your changes and return to the Ordering tab The Order records by table updates and displays your defined record field values Queue Order Edit dialog The Queue Order Edit dialog provides options for defining which sample field will be used for ordering the selected queue s records 142 Chapter 7 T Queue Order Edit Webpage Dialog x le http 10 80 4 99 SPSSMR CatiSup QueueOrderingEdit aspx queue Appointment amp order Ap x Sample queue Appointment Sample field AppointmentTime Order Ascending Vv http 10 80 4 99 SPSSMR Catisup QueueOrderingEdit aspx q Internet Sample queue This field is non modifiable field displays the selected queue Sample field The drop down list provides all sample fields available to the selected queue Select an appropriate field from the list Order The order in which the selected sample field will be sorted The drop down list provides options for Ascending and Descending Click OK to save your changes and return to the Ordering tab Click Cancel to discard any changes and return to the Ordering tab The Order records within each queue by table updates and displays your changes Setting Up Call Time Parameters The Call Times tab provides options for defining valid participant call times and for creating day parts for the current project Day parts allow you to ensure that
360. o follow the base dialing rules Parameters that can be overridden are m The maximum number of attempts for a record m The call back delay for numbers that are not answered busy answered by an answering machine or started on the web In addition you can specify that a subset of records be identified as having a high priority High priority records are generally called before other records This feature could be used for example if you discover that the completion percentage for a particular subset of records region for example is particularly low You could indicate that the subset has priority until the completion percentage reaches the average at which point you could disable the override 150 Chapter 7 UploadSample y m U Call Times Call Outcomes Dialer Settings Manage Phone Survey Project Id UPLOADSAMPLE Project Name UploadSample Description O Prioritize Selection criteria For example Gender male Time in minutes to wait before retrying a participant No answer delay Busy delay Answering machine delay Web callback delay Number of times to try each participant Maximum tries for any day parts Prioritize Select this option when you want the specify that the Selection criteria value be identified as having priority over other records High priority records are generally called before other records Selection criteria Identifies the subset of r
361. o system variables Export Data offers a third option of exporting only the more commonly used system variables These are as follows Variable Name Description Respondent ID ID that links a respondent record to log entries This is either the ID from the sample record or an ID generated randomly by IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Respondent Serial Respondent serial number DataCollection Status Interview status completed stopped timed out and so on DataCollection StartTime Interview start time DataCollection FinishTime Interview end time DataCollection Metadata VersionNumber Version number of the metadata used for this interview DataCollection TerminateSignal Signal used to terminate the interview Recommended Procedure for Exporting IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Data to IBM SPSS Quantum The following procedure is recommended for exporting data in IBM SPSS Quantum format gt In IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration run the Launch activity to activate the project This ensures that the mdd file contains up to date information about the questions in the questionnaire gt Run IBM SPSS Data Collection Metadata Model to Quantum on the mdd file you have just updated gt Reactivate the questionnaire The version of the mdd file in the Shared project folder will now contain card and column information gt In Inte
362. of the CATIsupervisor role For the IBM SPSS Data Collection projects that you have access to all interviewers are automatically included in the Interviewers Real Time display and no additional setup tasks are required Audio monitoring is available only if the interviewer is using an autodialer to make calls and the supervisor s station is connected to the same autodialer 274 Chapter 7 The Interviewers Real Time Display Figure 1 65 Interviewers tab Monitoring The table below is an overview of the interviewers currently logged in To monitor an interviewer directly select him or her in the list and click the monitor button D4 Automatically refresh the table every 30 sec Select interviewers to display Display All O Display Selection Real Time Display a Interviewer Id Position Project Id Idle Time Busy Rate Try Count Completed Interview Question Id Question Interviewer Last Call local_interviewert Post TESTCATI 00 00 00 Yo 00 00 00 local_interviewer2 Pos2 TESTCATI 00 00 00 o 00 00 00 Remote_interviewer1 RPos8 TESTCATI 00 00 00 00 00 00 The Interviewers tab contains two windows m The first window allows you to specify if and how often the Interviewers Real Time display is automatically refreshed m The second window is the Interviewers Real Time display which contains one record for every user interviewer who has opened the Phone Participants activity and is working o
363. ofessional to create or edit questionnaires directly in the interview scripting language Like Build Base Professional creates an mdd file with a metadata section and routing information but there are differences that you should be aware of if you use Build and Base Professional on the same questionnaire file These differences are as follows m There are some questionnaire items that you can create in Base Professional that you cannot create in Build If you use Build on a questionnaire that contains these items you will see them flagged as unsupported items For more information see the topic Unsupported Items on p 64 m Questionnaires created in Base Professional have a routing section that contains IBM SPSS Data Collection scripting code that determines how the questions in the metadata section are presented during interviews The default routing section is called Web but scriptwriters can create any number of different routing sections with different names if they wish m Questionnaires created in Build do not have a routing section Instead they have a collection of routing items Only Build can write to these items If you open a Build questionnaire in Base Professional the application runs the mrRoutingScript DSC to translate the routing items into a routing script written in the Data Collection scripting language The DSC calls this routing section Paper and makes it read only because it is a generated section rather than something
364. olumn below If you are loading participant records into an existing table this column must be the Primary Key for the table If you have specified that Participants must create the sample table it will automatically set this column to be the primary key If you are loading participant records into an existing table in a case sensitive SQL database the name of the column on that table must be exactly as shown this is an uppercase I followed by a lowercase d Active The sample management system sets the value of this column to 1 while it is running and 0 at all other times Queue This column shows the queue in which the record is currently held Participants sets the value of this column to FRESH when loading a participant record The sample management system then updates the value as appropriate When replicate identifiers are defined in the queue field for specific records those records can then be used to create sample participant record subsets Refer to the Queues topic in the JBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library for more information 85 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Column Description Serial Participants sets the value of this column to 0 when loading a participant record The sample management system then sets the value of this column to the serial number of the interview associated with the participant record Test T
365. omatically move to the text box when you select the answer m Ifthe response list is shown as a grid of single choice or multiple choice answers you must select an answer for each question in the grid Usually the questions are the rows of the grid and the answers are the columns but this is not always so Numeric Questions Questions that have numeric answers can be set up to accept only whole numbers or only real decimal numbers If the question requires a real response you must always enter a decimal point and at least one decimal place even if the answer is a whole number Questions that have numeric answers might specify a range of valid answers and will reject answers outside of this range Text Questions Questions with text answers display a box of about six lines in which the participant s words have been entered When amending the text there is no need to press Return or Enter at the end of each line Date Time and Date Time Questions Date questions might accept an answer in several different formats for example mm dd yy or dd mm yy or dd mmm yyyy To ensure that the answer that you enter is unambiguous use the dd mmm yyyy format for example 01 Jan 2000 Time questions will normally require an answer in an hh mm or hh mm ss format Sometimes a question might require a date time answer such as 01 Jan 2000 22 30 00 Like numeric questions date time and date time questions might require an answer within a certa
366. on s response Up Arrow Use only for questions other than text questions If more than question is displayed on the screen move the cursor to the previous question on the screen same as Ctrl Tab If only one question is displayed on the screen display the previous question same as Page Up Space and Dash Hyphen Can be used between multiple answers for multiple response categorical questions For interviews that use the mouse click the Next button to display the next question and click the Previous button to display the previous question For interviews that require the keyboard only the methods for answering different types of questions are explained in the following topics See In This Section below Valid keycode keystrokes The following keystrokes can be used in support of keycodes created in IBM SPSS Data Collection Author and IBM SPSS Data Collection Base Professional Keycode Description Example A Z 0 9 Common keycodes A 5 CTRL 0 9 CTRL based keycode CTRL any CTRL 1 CTRL 4 CTRL 9 keycode that is between 0 and 9 Note Avoid using keycodes that start with the same characters You should not define ambiguous keycodes especially when one keycode is a part of another keycode For example Q1 What activities do you like Basketball keycode 1 Football keycode 11 For this question the interviewer s intention cannot be determined when the
367. on Quota Setup program window 313 List pane 309 310 List Pane 310 List Pane docking undocking 310 logical operators in expressions 330 Not operator in expressions 331 opening existing files 313 operator precedence in expressions 332 Or operator in expressions 330 overview 308 quotas using sample variables 310 returning to default window layout 313 reusing mqd files in different projects 333 showing hiding Details pane 313 Index showing hiding List pane 313 showing hiding status bar 313 showing hiding toolbar 313 starting 308 table 315 undoing redoing actions 314 IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup program window 309 IBM SPSS Data Collection Remote Administration interface 301 overview 301 starting 301 If Goto item 54 Inserting IBM SPSS Data Collection WordCapture files 64 Interview monitoring 272 audio monitoring 287 Interview rejected page 114 Interview scripting questionnaires created with Build 69 Interview scripting statements adding to questionnaires 58 Interview stopped page 114 Interviewer comments 190 Interviewer Monitoring audio monitoring 287 Interviewer Monitoring activity 272 Interviewer qualifications setting changing 183 turning on off for project 131 Interviewer stations using for autodialing 287 Interviewers monitoring 272 Interviewing using an autodialer to make calls 284 Interviewing activity report engine status 294 overview 293 project status 295 refr
368. one number and you select any call outcome other than the one to make an appointment the telephone call is automatically terminated If your next number is not selected automatically click the Next Contact button to request another number to call If you are working on a project where participants speak different languages you will normally receive only records for participants whose language you speak If it does happen that you are unable to communicate effectively with the participant select either the Language barrier or the Language recall call outcome your supervisor should tell you which one to use Some call outcomes such as Abandoned should be used only after the interview has started It is important that you choose the most appropriate option from the list as this information will be used to plan future projects If you accidentally select the wrong call outcome let your supervisor know immediately so that it can be corrected Viewing and entering comments When you call a participant you may obtain information that is useful to other interviewers who call that person For instance if the participant is hard of hearing your may wish to record this information so that the next person who calls the participant will know to speak slowly and clearly Another time when comments are useful is when you arrange an appointment You can record the reason why you made the appointment and any special instructions the particip
369. only for test interviews or for both real and test interviews change the value of Data Filter as required If your project was created using version 3 0 or earlier of IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server or you intend to download only the three reports that are related to the use of an autodialer skip the previous step your reports will always include data for both real and test interviews Note In the project s sample table participant records are defined as either real or test by the value of the Zest column If the value is Null the Phone activity will treat the record as being both real and test For more information see Mapping Fields to Required Columns in the Sample Table From the Download report format drop down list select the format for the downloaded file either HTML or CSV To include a chart with each report select Include chart and choose the chart type from the drop down list Note 1 To be able to select the Include chart option you must have first enabled charts in the Phone activity For more information search the Interviewer Server Installation Instructions and Configuration Notes for the topic Enabling Charts in the Phone Reports Activity Note 2 Not all reports can include a chart see the individual description of each report in Phone for details To save your settings and close the Options dialog box click OK In the frame on the left of the Overview tab you can selec
370. or she answers the call In some situations your supervisor might want you to dial numbers manually even though other interviewers working on the same project are using an autodialer When you are connected to a participant the participant s details are displayed on the main screen together with some introductory text that you should read to him or her Once you have spoken to the participant you will either start an interview or select a call outcome from a list of outcomes Some call outcomes will require you to enter additional information for example to specify the date and time of an appointment When the interview is finished or you have selected a call outcome you can ask to be connected to another participant The Auto contact selection check box will be checked if the project has been set up to automatically select your next contact as soon as you finish your current call and is primarily designed for interviewers who will be dialing manually or using a modem Cancel this check box otherwise you will not be able to stop the dialer making calls when you reach the end of your shift or need to take a break You might be able to change the data in the Phone Number and Name fields if the participant tells you that the current information is wrong Click edit next to the text box type the new details in the field and then click save For details of the keyboard shortcuts you can use to click buttons and select call outcomes see Th
371. ords in detail You can choose how many records you want listed at once which columns you want to appear and in which order the columns will appear You can also use the View tab to display a selection of records to edit records to perform a bulk update to delete records and to download records to a text file The Summary tab displays the total number of records in each queue If you click the View Queue icon on the right of one of the queues the records in that queue are displayed in the View tab The remainder of this topic describes the following subjects The View tab Navigating the View tab Using the View Settings tab to customize the View tab Changing the default list of fields displayed on the View tab Note If you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 or above to access the Participants activity and your participant records contain Chinese Japanese or Korean characters that is double byte characters the characters will be displayed correctly only if you have installed files for East Asian languages on your computer You can normally do this from Regional and Language Options or Regional Options in Windows Control Panel 94 Chapter 7 The View Tab Cai ii My First Interview rs Admin Upload Required Fields Additional Fields EMETA MEAST Participants a Project Id MYFIRSTINTERVIEW Project Name My First Interview Description Use the check boxes to select specific participant records and cl
372. ormation about assigning to the activity feature Can set up supervisor stations search the Interviewer Server Administration User 5 Guide for the topic Assigning Users or Roles to Activity Features Stations used for reviewing interviews If you intend to use the Review Interviews activity in Interviewer Server and want to be able to listen to audio recordings of participants answers you must assign a valid position name to each station on which the Review Interviews activity will be opened Position names are assigned to stations used for reviewing interviews in one of two ways m By an administrator Make sure that you have been assigned the Review Interviews activity feature Can set up supervisor stations Then open Review Interviews and when prompted enter the appropriate position name This needs to be done only once on each station Any supervisors who subsequently open Review Interviews on that station and who have not been assigned Can set up supervisor stations will not be prompted for a position name Note If a station is being used for both audio monitoring and reviewing interviews you do not need to carry out the above step if you have already carried out the equivalent step in Stations used for Audio Monitoring above m By the supervisor Assign the Review Interviews activity feature Can set up supervisor stations to supervisors Every time that a supervisor opens Review Interviews he or
373. ort If you are exporting data in Quantum format a set of prompts to do with card column options is displayed Do the following m In Width of serial number type the number of columns to reserve for the respondent serial number The default is five columns m In Width of card number type the number of columns to reserve for the card number The default is two columns In Max card length type the maximum number of columns to write per card The default is 80 In Full name of serial variable type the serial variable name The serial variable stores the respondents serial numbers If you are exporting data in delimited text format and you want to export category names rather than values codes click Output category name rather than value for delimited text file Select Generate extra columns for start and finish times in a specific time zone to calculate and then generate two extra data columns that contain the start and finish times for each case You can select the following time zones m Interview Server time zone when selected the Interview Server s time zone is used as the start and finish time zone values m Respondent time zone when selected the respondent s time zone is used as the start and finish time zone values Note When daylight savings time is in effect in the respondent s time zone an offset of 60 minutes is applied m Other when selected you can select any start finish time zone from the
374. ort Data for exporting interview data in a variety of formats 5 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Reports Activities m Survey Results for generating topline tables using interview data m Status for monitoring a project s interviewing status m Phone for running reports on telephone projects m Interviewing Activity Reports for monitoring activity on interviewer session engines This activity is available from the Reports menu E Activation History for monitoring project activation status The activity provides options for viewing pending and completed activations and creating activation history filters This activity is available from the Reports menu Getting Started with the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Activities With so many activities available in IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration it can be difficult knowing where to start or knowing in what order to use the activities The flowchart shown here outlines a suggested workflow 6 Chapter 7 Figure 1 1 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Activities Flowchart Build questionnaire with Build or another Data Collection authoring product Load sample with Participants Activate Set telephone interviewing parameters with Phone Surveys Test mode with Launch project in Link or Run test interviews with View Survey
375. ory texts enclosed within braces and parentheses for example Assam Darjeeling China You can specify values from numeric variables as numeric values When a quota statement for an Expression Quota is executed during an interview the expression is evaluated and returns a value of true for a respondent who has the quota characteristics and false for a respondent who does not have the required characteristics 327 IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup Specifying Expressions using the Advanced Method vy vyv VvV Vy V v YW Figure 2 8 Advanced Filter Specification window Advanced Filter Specification Create the filter and press Ok Or Not a Ly ee oo Variables L lt gt gt o lt a ea Functions Cancel Help You can use the Advanced Filter Specification window to create new Expression Quotas and to modify existing ones If you are editing an existing expression it is displayed in the quota expression box when you open the dialog box Otherwise the quota expression box is blank You can build Expression Quotas by adding variables and clicking the operator and function buttons Alternatively you can enter expressions directly into the quota expression box In practice you will probably use a combination of both methods Example If the questionnaire script contains a categorical question called gender with the categories Male and Female you can create the following
376. ot have checked in the latest versions of the project files If you have to unlock a project to work on it always let the project s owner know what you have done Build is an easy to use tool for building questionnaires that can be used with IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server for web based interviewing or with Paper for pen and paper based interviewing It has been designed for relatively small and simple questionnaires of up to 100 or so questions If you want to create larger or more complex questionnaires you should use other tools such as IBM SPSS Data Collection Base Professional Build breaks down the task of defining questions into the following stages basic advanced presentation and export and analysis This approach enables you to draft the basic outline of your questionnaire without having to define the detailed structure and content of each question unless of course you wish to do so At the basic level you define the question name a default is supplied the question text and if appropriate the list of responses from which choices may be made The advanced level allows you to complete the definitions by defining for example response types for single and multiple choice lists or valid ranges for numeric questions The presentation level currently applies only to Interviewer Server questionnaires and defines how the question should appear on the screen 10 Chapter 7 The export and analysis level lets
377. otosee alsoRouting goto s 54 Grid questions editing response subject list 65 HDATA unbounded loops 218 343 Hidden questions defining 19 24 28 33 39 hierarchical data 262 IBM SPSS Data Collection Activation Console Activation History tab 334 Filters tab 336 questionnaire 334 Settings tab 337 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server displaying a different language 3 localization 3 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration activate questionnaire to 302 334 IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup program adding tables 317 And operator in expressions 330 AnswerCount function 330 arithmetic operators in expressions 331 choosing working language 314 comparison operators in expressions 328 ContainsAll function 329 ContainsAny function 328 creating new files 313 defining table quotas 316 deleting expression 333 deleting tables 317 Details pane 309 Details Pane 310 displaying numeric text variables in List pane 310 displaying sample variables in List pane 310 displaying system variables in List pane 310 editing expression 332 expression quotas 318 323 327 expression advanced features 325 expressions containing two or more variables 325 expressions for boolean variables 325 expressions for categorical variables 324 expressions for numeric variables 325 expressions for text variables 325 Filter On dialog box 319 323 hiding components of IBM SPSS Data Collecti
378. ou can create a series of expressions for respondents in different age ranges Filter on the numeric variable Displays the variable that you dragged onto the Expression Quotas tab To use a different variable click the arrow and choose another from the drop down list 321 IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup Include cases where the value is Specifies how to determine which respondents belong in this quota Type an appropriate number in the box on the right m Less than The quota is for respondents who give an answer less than the specified value m Greater than The quota is for respondents who give an answer greater than the specified value m Equal to The quota is for respondents who give an answer that is the same as the specified value m Not equal to The quota is for respondents who give an answer that is not the same as the specified value m Less than or equal to The quota is for respondents who give an answer less than or equal to the specified value m Greater than or equal to The quota is for respondents who give an answer greater than or equal to the specified value Next Click to add another variable to the expression Finish Click to close the dialog box Cancel Click to close the dialog box and cancel the expression Filter on Text Variable Dialog Box Figure 2 5 Filter on Text Variable dialog box Filter on Text Variable Create the filter and press the Finish button If you want to filter on more
379. over to see a description of the error To save the contents of the message box to a file click Copy to Clipboard and then paste the clipboard into a file of your choice Click Proceed to continue activating or Cancel to stop Launch copies the project s htm xml mdd and mqd files as well as any image files into a subfolder within your UserName Temp folder This is a safety precaution that ensures that any changes made by other users to the User files during activation cannot affect the activation process Launch copies the files from UserName Temp folder into FMRoot Shared If an mdd file already exists in the shared project folder Launch merges the newer version of the file into the existing file and displays a progress box while this happens If the merge fails an error message is displayed Launch adds the datasource connection string for the project s case data to the mdd file Launch copies the project s folder from FMRoot Shared into FMRoot Master If an mdd file already exists in the shared project folder Launch merges the newer version of the file into the existing file Launch contacts each interviewing server and tells it to update its project files Each interviewing server responds by copying the new or updated files from the Master folder into the local project folder in INSTALL _FOLDER IBM SPSS DataCollection 6 Interviewer Server Projects The activation process checks that all interviewing servers have the sam
380. pants s answer or the answer was recorded automatically the following buttons will appear to allow you to listen to the recording Button Description yr Play the participant s answer o Stop playing the participant s answer Alternatively press Ctrl Shift P to play or stop playing the participant s answer Ending the Review The review ends normally when you reach or jump to the last question and press ENTER or click Next You might also be able end a review by pressing the ESC key or clicking the Stop button if there is one Alternatively your supervisor might ask you to reject interviews that do not meet certain standards To reject an interview and end the review click the Reject Interview button as shown below Figure 1 55 Reject Interview button At the end of the review if your next number is not selected automatically click Start Dialing or Next Contact if you want to make another call or Exit to close the Phone Participants activity Closing Phone Participants gt On the main screen click the Exit button as shown below Figure 1 56 Exit button Translating call outcomes codes The following instructions explain the process of providing translated call outcomes codes in the Phone Participants interface Note These instructions assume you have access to the IBM SPSS Translation Utility application Log into IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration
381. participants field is set to Passed while the denominator contains the respondents where the Screener field is either Passed or Failed Respondents whose eligibility cannot be evaluated will have Null in the Screener field The Screener field is defined in the interview script For more information see the topic Mapping Fields to Required Columns in the Sample Table on p 84 m Terminates Total number of interviews terminated as a result of the call outcome Stopped OverQuota or FailedScreener m System Terminates Total number of interviews terminated as a result of the call outcome Failed Fax WrongNumber Disconnected CellPhone BusinessNumber FastBusy PossibleWrongNumber DialerFailed Silent or NotAvailable m Other Terminates Total number of interviews terminated as a result of the call outcome Abandoned LanguageBarrier or TransferToWeb Dials Session Completes A Refusal s System Other be Completes per hour Appointments ree tan Incidence Terminates ee ae Interviewer ID DPMAdmin ieee Rel al A Note Refer to the Across project reports topic in the Data Collection Developer Library for more detailed information regarding across project reports 240 Chapter 7 Silent Call Statistics For projects that use an autodialer this report can be used to compare the number of silent calls with both the number of calls that were answered by participants shown as Connected calls and the total
382. ports 230
383. projects will display in the Activation History tab Activation date between Allows you to select an activation date range Only activations that occurred between the specified date will display in the Activation History tab 337 IBM SPSS Data Collection Activation Console gt Click Apply to save your settings Settings tab The Setting tab provides IBM SPSS Data Collection Activation Console configuration settings Activation status run option The drop down menu provides options for determining how the activation console will handle submitted activations m Start Activation Status when activation queued The Activation Console begins immediately after activations are added to the queue This is the default setting m Start Activation Console when my computer starts The Activation Console automatically begins when the computer is started m Start Activation Console manually The Activation Console is manually started Default date range Controls the date range that displays for the Activation date between fields on the Filters tab Activation message range Show activation notification When selected the Activation Console taskbar icon provides activation notification messages Activation auto refresh on off When selected the Activation History tab automatically refreshes based on the Activation auto refresh interval setting Play audible notification When selected the Activation Console taskbar icon provid
384. provided Time zone list The default time zone is GMT Greenwich Mean Time 265 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Filtering exported data The Filter Options section allows you to include only records that relate to a specific filter condition such as time period or survey status Export Data provides several preset filters that you can modify to suit your requirements as well as shortcuts to support filtering based on status and date time You can also create your own filters or delete preset filters that are no longer needed gt Select an appropriate filter preset from the Select a preset filter list You can create new modify existing or delete existing filters Refer to Edit Preset Filters dialog for information on creating modifying and deleting filters m View preset Click to display the filter expression for the selected preset filter m Hide preset Click to hide the filter expression for the selected preset filter m Edit presets Click to create a new modify an existing or delete an existing filter For more information see the topic Edit Preset Filters dialog on p 265 m Filter expression Displays the expression for the selected preset filter Click Edit Presets to modify the expression For more information see the topic Edit Preset Filters dialog on p 265 gt Under Select filtering based on data collection status choose Respondent data only Test data only or All data and the
385. qual to Numeric variables For example Expression Selects visits gt 5 Respondents for whom the visits numeric variable holds a value greater than 5 visits lt 5 Respondents for whom the visits numeric variable holds a value less than or equal to 5 Functions There are many functions that you can use to define Expression Quotas based on values in categorical variables The functions you are most likely to use for defining quotas are ContainsAny and ContainsAll for quotas based on subsets of responses from a multiple response list and AnswerCount for quotas based on the number of responses chosen from a list For information about the many other functions that are available refer to the Function Library documentation in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library ContainsAny Use the ContainsAny function to define a quota for respondents who have chosen any of a number of listed categories The categories can belong to a single response variable a multiple response variable or a grid subvariable The syntax is variable ContainsAny Categoryl_ID Category2_ID 329 IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup Note that the syntax uses the unique ID of the category rather than its label For example you might define the quota expression for young people as age ContainsAny E1720 years E2124 years This quota expression counts all respondents in the 17 20 years or 21 24 years categories Not
386. question must be Female The questions and answers that control an If Goto are commonly called the routing condition because they define the conditions under which the Goto will be followed 55 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide A routing condition can specify a single condition or a list of conditions If you specify more than one condition you must also specify how each condition relates to the next one in the list Conditions can be related to one another using And or Or Use And when respondents must satisfy both conditions use Or when respondents must satisfy at least one of the conditions The Advanced tab displays the routing condition as a text expression If you are familiar with the expression definition language you can make changes to the expression on this tab and will be able to use the full expression syntax to define more complex expressions than are possible on the Edit tab To Define Conditional Routing gt Click Insert Item This opens the New Item dialog box gt Select the Routing Items tab 3 New Item Web Page Dialog Questions note EI C it coto Bh C soto C Ext m Bookmark D C insert trom Script Library DD C iom Script advanced Import from Library gt Choose If Goto and click OK This displays the Edit tab for If Goto items Primary Language English United States If Goto If this condition is true o gender
387. quota database Note If you have changed quotas using the Quotas activity these changes will have been written to the quota database but will not appear in the project s mqd file If you choose to activate using the mqd file the changes you made with the Quotas activity will be lost If you want to keep these changes you will need to make them in the mqd file using Quota Setup before reactivating Defining Quota information gt On the Quota tab select Use Quota gt Click Browse and select the name of the project s quota database 114 Chapter 7 m If this is the first time this project has been activated with Quota Control switched on click Create New Quota The exception is when your project shares quotas with another project In this case if the shared quota database already exists select the quota from the list instead m If this project has been activated with Quota Control before select the name of the project s quota database from the list If you have changed the project s mqd file and you want to update the quota database with these changes click Resynchronize quota database with this project s mad Interview Web Pages Launch Launch Project Id TOTALAWARENESS Project Name TotalAwareness Description Please select the launch options you require 2 Co es Co ee Co If you deselect Use Default Web Pages on the Interview Web Pages tab you will be able to specify the names of your custom
388. r associated details are displayed on the main screen together with an introductory text to read to the participant Once you have made the call you will either start an interview or select a call outcome from a list of outcomes Some call outcomes will require you to enter additional information for example options to do with appointments prompt you to specify the appointment date and time When the interview is finished or you have selected a call outcome you can request another number to call The Auto contact selection check box will be checked if the project has been set up to automatically select your next contact as soon as you finish your current call When you reach the end of your shift or need to take a break you can click the Cancel Current Contact button This takes you to the standard page where you may choose Next Contact Specific Contact or Exit as appropriate If you cancel this option you will need to click the Next Contact button at the end of every call to request a new participant to call Your supervisor will tell you if you may do this 188 Chapter 7 You might be able to change the data in the Phone Number and Name fields if the current information is out of date Click edit next to the text box type the new details in the field and then click save For details of the keyboard shortcuts you can use to click buttons and select call outcomes see The Phone Participants main screen Requesting a number and
389. r example Queue equal to FAILED 99 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide oueue slfewalto IIFRESH or zl foue dfa ACTIVE for ouu fena iFateD Anor oee gt Click Apply to display the records that match your selection criteria To Display Records that Contain a Word or Phrase To display only records that contain a word or a phrase use the contains comparison in your selection criteria For example if your participant records include a Name field you can display all the participants whose surname is Smith by specifying Name contains Smith as your selection criteria Remember that if your sample database is case sensitive you must type the word or phrase so that its case matches the case of the data in the sample table Note The contains does not contain starts with does not start with ends with and does not end with comparisons use the Transact SQL LIKE operator which means that you can use wildcard characters in your search value Some examples of the use of wildcard characters are m which means any string of zero or more characters m _ an underscore which means any single character m abc which means any of the characters a b or c m w z which means any characters in the range w to z m de which means any character except d or e To search for an underscore specify _ an underscore enclosed in brackets To search for a percent specify
390. r or separately Administrators can set an interviewer s qualifications when they create Interviewer Server Administration accounts or interviewers may select their own qualifications at the start of each interviewing session or during a session Depending on how your company uses qualifications it may be appropriate for administrators to set some qualifications and for interviewers to be allowed to select others For example language or refusal conversion qualifications could be set by administrators while location qualifications that specify which region an interviewer should call could be set and changed by interviewers themselves If you want to allow interviewers to choose their own qualifications select Interviewer to select qualifications on the Interview Settings tab Then choose the qualifications that interviewers may select themselves Selecting the option but no qualifications is the same as not selecting the option at all Note Take care when choosing which qualifications interviewers may select as it is possible to allow interviewers to select qualifications they do not have For example suppose the administrator has created Sam s account with a French language qualification If you allow interviewers to set the language qualification Sam will be presented with the full list of languages and will be able to choose any combination of languages from that list Retrieving a Specific Participant To allow interviewers to ret
391. r such as a tab character as a field delimiter Click Load File and select the name of the file containing the participant records you want to load Warning Do not store your text file in your user s folder for the Interviewer Server project When you load your file Participants uses that location to save a temporary copy of your file with the same name as your file For security reasons Participants later deletes the temporary copy In Server to upload to select the server that contains the database of participant records or on which you want to create a new database The selection list shows the names of servers that are accessible from your current server If the server s name does not appear in the drop down list click Enter name and enter the name of the server when prompted to do so In Database on server for storing participant records select the name of the database you want to use Participants defaults to using the same database as you used before which is useful if you always load records into the same database If you want to create a new database click New and enter the database name when prompted to do so However you can create a new database only if you have been assigned the Participants activity feature Can create databases see Controlling Access to Data and Features for more information Note If you created a new database manually before opening Participants you must give the Interviewer Server A
392. r these fields The settings in this column also define the fields that interviewers can search when searching for a specific contact To allow interviewers to search for specific contacts you must select the Show Specific Contact option on the dialog Can Edit During Survey Determines which of the displayed fields interviewers can edit For the standard fields you can only change the settings for Return Time Interview Mode and Call Outcome Can Tabulate Specifies which fields should be available to the Phone activity The only standard field whose setting you can change is Try Count If your sample data includes a Segment field and you want to run the reports in the Phone activity that can display data about segments make sure that you select Can Tabulate for your Segment field For more information about segments Note If you are using interviewer qualifications to match interviewers language abilities to participants who speak those languages you might want to allow interviewers to edit the field that contains the participant s language In the event that the interviewer cannot speak the same language as the participant the interviewer can edit the language field and select the Language Recall call outcome An appointment will then be automatically scheduled with another interviewer whose qualification settings indicate that they can speak that language For more information about interviewer qualifications
393. reates a separate mdd file for them in the same location as the project s mdd and mqd files The new file is called tablename_sm mdd where tablename is the name of the sample table containing the sample records Note Most sample variables are not categorical variables and would not normally be visible in the List Pane so Quota Setup automatically selects the option to display all variable types in the List Pane when you display sample management variables To Display Sample Variables in the List Pane gt Choose File gt Open Sample Management This opens the IBM SPSS Data Collection Login dialog box Figure 2 1 Login dialog box e a Interviewer Server Administration Login la m Please enter your login details Destination Server or Interviewer Server URL http 60server spssmr dimensionnet default aspx X User name l Password Authentication Interviewer Server Authentication X J Login using my Windows account cesi gt Enter your login details If you are connected to your local network m Enter or select the name of the project management DPM server on the cluster to which the database server belongs The first time you use this login dialog the server s name is shown as localhost Thereafter it shows whatever machine name you entered the last time you logged in m Choose whether you will log in using your IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administratio
394. records for timed out or stopped Web interviews will not be called back Reject delay The number of minutes that must elapse between consecutive calls to a number that rejected a call Calls can be rejected if a mobile phone user has activated a meeting profile that rejects calls or if a home phone has been set to reject calls that do not also transmit the caller s telephone number The default is 1620 minutes or 27 hours 132 Chapter 1 Setting Description Silent appointment The number of minutes that must elapse between consecutive calls to a number that might have received a silent call Silent calls can occur when an autodialer generates more connected calls than there are interviewers available to handle the calls The default is 4320 minutes or 72 hours Note that when a silent call occurs the sample management script will change the value of the Queue field on the participant record to SILENT To ensure that the phone number will be recalled at the end of the delay the supervisor must change the value of Queue from SILENT to APPOINTMENT No preference for appointments Give preference to the interviewer who arranged the appointment Whether the Before an appointment setting applies to any available interviewer or only to the interviewer who arranged the appointment The default is that it applies to any available interviewer If instead you choose that it applies only to th
395. reject the interview the status of the interview will be defined as reviewed but not completed In addition the call outcome on the participant s sample record will be changed to RejectedByReviewer and the sample record will be moved to the UNUSABLE queue Click the Reject Interview button as shown below Figure 1 61 Reject Interview button 211 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide This rejects the interview and ends the review Use the options displayed in the center of the main screen to select another interview to review or click Exit to close the Review Interviews activity Note If you changed the answer to the currently displayed question before clicking the Reject Interview button your new answer will not be saved Closing Review Interviews gt On the main screen click the Exit button as shown below Figure 1 62 Exit button Quotas You use the Quotas activity to check and revise targets or to change the way quotas behave Starting Quotas gt Select the project whose quotas you want to work on and click Quotas The page displays a selection button for each quota in the questionnaire that is for each quota matrix defined in the project s mqd file and a drop down selection list from which you choose the type of changes if any that you want to make Checking Quotas When you check quotas the Quotas activity displays a table showing the current target for each cell and th
396. require one and whether the reports should use real or test data Starting Phone gt Select the project you want to work on and click Phone 253 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide This opens the Phone activity which displays a list of available reports on its Overview tab Figure 1 63 Selected Report Phone Reports Project Id BOBOCOUNT_CATI Project Name cati Description Select the report to view in the list below The selected report is displayed in the second tab Available Reports De Basah na Answer Time Distribution Answer time distribution for dialer calls le Ti Busy weit and idle time per interviewer Busy Wait and Idle Time Across Projects Busy wait and idle time across projects in last 8 hours Call Outcome Status Call outcomes chosen by interviewers Dialer Statistics Dialer statistics in last 8 hours Interviewer Statistics Connect time and call outcomes per interviewer Interviewer Statistics Across Projects Interviewer statistics across projects in last 8 hours Silent Call Statistics Silent calls as a percentage of connected and all auto dialed calls Sample Based oana Appointment Distribution Appointment distribution for the next 2 days Appointments Summary List appointments made by interviewers within a specified time period Call Outcome by Segment Call outcomes by Queue and Segment Calls by Segment Number of calls by Queue and Segment Incidence Statistics Interviewer statistics and sample
397. review only text questions including Other answers in multiple choice questions select Open ends only in the center of the main screen If you do not select this option you will be able to review all questions From the drop down list in the center of the main screen select the field that you want to use to search for an interview In the edit box type the value that you want to search for Enclose the value with to search for interviews that include comments for example 4964 Note You can add around Click Next to start the search 207 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide If an interview is found that matches your search criteria the questions asked in that interview will be listed on the left of the main screen If more than one matching interview is found the first interview s questions will be listed Note If the interview found is not the one you want you should accept the interview as described in Ending a Review as this will allow the interview to be reviewed again If no matching interview is found an error message will appear You can then modify the search criteria and click Next to search again Conducting a Review After you have selected an interview click on a question name on the left of the main screen to start the review Using the Keyboard or the Mouse Depending on the settings for the Review Interviews activity you might be able to conduct reviews using the
398. rieve specific participants from the sample database select Show Specific Contact button on the Interview screen on the Interview Settings tab The Specific Contact button on the main screen of the Phone Participants activity will then be usable When interviewers click that button they will be presented with a dialog box in which they can choose whether to retrieve their last contact or search for a contact If they choose to search for a contact they can select the field to search and specify the value to search for The choice of fields to search is determined by the settings in the Show column on the Define Fields tab 157 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Selecting the Next Contact Automatically When interviewers do not use an autodialer they need to click the Next Contact button to request their next contact If you would prefer that the next contact is retrieved automatically as soon as interviewers finish their current call select Automatically select next contact on the Interview Settings tab When interviewers need to take a break they may click the Cancel Current Contact button This takes them to the standard page where they may choose Next Contact Specific Contact or Exit as appropriate Interviewers working on projects with this option set will see a check box labeled Auto contact selection just above the list of call outcomes so it is still possible for some interviewers to work in fully manual
399. ritten to a zip file in your user folder The filename is InterviewExporter ProjectName DataType DateTime zip for example InterviewExporter test csv 20061120 1600 zip for a delimited text file for the test project exported at 4pm on 20 November 2006 You can export data in the following formats Delimited Text File Excel IBM SPSS Data Collection Data File supports hierarchical data Quantum Data File DAT SAS System File SPSS Statistics File SAV Triple S Data File Fixed or CSV Data Collection XML Data File supports hierarchical data You can calculate and then generate two extra data columns that contain the start and finish times for each case The start and finish times are based on the selected time zone of your choosing You can also include only records that relate to a specific filter condition such as time period or survey status Export Data provides several filters that you can modify to suit your requirements You can also create your own filters or delete filters that are no longer needed If you are exporting in delimited text format and the data contains categorical data you may choose between exporting category response names or values codes You can export the following types of data m Respondent data only that is data from live interviews m Test data only Both respondent and test data and can include all system variables only common system variables or no system variables at all You can al
400. rm prompting for basic information about the item The fields on the form will vary depending on the type of item you are creating but will always include a item name and for questions a question text Complete the fields on the form Click the Advanced tab The item definition form appears in its more detailed format showing other settings that you may define for the current item Some item types do not have advanced settings so in these cases the form that you see will be the same as the one you saw when you created the item Usually you will need to set advanced options for single response multiple response numeric and grid questions only On the Presentation tab specify how the question should be displayed during the interview Return to the Edit tab and click Insert Item when you are ready to start the next question Note Build saves your changes to the current item when you move to another item so there is no Save facility However if you are making a number of changes to a item you can click Apply to save the changes you have made so far 13 Item Names IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Build generates a unique name for every item you insert in the questionnaire If you insert items from a library file and an item in the library file has the same name as an item that already exists in the questionnaire Build automatically modifies the name of the incoming item so that it remains unique wi
401. roject Status gt To see the names of the names of the engines that are running a project s interviews click the plus button to the left of the engines count To return to the summary display click the minus button Refreshing the Report gt Click the Refresh button Manage Logs IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration and the activities and applications that run inside it create a number of log files that provide an audit trail of what each activity has done If you experience problems with IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server the IBM SPSS Data Collection administrator or a IBM Corp support representative will need to look at these files to find out what is causing the problems In a small installation where everything is installed on a single machine all the log files will be stored in a single folder and can be viewed easily using any text editor On clustered installations log files are created on each machine in the cluster which makes viewing them and matching up records between files quite difficult Manage Logs provides an easy method of viewing log files and can be used to create a zip file containing logs of your choice for sending to an IBM Corp support representative if you have problems that need investigation Note Although the primary purpose of log files is to record events some log entries may contain actual data or respondent details or references that enable dat
402. rojects that you cannot access the report shows a single Other Projects entry for those projects Interviewing Interview Engine Status Engine Status Shows the status of all interviewing engines and all the current load Project Status Interview Engine Status Report E 2 projects http KI BEN mrIEngWS1 y Active P2 Pi Other Projects http KI BEN mrlEngwS2 o Active 2 projects http KI CLOVER mrlEngWS1 o active i 4 projects http KI CLOVER mrlEngwS2 gt lt Failed 0 projects 295 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide The report uses two icons to mark engines whose load is high or excessively high i The engine s load is currently greater than 80 The engine can still function normally with this load but interviews may start to slow down is excessively high and interviews will not run as quickly as they should If you regularly see this icon in your reports tell your IBM SPSS Data Collection administrator as he she may be able to adjust the way in which interviews are allocated to session engines The engine s current load is greater than 95 This Note The load figures of 80 and 95 are defaults Your Data Collection administrator can tell you what the figures are for your site The report is a snapshot of activity at the point you request it Refresh the report periodically to see up to date figures To View the Engine Status Report gt In the Intervie
403. rom the command line This is useful in the following circumstances m You want to activate a number of projects but do not want to have to wait while each one is activated You want to activate to a number of clusters or servers m You want activation to run unattended and or at some time in the future The Activate Document Activation from the command line uses an Activate Document that specifies how the project is to be activated It contains the same information as you would normally enter using the Activate dialog box in IBM SPSS Data Collection Base Professional but in XML format This means that if you have a number of projects with identical or similar activation requirements you can create the Activate Documents by copying and editing an existing file 305 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide The easiest way to create an Activate Document from scratch is to fill in your requirements on the Activate dialog box and then save the specification to a file optionally without activating the project at all If you have pre version 2 3 activation ini files you can convert them into Activate Documents by running the ActivateIniToXml tool If you create a new Activate Document by copying and editing an existing one you need to check the settings that specify whether activation is over the local network or across the internet These settings are as follows lt xml version 1 0 gt lt Activate usewebse
404. rst version of it you should check it in then m Some activities check in copies of files from your Users folder to the Shared folder Nevertheless it is good practise always to check in all files that you want to make public when you have finished with them m The first time you work on a project the project becomes locked by you This means that although other users may be able to access the project s files for reading they cannot change them Typically all Interviewer Server activities are unavailable to other users of a project if the project is locked by you m Projects are not unlocked automatically You must unlock a project when you have finished working on it after you have checked in the latest files Do not unlock a project before you have checked in all its files as this may mean that other people who use the project will use old versions of the files which do not have your latest changes in them Do not keep a project locked longer than you need to as this prevents others from editing the files Note Some users may have permission to unlock projects that have been locked by other people If you have this permission always be very careful when unlocking other peoples projects especially of you are going to run activities that alter the project s files If you can it is a good idea to check with the user before unlocking the project particularly if you suspect that the user may be working on the project and may n
405. rt Note Appointment times are stored in UTC Start Date lt September End Date w T F 3 w m lool A inf z phon geg z Rje an ioe nn IE bo Ino j lan Ino io Ino N m cd Ino io Ino w N Ino eo Generate Report Report generation successful Appointments Summary im J m WO joo mg ho Ins 15 jn o Ie In lov ho Appointment Time in Number Respondent s Respondent s Time Z admin 9 29 2011 6 00 00 AM 011862968030290 9 29 2011 12 00 00 AM Central Standard Time admin 1041 9 30 2011 10 00 00 AM __011862968030290 9 30 2011 12 00 00 AM Hawaiian Standard Time Call Outcome by Segment A crosstabulation showing the number of calls for each combination of Queue the rows in the table and Call Outcome the columns Each cell contains a count and a column percentage For projects that use an autodialer the call outcomes include those selected by the autodialer and the table includes the autodialer specific queues called CHECK NUMBER and SILENT If the project s sample table contains segment information the data is further broken down by segment For more information see the topic About Segments on p 260 The example report below shows the data broken down by location which is one of the segments that the Phone activity recognizes 243 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Base Active Completed MAX_TRIES _Recall_ Stopped _ Timed out
406. rt the value of a Sample Management field or project property in the message text click in the text at the point you want to make the insertion then click Substitutions and choose the field or property you want to insert from the dialog box that is displayed The property name appears in the message text enclosed in curly brackets and will be replaced by the appropriate value when the message is sent In Send Email as choose either Plain text or HTML Note If you re using HTML format you ll need to include HTML formatting codes in the message text wherever you want line breaks or new paragraphs If you re sending the message in HTML format and you want to see what it will look like for recipients click Preview In Email address field select the Sample Management field that contains recipients Email addresses If you want to record the date and time at which the message was sent as part of each recipient s sample record do the following m Click Write date and time that email was sent to sample m Click Write into sample field named and choose the name of the sample field from the drop down list Note You must use this facility if you want to prevent the same message being sent to respondents more than once If the respondent is sent the same message more than once the date and time field information will be overwritten each time a new message is sent If you want to send a test message click Send test email Email use
407. rty above is set to 1 Parameters Before a recall DefaultCatiParameterRecallMarginBefore The number of minutes The installation value is 10 174 Chapter 1 Tab Name Tab Setting Corresponding Corresponding Valid Values DPM Collection DPM Property Parameters Any other setting DefaultCatiParameterfhe DPM property In general the on the Parameters tab not listed above names are very similar to the tab setting names valid values for a property are the same as the values that can be entered on the Parameters tab for the corresponding setting However for the PrioritizeRecalls and UselnterviewerQuali properties enter 1 to select the check box on the Parameters tab or 0 to clear the check box fications Call Outcomes Text Expand the Text A string value that DefaultCatiSample describes the call RecReturnCodes outcome collection and in the left pane click the call outcome required Call Outcomes Show When DefaultCatiProjectPrdpertmesgCodesList One or more call Interview Running outcome code numbers separated by semicolons Call Outcomes Show Appointment DefaultCatiProjectProfppoaatmentCode One or more call Page outcome code numbers separated by semicolons Call Outcomes Cancel Code DefaultCatiProjectPrdpantiebCode A call outcome code number Call Outcomes Confirm Hangup Outcomes DefaultCatiProjectPropertigm HangupOutqd
408. rvice False webserviceurl gt lt ActivateSettings gt lt Sites gt lt Site dpmservername MyDPMServer username userticket gt lt Site gt lt Site gt lt ActivateSettings gt lt Activate gt This example is set up for activation over a local network To activate across the internet change usewebservice to True and webserviceurl to the URL for IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration on the destination server If dpmservernanme is not defined it defaults to the DPM server set on the machine running the accessories service Activating Projects You activate projects from the command line by running the Activate program in either console or dialog box mode In both cases you will need to run the command from C Program Files Common Files IBM SPSS DataCollection 6 Interviewer Server 5 6 In console mode activation is based solely on the contents of the Activate Document named on the command line and is ideal for activating remotely or on an unattended machine To activate in this mode type activate a actdoc u username t ticketname r c 1 Optional parameters are as follows Option Description a actdoc Names the Activate Document u username The user name to use for activating the document If none is specified the activation process will use the name specified in the Activate document It is recommended that names are not stored in Activate docum
409. rview Settings Dialer Settings BESARTA Manage Phone Survey Project Id UPLOADSAMPLE Project Name UploadSample Description Call Outcomes E Code Name Show During Interview Show Appointment Cancel Code Always Hidden Completed Completed Stopped Timed out or stopped Failed Error during interview OverQuota Over quota EarlyComplete Early complete FailedScreener Failed screener Abandoned Abandoned Reviewed Reviewed Appointment Appointment NoAnswer No answer AnswerMachine Answering machine Busy Busy TransferToWeb Transfer to web Rejected Rejected NetworkBusy Network busy You can make the following changes to the list Add new codes m Delete codes m Change code numbers names and texts m Select codes that must be available while interviews are in progress for example an Abandoned Interview code that can be selected if a participant starts an interview but then refuses to complete it m Specify which codes should prompt the interviewer to arrange a callback appointment with the participant When interviewers select one of these outcomes they will prompted to enter a callback date and time m Specify which code should be used for canceled calls Canceled calls occur when an interviewer is presented with a number to call manually but clicks Cancel Contact rather than making the call This returns the participant record to the Sample Management system with the appropriate code so that the record can be returned
410. rviewer Server Administration run Export Data to export the data Advanced Options The Interviewer Server Administration Export Data dialog displays when you click Advanced from Export Data The dialog provides the following options 268 Chapter 1 Connection Properties tab Note The Connection Properties tab is only visible if you are assigned the canAlterConnectionProperties feature for the Export Data activity Refer to Assigning users or roles to activity features topic in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration User s Guide for more information on activity features The Connection Properties tab provides inputs for custom properties allowing you to define the mr Init Custom portion of both the input and output connection strings 215 222 SPSSMR Inter viewExporter AdvancedDialog aspx path 3CUserFolder 3E Projects MUSEU Input MR Init Custom Allows you to define the MR Init Custom portion of input connection string Output MR Init Custom Allows you to define the MR Init Custom portion of output connection string Refer to the Connection Properties topic in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library for more information regarding MR Init Custom connection properties 269 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide MDM Properties tab The MDM Properties tab provides more control over the type of data that is exported by allowing you to specify whic
411. s Tonga Standard GMT 13 00 300 Time Nukuw alofa Azores Standard GMT 01 00 80 Time Azores Cape Verde GMT 01 00 Capg 83 Standard Time Verde Is Mid Atlantic GMT 02 00 75 Standard Time Mid Atlantic Argentina Standard GMT 03 00 2147483572 Time Buenos Aires 136 Chapter 1 Setting Description E South America GMT 03 00 65 Standard Time Brasilia SA Eastern GMT 03 00 70 Standard Time Buenos Aires Georgetown Greenland Standard GMT 03 00 73 Time Greenland Montevideo GMT 03 00 2147483575 Standard Time Montevideo Newfoundland GMT 03 30 60 Standard Time Newfoundland Atlantic Standard GMT 04 00 50 Time Atlantic Time Canada Central Brazilian GMT 04 00 2147483576 Standard Time Manaus SA Western GMT 04 00 55 Standard Time Caracas La Paz Pacific SA Standard GMT 04 00 56 Time Santiago Venezuela Standard GMT 04 30 2147483573 Time Caracas SA Pacific Standard GMT 05 00 45 Time Bogota Lima Quito Eastern Standard GMT 05 00 35 Time Eastern Time US and Canada US Eastern GMT 05 00 40 Standard Time Indiana East Central America GMT 06 00 33 Standard Time Central America Central Standard GMT 06 00 20 Time Central Time US Canada Central Standard GMT 06 00 2147483581 Time Mexico Guadalajara Mexico City Monterrey Mexico Standard GMT 06 00 30 Time Guadalajara Mex
412. s numeric values and numeric expressions all joined by arithmetic operators Operator Operation Description Addition Use to add numeric values numeric variables or numeric expressions Subtraction Use to subtract one numeric value numeric variable or numeric expression from another such value variable or expression 332 Chapter 2 Operator Operation Description Division Use to divide one numeric value numeric variable or numeric expression by another such value variable or expression t Multiplication Use to multiply two numeric values numeric variables or numeric expressions For example the following expression defines the quota characteristics for respondents who visited the museum more than five times prior to the year the survey was conducted visits visits12 gt 5 visits and visits 2 are both numeric variables visits records the total number of previous visits each respondent made to the museum and visits 12 records the number of visits each respondent made in the previous 12 months This expression subtracts the number of visits made in the previous 12 months from the total number of visits and selects respondents for whom the result is greater than 5 Operator Precedence in Expression Quotas When there is more than one operator in an expression they are evaluated in a set order known as the order of precedence The order of precedence in
413. s folder and displays a message to this effect gt Click OK to close the message box The name of the presentation template file is displayed in the Presentation Style box gt Click Apply To Set Export and Analysis Options gt Select the Export Analysis tab Figure 1 7 Export Analysis tab Project Buildtest T bhorton These settings will apply when the collected data is downloaded using the Export Data activity or when the data is analyzed using the Tabulation activity To change the current settings for a question select the question from the list on the left and change the options in the table below Elntimes Apply Undo Question Text ee many times did you use the following leisure facilities during your stay fesponse Text fin the morning fin the afternoon fin the evening Subject Text Variable Labels Bwm ET bm o o pE E E Update Grid Variable Labels Previous gt In Response Text type the texts you want to use as the response texts for the grid gt In Subject Text amend the subject texts as necessary gt Ifyou want the changes to be saved in the mdd file click Update Grid Variable Values Question Limits The following table describes the limits that apply when defining or responding to a question Question Type Limits Long also known as Integer The minimum value is 2 147 483 648 and the maximum value is 2 147 483 647 42 Chapter 1 Question Type Limits Double
414. s or combinations of questions in the questionnaire In a soft drinks survey for example you may want to have one quota based on age and gender and then further on in the questionnaire a quota based on the type of soft drink that respondents usually drink Either click Add Table or choose the New tab at the foot of the Quota Construction Area Select the quota variables and define the targets For more information see the topic Defining Table Quotas on p 316 Deleting Table Quotas gt gt gt Choose the tab for the quota you want to delete Click Delete Table Confirm your request when prompted to do so Note Deleting quota tables from IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup does not delete the tables from the Quota database Instead the tables are flagged as Inactive so that they are ignored by the quota control system 318 Chapter 2 Expression Quotas The Expression Builder lets you define quotas by creating expressions that describe the characteristics of each quota You can create Expression Quotas using any types of variables but they are particularly useful for quotas based on numeric text or boolean variables because these types of quotas cannot be defined in quota tables File Edit View Tools Help o wh sis quota3 Expressions Description sejond uoisseidxg 9Ssejond s1qeL To understand more about how Expression Quotas work consider a simple Table Quota for g
415. s than gt not greater than lt gt not equal to or not equal to You can also specify the Transact SQL LIKE operator which will allow you to include wildcard characters in your value Some examples of wildcard characters are which means any string of zero or more characters _ an underscore which means any single character E m abc which means any of the characters a b or c m w z which means any characters in the range w to z E de which means any character except d or e value 104 Chapter 1 Specifies a value with the same data type as the column If the column is a text or datetime column enclose the value in single quotation marks If a text value contains double byte characters add the capital letter N before the opening single quotation mark to specify that the value is Unicode If the column is a datetime column the value must be in one of three formats yyyy mm dd yyyy mm dd hh mi or yyyy mm dd hh mi ss If you specify only the date a time of 00 00 00 is assumed Note Depending on the sample database that you are using text searches might be case sensitive If so you must type text values so that they match the case of the data in the sample table For example queue names such as COMPLETED must always be typed in upper case An expression can also be of the following form column_name IS NOT NULL Your selection criteria can consist of two or more expressions or
416. s the information on this tab as the content of the message and attempts to send it to the user named on the Email jobs list page It tells you whether or not the attempt was successful Select the Participants tab 126 Chapter 1 e Email settings Web Page Dialog fo e A ziri s Hendon selected Ani messege Cann BES Er 2 JamisiJane ara bleh Jea OK Caneel gt In Choose queues select the queues from which recipients may be chosen Note The list of queue names shows only queues that contained sample records at the time the mrDPMServer3 service was started This may mean that the list shows out of date information for example because records have been moved into a queue that was previously empty or because a queue that contained records is now empty To see an up to date list of queues you may need to ask your IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server administrator to stop and restart the mrDPMServer3 service gt To restrict your selections even further do the following m In Choose additional field to be used for participant selection choose a field The list shows all fields in the sample table except Queue m In Choose additional values to be used for participant selection choose the values that the field must contain in order for respondents to be selected The list shows all values present in the chosen field gt Either choose All participants or do the following m Click Se
417. s to your questions regarding viewing and navigating the documents Notice IBM SPSS Data Collection offers many powerful functions and features for use in the business of our customers IBM is not responsible for determining the requirements of laws applicable to any licensee s business including those relating to Data Collection Program nor that IBM s provision of or any licensee s receipt of the Program meets the requirements of such laws All licensees shall comply with all laws applicable to use and access of the Program whether such use or access is standalone or in conjunction with any third party product or service About IBM Business Analytics IBM Business Analytics software delivers complete consistent and accurate information that decision makers trust to improve business performance A comprehensive portfolio of business intelligence predictive analytics financial performance and strategy management and analytic applications provides clear immediate and actionable insights into current performance and the ability to predict future outcomes Combined with rich industry solutions proven practices and professional services organizations of every size can drive the highest productivity confidently automate decisions and deliver better results As part of this portfolio IBM SPSS Predictive Analytics software helps organizations predict future events and proactively act upon that insight to drive better business outcomes
418. s with specific requirements to interviewers with the appropriate qualifications Reschedule missed appointments Ensure that records are selected in a particular order of priority for example appointments arranged with participants then appointments that have been set automatically and finally new records Dispose of records that become ineligible for use due to being called too many times The Sample Management script needs to have certain information in order to accomplish these tasks For example to set appointment times automatically it needs to know how much time must elapse between the previous call and the appointment The settings you can define are as follows the Sample Management script will use defaults for any settings that you do not define Setting Description No answer delay The number of minutes that must elapse between consecutive calls to an unanswered number The default is 30 minutes Busy delay The number of minutes that must elapse between consecutive calls to a busy number The default is 30 minutes Answer machine delay The number of minutes that must elapse between consecutive calls to a number that was answered by an answering machine The default is 30 minutes Web callback delay The number of minutes that must elapse before a record that timed out or was stopped during a self completion Web interview may be called using telephone interviewing The default is zero which means that
419. screen Custom Properties ShowSpecificContac tBnttoor False The installation value is True Interview Settings Interviewer must manually select an option Default setting is monitoring recordin prohibited Default setting is monitoring recordin allowed Custom Properties tio MonitoringA pproval DefanttOyeromewer must manually select an option 1 for Default setting is monitoring recordinlg prohibited or 2 for Default setting is monitoring recordin allowed The installation value is 0 va Interview Settings Review interview options Custom Properties ReviewInterviewOpt iOrfor No Review 1 for Review Interview or 2 for Review Open ends The installation value is 0 Interview Settings Show review button on interviewer screen Interviewer must review Custom Properties ShowReviewIntervigWCptidishow review button on interviewer screen or for Interviewer must review The installation value is 0 Interview Settings Introduction to Survey Labels Text A string defining the introductory script 172 Chapter 1 Adding a Field to catifields_default mdd Start MDM Explorer and open catifields_default mdd as described in Changing the Settings in catifields_default mdd above In MDM Explorer s left pane click the Fields collection From th
420. se to Answer for each response 44 Chapter 7 gt To associate a picture with a response do the following m Click the button to the right of the Picture box for that response m On the Select page locate the image file and then click Select For more information see the topic Copying Pictures and Presentation Templates on p 50 The name of the image file is displayed in the Picture box To define factors for use when the questionnaire data is tabulated type a number in the Factor box for each response Factors may be positive or negative real or integer values You can add new responses to the list delete responses or alter the order of responses in the list using the options above the response list For more information see the topic Editing Response and Subject Lists on p 65 Using Shared Lists in Questions When you insert a shared response list in a question bear in mind the following m The responses are inserted as a single entity and cannot be edited individually The response lines are greyed out and a single entry containing the list name appears above the list so that you can move or delete the list as a whole If you want to change a response text you must make the change in the shared list item but bear in mind that this change will also affect any other questions that use the shared list m The only changes you can make to individual responses once they have been inserted in a question is to assign pictur
421. sh For more information see the topic Changing Quota Targets Behavior Flags and or Cell Priorities on p 212 To Set Priorities Click the button for the quota you want to prioritize In the Edit box choose Prioritization The Prioritization dialog box is displayed In Prioritization choose the type of prioritization you want to set In Number of cells type the number of cells you want to prioritize This option is not appropriate for Normal prioritization so it is greyed out Click OK The quota status report is displayed If you chose Priority pending the right most box for each cell will contain a number zero if priority pending has not been set for this cell before In these boxes type the relative priority of each cell For example type for the cell with the highest priority 2 for the cell with the next highest priority and so on 216 Chapter 1 Prioritization Review Quotas travel Internet July 19 2006 09 59 04 Prioritization Priority 3 cells limit apua 3 amp gt o o D GA 2 3 2 S 2 o D n a Target Type Priovity Complete Complete Pending Pending gt Click Update to update the quota database Status Note Any changes that you make are replicated in the quota tables in the database but not in the project s mqd file If you later reactivate the project and you choose the option to update the quota tables with the informatio
422. she must either confirm the position name entered by the previous user or enter a new position name 289 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide For more information about assigning to the activity feature Can set up supervisor stations search the Interviewer Server Administration User s Guide for the topic Assigning Users or Roles to Activity Features Connecting to and disconnecting from an autodialer Dialer Administration The table below is an overview of the current state of the dialers To start stop or delete a dialer select the dialer and then choose the appropriate action icon Dialerd Active Total Interviewers 7 No Errors Dialer2 Stopped Total Interviewers 0 No Errors You can use the Dialer Administration main screen to carry out the following tasks Connect to an autodialer so that it is able to generate calls for telephone interviewers Disconnect from an autodialer so that it is no longer able to generate calls Remove an autodialer from the Dialer Administration activity Check the status of an autodialer Note To use an autodialer you also need to specify for each of your telephone interviewing projects that an autodialer should be used For more information see Interview Settings The real time display The real time display contains one record for each autodialer and shows information such as the number of active calls on an autodialer or the number of times t
423. so choose which types of data variables to export for example categorical and numeric variables but not text boolean or date variables You can export data with any combination of the following interview statuses Completed successfully Active in progress Timed out Stopped by the script Stopped by the respondent Interview system shutdown Terminated by a signal from the questionnaire script Reviewed 262 Chapter 1 Finally you can choose to export data gathered before or after a specific date time or select a date time range An advanced option is available for users who want more control over the export process Export Data does not normally export dirty data but can be configured to do so Speak to your IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server administrator if you need to export dirty data Starting Export Data gt Select the project whose data you want to export and click Export Data Exporting Data The main Export Data page is where you define the data format that you want to use for the output data file and the type of data you want to export to that file 263 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Export Data Export to Delimited Text File Excel iy File type CSV File csv v AE English United States x Srn vasiables Common a Variable types AIl iv Oo Output category name rather than value for delimited text file F Generate extra
424. splays End of interview Thank you for your participation Note that if the interview ends with a display statement this text is displayed as the last page of the interview instead Survey Stopped Page The page to display when the participant stops an interview or the interview is stopped by a stop or signal statement in the script There is no default page but Interviewer Server itself displays End of interview Thank you for your participation Survey Rejected Page The page to display when a participant fails authentication and no retry prompt is required for example when the participant fails quota control The default is a template called rejected htm that displays the message Thank you for your interest in participating in this survey Project Inactive Page The page to display when the participant attempts to start an interview for an inactive project The default is a template called projinactive htm that displays the message Please come back later Quota Full Page The page to display when an interview is terminated because the respondent belongs in a category whose quota target has already been met Note You can specify all pages except Authentication and Authentication Retry as templates or URLs For these two pages we strongly recommend using only templates as URLs can result in an interview having two connections IDs If you specify a page as a template the file must be present in the project s sourc
425. sponse When you resume monitoring and if the interview is still in progress your screen will refresh to show the current question being asked You cannot choose which questions to view Note You can monitor interviewers even when the interviewer selects No for the Contact agrees to be monitored and recorded option in Phone Participants This setting controls when the interview should not be monitored by external parties not when the interview can be reviewed by a supervisor Audio Monitoring If an interviewer is using an autodialer to make calls and your station is connected to the same autodialer you can listen to the interview as well as watch it You will hear both the interviewer and the participant Note Depending on the settings for the project that you are monitoring interviews might also be recorded and saved to sound files For more information see Autodialer Settings Selecting an Interviewer to Monitor In the Interviewers Real Time display an icon is displayed to the left of each interviewer to indicate whether monitoring is possible Each icon is described in the following table Icon Description 9 Both visual and audio monitoring are possible No icon displayed Only visual monitoring is possible P Another supervisor is monitoring this interviewer 8 Either the participant did not give his or her consent to be monitored or the project settings specify that monitoring is never allowed However as
426. sponse in the list appears first Use the Display Responses boxes if you want to filter the response list based on the respondent s answers to previous related questions m In the first box choose one of All Responses Chosen or Not Chosen m In the second box choose the question whose answer controls the responses to be displayed for the current question m When prompted confirm that the responses defined for the chosen question the parent question may overwrite the response list for the current question Note This facility requires that the response list to the current question remains identical to the response list for the chosen question To achieve this Build makes the response list for the current question read only greyed out and prevents you changing it Any changes that you make to the response list in the parent question automatically appear in the response list to the current question In the Responses section in the Type column choose one of Single Response Multiple Response Don t Know No Answer or Refuse to Answer for each response If a response is to be treated as a Specified Other response click its Other check box During interviews respondents can select this response to give an answer that does not appear in the category list To define routing for a response select the routing destination from the GoTo dropdown list for that response If you want to skip forwards in the questionnaire you must def
427. ss of the activation activity When the process is complete the message box displays a URL that you can use for running test interviews on this project Click Copy to Clipboard to copy to URL onto your clipboard Start a new browser session and paste the URL into the Address box to run an interview When you have finished testing click Close to close the message box Making the Questionnaire Live Use Build s Go Live option to make the project available for live interviewing When you select this option the following actions take place m The Launch activity activates the project with the Active status m A dialog box displays the URLs to use for test or running live interviews 71 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Note If the questionnaire was created in IBM SPSS Data Collection Author with the default context of routing when new questions are created in Build the context paper is automatically created The paper context includes questions created in both Author and Build When you activate the questionnaire routing is selected as the default context Unless you manually change the context to paper the activated questionnaire will not include those questions created in Build To Make the Questionnaire Live gt Choose Tools gt Activate gt Go Live A message box reports the progress of the activation activity When the process is complete the message box displays two URLs One is for run
428. st interview click Copy to Clipboard next to the URL for designers who want to test their questionnaires You can then pate this URL into a new browser window to test the questionnaire Click Close Window Notes The NET Framework s default encoding reads the registry s ANSI codepage when encoding As a result you may encounter errors when activating questionnaires that include characters such as umlauts for example when the project name contains the character A You can resolve this issue by updating the server s ANSI codepage Access the registry on the server Start gt Run gt regedit Navigate to HKEY LOCAL _MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Control Nls CodePage ACP For servers running a German operating system enter a value of 850 for Chinese enter a value of 936 for Japanese enter a value of 932 Refer to Encoding Class Attp msdn microsoft com en us library system text encoding aspx on the Microsoft MSDN site for more information Promote Project You use Promote Project when you want to activate a project from one cluster to another This might be required where you have separate clusters for test and production work You create and test projects on the test cluster and then activate them to the production cluster when the project is ready to go live Since activation is usually between clusters on different sites you may hear this type of activation referred to as site to site activation You can also use Pro
429. stem variables contain general information about an interview as a whole and include such things as the time at which the interview started and ended the interview status code and the interview serial number Survey Results displays this option only if IncludeSystem Variables is set to True within the metadata document Display other specify variables These variables contain response texts entered using an Other specify response in a single or multiple choice list Display coding variables These variables contain the codes assigned to a question s text and other specify responses during coding Display source file variables These variables contain the names of files containing handwritten or spoken responses for a given question Display multiplier variables These variables contain numeric values associated with specific questions When cases are counted in a table the cell counts are normally incremented by 1 for each case present in the cell If cell counts are to be incremented by a value other than 1 a multiplier variable will exist for the question specifying the value by which cells are to be incremented for each case Refer to the IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library for further information about these variable types It is available as a free download from http www ibm com software analytics spss products data collection The Labels section determines what types of labels are shown and how they are shown m
430. sting autodialer that has the same name as an entry in the file will be overwritten m An existing autodialer that does not have the same name as any entry in the file is unaffected that is it is not removed To remove an autodialer see Connecting to and disconnecting from an autodialer m Any existing autodialers that are to be overwritten must be in the Stopped or Failed state otherwise the import will fail Importing a dialer configuration file gt Make sure that any existing autodialers that are to be overwritten are in the Stopped or Failed state gt At the top of the Dialer Administration main screen click the Import button as shown below The Upload Files dialog box opens gt Click Browse and select the file that you want to import gt On the Upload Files dialog box click Upload 287 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide The dialer entries in the configuration file are validated and imported The real time display is refreshed and any new or updated autodialers are shown However if the validation failed the import stops and an error message is displayed Setting up stations to use an autodialer If one or more autodialers have been added to the Dialer Administration activity every telephone interviewer station that is any computer on which the Phone Participants activity will be used must be assigned one of the position names that you defined in your dialer configuration file W
431. subsequently use the station and who have not been assigned Can set up interviewer stations will not be prompted for a position name m By the interviewer Assign the Phone Participants activity feature Can set up interviewer stations to telephone interviewers Every time that an interviewer opens Phone Participants he or she must either confirm the position name entered by the previous user or enter a new position name Depending on your requirements you can use the same method for all interviewers or use the first method for some interviewers and the second method for others For more information about assigning to the activity feature Can set up interviewer stations search the JBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration User s Guide for the topic Assigning Users or Roles to Activity Features Stations with unrecognized position names When a position name is entered in Phone Participants Interviewer Server validates the name against those defined in the Dialer Administration activity If Interviewer Server does not recognize the name the station cannot use autodialing 288 Chapter 7 For projects that use an autodialer you can specify whether stations with unrecognized positions can still be used to conduct interviews that is Phone Participants will still open If so manual dialing must be used on those stations For more information see Autodialer Settings Stations used for
432. swer again When answering multiple choice questions be aware of the following Some multiple choice questions that allow multiple answers might include answers that are shown in bold text These answers cannot be combined with any other answer in the list m Ifthe list contains an answer called Other followed by a text box first select the answer and then type the words in the text box For interviews that require the keyboard only the cursor will automatically move to the text box when you select the answer m Ifthe response list is shown as a grid of single choice or multiple choice answers you must select an answer for each question in the grid Usually the questions are the rows of the grid and the answers are the columns but this is not always so Numeric Text Date Time and Yes No questions In addition to multiple choice questions you might also see questions that require numeric text date time or boolean yes or no answers 197 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Numeric Questions Questions that have numeric answers can be set up to accept only whole numbers or only real decimal numbers If the question requires a real response you must always enter a decimal point and at least one decimal place even if the answer is a whole number Questions that have numeric answers might specify a range of valid answers and will reject answers outside of this range Text Questions
433. t Continue selecting variables and positions until the table specification is complete If you make a mistake and want to clear the specification and start again click Clear Table gt Click Tabulate The Build Table window closes and the table is displayed on the main screen Amending Tables If you have a table displayed on the main screen and you click on a categorical variable in the Question List Survey Results replaces the side of that table with the selected variable If you choose Build Table without clearing the current table the current table is preserved and you can add to it If you want to make a completely new table you must clear the current table first Refreshing Table Refresh Table refreshes the table by rerunning it against the data To Refresh the Table gt Select Actions gt Refresh Table Clearing Tables Clear Table clears the current table without cancelling any filters that were applied to the table To Clear the Current Table gt Select Clear gt Clear Table Filters Filters limit the cases that are summarized in tables by excluding cases that do not match the filter specification For example a filter of Gender Female will include women and exclude men and anyone who did not answer the question 224 Chapter 1 You can also filter tables based on interview status This allows you to exclude interviews with certain statuses from the tables For example you might want to exclude all interv
434. t Calls Percentage To set a project s silent calls figure to zero open the Phone Surveys activity for the project and click the Reset Statistics button on the Dialer Settings tab For more information see Autodialer Settings 284 Chapter 7 Dialer Administration You use the Dialer Administration activity to allow your telephone interviewing projects to use an autodialer An autodialer is a computer that automatically dials the phone numbers of participants to generate calls for interviewers Your call center might use one or more autodialers IBM SPSS Data Collection supports the IBM SPSS Data Collection Dialer and QTC autodialers For more information about how IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server interfaces with an autodialer search the IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library documentation for the topic The Dialer Interface Component Using an autodialer involves the following steps 1 Creating a dialer configuration file which contains one entry for each autodialer and one entry for each station that will use an autodialer 2 Importing the dialer configuration file into the Dialer Administration activity 3 Inputting a position name on each station which will allow the autodialer to identify the station 4 Connecting to the autodialer so that it is able to generate calls for interviewers You can also use the Dialer Administration activity to monitor the number of active calls on each autodialer
435. t an existing Date Filter or Sample filter from the provided drop down lists as shown below No limit To enter your own date and time range select Other from the Date Filter list and then specify the start and end dates and times using the drop down lists Note that the start and end times refer to times in the Interviewer Server server s local time zone which might not be the same as your local time zone To specify that no filtering is required select No limit For more information about creating your own filters see Filtering Reports 260 Chapter 7 Note The filter that you have selected will apply to all the reports that you choose to download except for the Appointments Summary report If you download that report the Phone activity will prompt you to enter a time period gt From the Phone activity menu choose Tools gt Download gt Selected Reports This opens the Download Selected Reports dialog box as shown below Answer Time Distribution o Appointment Distribution o Appointments Summary C Busy Wait and Idle Time o Busy Wait and Idle Time Across Projects O Call Outcome by Segment O Call Outcome Status o Calls by Segment Dialer Statistics O Incidence Statistics gt Select the reports that you want to download and click OK gt Some reports prompt for additional information as follows m For the Review Calls report select the variables that are to form the side and top of the table from t
436. t having to select an answer You will not see the No Answer category until your screen is refreshed for example when you change tabs At this point Build also displays a message telling you that it has added No Answer If you set this option to Yes and then edit the question later on and change this option to No Build does not automatically remove No Answer If you want to disallow No Answer response you must delete it yourself gt In Hide this question choose No if the question should be displayed to the respondent If this is a dummy question that is to exist in the questionnaire but not be displayed to respondents choose Yes Typically the responses to hidden questions are set by statements defined in IOM Script items They provide an efficient method of merging the responses to a number of related questions 40 Chapter 7 gt into a single variable for use elsewhere in the questionnaire For this reason the response list for the hidden question often consists of all the responses to the questions that are to be merged Note Because they are not displayed hidden questions are not valid in question groups In Grid Layout choose how the grid will be structured Choose Arrange subjects in columns to have the subjects as the columns and the responses as the rows Choose Arrange subjects in rows to have the subjects as the rows of the grid and the responses as the columns This is the default In Response Order choose t
437. t key while you type the number A special response to a numeric text date time or Ctrl Shift n where n indicates the nth special yes no question response shown on the screen For example Ctrl Shift 2 for the 2nd special response A question that does not require an answer but It is not possible to use the keyboard to play a sound simply contains other questions for this type of question you must use the mouse 199 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Note For some browsers pressing the keyboard shortcut alone will perform the action For other browsers you might have to press Enter after pressing the keyboard shortcut If more than one question is displayed on the screen make sure that you move the cursor to the question with the Play and Stop buttons before you press the keyboard shortcuts Recording the participant s answer If the project you are working on uses an autodialer some questions might require you to record the participant s answer to an audio file You might be required to do this in addition to typing the answer or choosing an answer from a list The question text will normally indicate that you must record the participant s answer after you have asked the question In addition the following buttons will appear close to the question text Button Description Record the participant E Stop recording the participant You can click
438. t question When prompted confirm that the responses defined for the chosen question the parent question may overwrite the response list for the current question Note This facility requires that the response list to the current question remains identical to the response list for the chosen question To achieve this Build makes the response list for the current question read only greyed out and prevents you changing it Any changes that you make to the response list in the parent question automatically appear in the response list to the current question In the Responses section in the Type column choose one of Single Response Multiple Response Don t Know No Answer or Refuse to Answer for each response To associate a picture with a response do the following m Click the button to the right of the Picture box for that response m On the Select page locate the image file and then click Select For more information see the topic Copying Pictures and Presentation Templates on p 50 The name of the image file is displayed in the Picture box To Set Presentation Options 35 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Primary Language English United States lrating Apply Undo Page Presentation Style B Previous Next Insert tem gt Click the image next to the empty Presentation Style box gt On the Select page locate the Atm file and click Select Build copies the file to the My Pr
439. t table For example UPDATE ParticipantTable SET Queue FRESH WHERE Queue REPLICATE1 This can be performed in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server s Participants activity You can report on Queue by any other field For example a report of Queue by Region would show how many records are available in each replicate as well as all the other queues for each Region Force Preview Dial National or state regulations may require that certain numbers cannot be auto dialed cell phone numbers for example The Force Preview Dial feature forces the interviewer to manually select the dial button for specific participant records thus avoiding silent calls Configuring a participant records sample The following instructions explain the process of configuring participant records for Force Preview Dial m Edit the participant records file to include the RequiresManualDial field and specify a value of 1 for each record that requires manual dialing For example Id name region password RequiresManualDial 001 Benjamin Brown South East pry6354 1 002 Veronica Burr Midlands qre9510 1 003 Rebecca Noakes West mtev037 1 For more information see the topic Participant File Format on p 81 When the participant records file is uploaded via the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server s Participant activity all records that have a value of 1 for the RequiresManualDial field will require the interviewer to manually initiate di
440. t to rate a number of brands the brands are the subjects and the ratings which are the same for all brands are the responses The facilities for editing responses and subjects are the same Each response or subject has a text and a name The text is the text that you specify when you add the response or subject to the question and it is what appears in the questionnaire that is used for interviewing The same text can appear in a number of different questions The name is a label that uniquely identifies a particular text Build generates these labels automatically basing them on the response or subject text The labels are used as variable names for storing data in the case data file to ensure that variables responses and subjects are consistent across different versions of the script Any response that has the same name in all versions of a questionnaire is treated as being the same response even if the response texts have changed between versions For example if version 1 of the questionnaire has the response text Red with the name Red and you change the response text to Reddish colors there is no need to change the name in version 2 because this is still the same response However if you replace Red with 66 Chapter 1 Blue you must also change the name to Blue otherwise the interviewing and analysis activities will treat Blue as if it were Red Note In general although you may want to change respons
441. targets and or behavior flags choose All from the Edit selection list If the quota uses priority pending you will also be able to change the cell priorities gt Click the button for the quota you want to change The quota status report is displayed with the values you can change enclosed in boxes gt Type new values in the boxes If you are changing the behavior flags choose one of the following m Normal for a normal quota m Overquota to allow over quota interviews This type of quota allows interviewing to continue all the time that the number of completed interviews in this cell is less that the target Once the target is met any interviews that are already in progress are allowed to continue and complete 214 Chapter 1 so it is possible that the final number of completed interviews will slightly exceed the target Once the target has been met all new interviews in the cell will fail the quota test and will be dealt with as specified by the scriptwriter usually the interview will be terminated Counter for a counter quota This type of quota counts the number of interviews that take place for this cell but does not compare this count against the target usually the target is zero This cell then has no quota control but a record of the number of interviews achieved for that cell will be maintained gt Click Update to update the quota database Note Any changes that you make are replicated in the quota tables in th
442. ted Manage Logs displays a standard Windows download message box asking whether you want to open or save the file The date range the file types downloaded and the setting for Windows event files are saved in DPM as application settings so that they become the defaults the next time you run Manage Logs Notes m Although downloading is usually quite fast it may take some time if you download a lot of very large log files or you download Windows event logs You will not be able to use IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration while the download is in progress m Ifyou have a number of people with administrator privileges only one of those users can download log files at a time To Zip and Download Log Files Select the Download Logs tab In Machines choose the machines whose log records you want to download In Log file types choose the types of log files you want to download Select For IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Records related to the interview engine ISE Interviewer Server Components IVW Records related to interviews Others Records from log files for other activities such as Participants or Export Data Select the appropriate log files from the list Shift Left Click or Ctrl Left Click gt In Log files date filter choose the date range you want to see Possibilities are the last two 12 or 24 hours the last two days the last week or the latest
443. ter so that it can be translated using IBM SPSS Translation Utility and then upload the updated mdd file into Interviewer Server Administration ready for activation The activity that you use for downloading and uploading files between your computer and Interviewer Server Administration is called Files Send email invitations to prospective participants If the survey allows self completion interviews you may want to send email messages to prospective respondents inviting them to participate in the survey and giving instructions on how to start an interview You can 8 Chapter 1 use Email to set up email jobs that will send messages to all or selected respondents in the Sample file Activate the project in Active mode This makes the project available for live interviewing Interviews take place Respondents connect to your web site to take the survey as a self completion interview or interviewers use Phone Participants to make outbound calls to prospective participants If you have interviewers working remotely using IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer you can monitor their activity by running IBM SPSS Data Collection Remote Administration Review quotas Once interviewing is under way you may want to keep track of interviewing progress with regard to any quotas that have been set by the project Quotas allows you to check the quotas that have been set for each cell and to change the targets if necessary Monitor telepho
444. terviewing Activity Reports 0 00 00 0 cc eee cee ett 293 Manag Logs ses we ences acres oeeaaeaii koata tanec dea leisy act a aan Rem E age a AAEE A a 296 IBM SPSS Data Collection Remote Administration 0 0200 cece eee eee 301 Activation History 0 0 cc cece nent eens 302 Desktop MOOS i 3 2 scacsct aeniea aaa aa ace a pin wala idee wee soe Sk igda a aaa a ara aoe dinate aie 304 Activating Projects from the Command Line 0 0 00 cece eee eee 304 2 IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup 308 Starting IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup 0 0000 c eee eee eee 308 The IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup Window 00 020 e cece eee 309 Docking Undocking the List and Details Panes 00000 e eee eee eee 310 Changing the Layout of the List Pane 2 2 0 0 ccc eee eee 310 Displaying All Variable Types in the List Pane 0 000 cece eee eee 310 Displaying System Variables in the List Pane 0 000 cc eee eee eee eee 310 Displaying Sample Variables in the List Pane 0 00000 e eee eee eee 310 Hiding Components of the IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Window 313 Creating and Opening Quota Files 00 00 c eee eee eens 313 Undoing and Redoing Actions 0 0 00 cece teeta 314 Choosing Your Working Language 00 0c cece teen eee eee 314 Table Quota Sisi oiea eaae a nit ini aai a a iv
445. the Include cases where the text drop down list choose the option that defines when respondents will be included in this quota gt In the box on the right type the text that defines the quota characteristic Defining Quotas for Boolean Variables When the Filter on Boolean Variable dialog box appears do the following gt From the Include cases where the boolean value is drop down list choose whether you want to include respondents whose values are true or false Expression Quotas using Two or More Variables When the Filter on New Variable dialog box appears do the following gt In Logical operator choose how the sub expressions are to be combined Choose And to create a quota expression that requires both sub expressions to be True choose Or to create a quota expression that requires at least one of the expressions to be True gt In New variable choose a variable from the drop down list This list displays all variable types and includes system variables even if you have chosen not to view these variables in the List Pane gt Define the expression for this variable gt Click Next to add another sub expression or Finish to end the expression Advanced Expressions You can define quotas whose characteristics are of almost unlimited complexity using the Expression Definition language This is based on VBScript and supports all of the VBScript functions It also includes additional functions that have been d
446. the following form column_name new_value column_name Specifies the name of the column on the sample table You must always type the column name so that its case matches the case of the field name as displayed in Participants This rule applies even when the sample database has been set up to be case insensitive In addition you can specify only a column that you have access to see Controlling Access to Data and Features for more information new_value Specifies the value that will be assigned to the column For more information see the description of value in Selecting Records above You can update several columns at once by separating the expressions with commas To Perform a Bulk Update In the Selection Criteria text box type an expression that specifies the records that you want to update See Selecting Records above for more information To select all records make sure that the Selection Criteria text box is empty In the Update text box type an expression that specifies the update that you want to perform For example to assign all selected records to the APPOINTMENT queue and change the value of the PreviousQueue column to SILENT type the following Queue APPOINTMENT PreviousQueue SILENT Click Apply This opens a Confirm Update dialog box Click OK After a brief pause another dialog box opens to confirm the number of records that were updated Click OK to close the dialog box
447. the interview was conducted In addition changing the answer might cause other existing questions to disappear In this situation a warning 208 Chapter 1 message is displayed telling you that the path you are now taking through the interview is no longer the path that the interviewer took If the participant s answer to a question has been recorded the following buttons will appear to allow you to listen to the recording Button Description y Play the participant s answer oO Stop playing the participant s answer Alternatively press Ctrl Shift P to play or stop playing the participant s answer Note Automatically calculated answers will not be updated when a review is conducted using the Review Interviews activity Changing the Answer to a Question This topic explains how to change the answers to different types of questions when conducting a review In addition to multiple choice questions you might also see questions that require numeric text date time or boolean yes or no answers Multiple Choice Questions When the question is followed by a list of answers you must choose the answer from the list Some questions require that only one answer is selected from the list whereas other questions allow more than one answer to be selected The way in which you make the selection depends on whether the interview can be conducted using the keyboard only or whether the mouse must be used
448. the other A typical example of a numeric grid is a question that asks respondents how many times they consumed various types of soft drinks on different days of the week You can associate pictures with responses These can be in any of the following formats gif jpg jpeg png or bmp When you export numeric grid questions the export process exports the subject and response texts exactly as they appear in the questionnaire You can specify different texts for analyses if you wish To Create a Numeric Grid Question gt Click Insert Item This opens the New Item dialog box New Item Web Page Dialog i xi Routing Items iO O Single Response Question c Multiple Response Question 2 Numeric Question El C Text question E C Display Text E c Single Response Grid a C Multiple Response Grid E Numeric Grid gt Choose Numeric Grid and click OK 38 Chapter 7 ct holidays BARBARA T Primary Language English United States mQuest Name Intimes Question Text How many times did you use the following leisure facilities during your stay ly Undo Question Subjects Enter one subject on each line Previous Insert tem gt In Name optionally replace the default item name with a name of your choice gt In Question Subjects type the subjects that you want to ask about gt In Responses type the answer texts one per line See Question Limits for information about the
449. the period 20 to 27 October to see everything that happened Figure 1 74 View Settings tab NRA ri min Download Logs fi q View Settings Choose the number of records you want to display on each page and set up the connection string for the machine whose log files you will be viewing Number of records per page 50 v ug file types Interview Server ISE Interview Sever Components IVW Others Log files date filter Last 2 days he To Specify the View Settings gt Select the View Settings tab gt In Number of records per page choose whether to display 50 100 500 or 800 records per page gt In Log file types choose the log files whose records you want to see Select For IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Records related to the interview engine ISE Interviewer Server Components IVW Records related to interviews Others Records from log files for other activities such as Participants or Export Data gt In Log files date filter choose the date range for the files you want to use Possibilities are the last two 12 or 24 hours the last two days or the last week The default is the last two days If you would rather specify your own date range select Custom and then choose the start and end dates in the new fields that Manage Logs displays gt Click Apply to save your changes Viewing Log Files User the View Logs tab to look at
450. the updates that you want to make by typing two expressions similar to those used in SQL statements Alternatively you can just display a selection of records without updating them To use the bulk update feature select the Advanced option under Select and Edit Options on the View Settings tab Warning Always use the bulk update feature with care as Participants does not have an undo option Note that you cannot use the bulk update feature to delete records instead see Deleting Records 103 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Project My First Interview min TGROUTOL Participants mj Queue SILENT AND RecallTime gt 2007 04 21 AND RecallTime lt 2007 04 22 Queue APPOINTMENT PreviousQueue SILENT Apply Participant Records O DIDL ACTIVE gt DID10 ACTIVE Selecting Records You specify the records that you want to select for updating or displaying that is your selection criteria by typing an expression of the following form column_name comparison_operator value column_name Specifies the name of the column on the sample table You can specify only a column that you have access to For more information see the topic Controlling Access to Data and Features on p 107 comparison_operator Must be one of the following operators equals lt less than gt greater than lt less than or equal to gt greater than or equal to lt not les
451. thin the questionnaire as a whole You can define your own item names if you wish Names must be unique and must not match any keyword in the Interview Scripting language or any of the SQL keywords listed below The Interview Scripting language is what you use to create questionnaire scripts if you do not use Build It consists of mrScriptMetaData and mrScriptBasic Add By Desc Into Select Value All Categorical Double Level Set Values Alter Column Drop Long Stdev Where As Count Exec Max Sum With Asc Create From Min Table Avg Date Group Object Text Base Default Having On Truncate Boolean Delete Insert Order Update Setting User and Questionnaire Options You can set options for all your Build sessions and for all work that you do on the current questionnaire This allows you to streamline your work by making Build do a lot of the basic work for you You can set the following options User options Default presentation style for new questionnaires The page layout template file to be used for displaying questions during interviews with IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server when no other templates are defined within the questionnaire Default grid style for new questionnaires The grid layout template file to be used for grid questions during interviews with Interviewer Server when no other templates are defined within the questionnaire Primary language for new questionnaires The lang
452. tio of completes to targets Pend the cell that is least full from the cells for the responses that have been chosen If an interview is restarted after timing out the LeastFull cell is recalculated using the latest quota information This may mean that a different cell is pended in the restarted interview to the one that was pended when the interview was originally started If the questionnaire has routing based on the pended cell the path through the interview may change once the completed portion of the interview has been replayed LeastFull Pending based on the number of completes only Pend the cell that has the fewest completed interviews for the responses that have been chosen If an interview is restarted after timing out the LeastFull cell is recalculated using the latest quota information This may mean that a different cell is pended in the restarted interview to the one that was pended when the interview was originally started If the questionnaire has routing based on the pended cell the path through the interview may change once the completed portion of the interview has been replayed 215 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide In Quotas you can set the type of prioritization you want to use and for priority pending the relative importance of each cell Once you have a set the prioritization type you it is not advisable to change it although you can change the cell priorities for Priority pending if you wi
453. to display only a selection of records so that you can more easily find the records that you want to view 97 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide You specify the records that you want to display by defining selection criteria For example the criteria might be to select a single record with a specific Id or to select all the records for which an interview has been successfully completed The method that you use to specify selection criteria depends on whether the Standard or Advanced option under Select and Edit Options has been selected on the View Settings tab The rest of this topic assumes that the Standard option has been selected If the Advanced option has been selected see Performing a Bulk Update Note Depending on the sample database that you are using text searches might be case sensitive If so you must type text values so that they match the case of the data in the sample table For example queue names such as COMPLETED must always be typed in upper case The remainder of this topic describes the following procedures To Display a Selection of Records To Display Records that fall within a Range of Values To Display Records that have one of Several Values To Display Records that Contain a Word or Phrase To Display Records that Contain a Date To Display Records that Contain an Empty Field To Display a Selection of Records On the View tab make sure that the Participants pane is maximiz
454. to External Files in a Shared Template File When you want to refer to a different template from within the current template typically when you want to refer to a grid template you can refer to that template using just its filename So for example lt mrGridFormat1 DefaultGridTemplate xml gt names a grid template associated with the current template 77 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide You cannot refer to stylesheets or image files using simple filenames Instead you should do one of the following m Enter the full URL for the file and then make sure that you install the file in the location you have specified m Precede the filename with cimage cache url for example lt link rel stylesheet type text css href Yoimage cache url Summer css gt Build will replace image cache url with the URL of the image cache so that the interviewing program will be able to load the file from the image cache The Shared and Roles Templates Folders The shared templates folder is called FMRoot Shared Templates Within it the Data Collection subfolder contains templates for IBM SPSS Data Collection questionnaires written in the mrScriptBasic language In this subfolder you will find htm files and a number of hidden subfolders whose names are the same as the htm files but with a Files extension For example there is a DefaultTemplate htm file and a hidden DefaultTemplate htm_F
455. to the queue from which it was selected m Select codes that are always hidden from interviewers Typically these are call outcomes that are chosen automatically by Interviewer Server To Add a New Code gt Click the Add call outcome button in the Call Outcomes table Figure 1 26 Blank fields display near the bottom of the screen allowing you to defining new call outcomes gt Inthe Code field type a unique number for the result code 152 Chapter 1 gt gt In the Name field type a name for the result code In the Text field type a description of when the result code should be used This text is displayed in the call outcome list that the interviewer sees so try to keep it short and simple if possible Click Add The code is added to the end of the list Note The Sample Management script must contain code to process all the call outcome codes used by a project If you add codes remember to liaise with whoever is responsible for the project s Sample Management script so that the script can be updated if this has not already been done If a code has been defined for a project but is not mentioned in the Sample Management script Interviewer Server will not be able to process calls returned with that outcome code To Change the Text Select the code you want to change and then click the Edit call outcome button Figure 1 27 Edit icon ny This places the text field in edit mode Update the text Cli
456. to update this field with information that might be useful to other interviewers who are about to speak to this participant The Fields tab tells you about the fields that are present in the participant database table aspect sage dmin f Call Times Call Outcomes Dialer Settings Manage Phone Survey Project Id UPLOADSAMPLE Project Name UploadSample Description Highlight row then select the Edit icon Define Fields Edit During Id Queue Active Serial Name PhoneNumber AppointmentTime TryCount TimeZone Comments Audit PreviousQueue PreviousQueue lt gt If there are more lines of information to display than will fit on one page the last line of the list shows lt and gt symbols which you can click on to scroll to the previous or next page Settings on the Fields Tab Setting Description Label Shows the field name that will be displayed on the interviewing screen Required Shows which fields must be present in each participant record You cannot change the settings in this column for any of the standard fields that must be present in all telephone databases but you can change the settings for other fields 130 Chapter 7 Setting Description Show Determines which fields will be displayed on the interviewing screen Of the standard fields the ID Queue Name Phone Number Comments and Previous Queue fields are always displayed so you cannot clear the Show check box fo
457. to wait before recalling numbers that are busy unanswered or answered by an answering machine The Sample Management script uses these elapse times to set the appointment times for the next calls to these numbers The maximum number of times a number may be called before it is no longer eligible for calling The times at which participants may be called on weekdays and at weekends The time zones in which participants are located These time zones should match the time zones stored in the TimeZone field in the participant records Records with time zones that do not match those specified with Phone Surveys or that have a blank TimeZone field will never be used If you do not specify the project s time zones IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server will ignore time zone and calling time parameters when selecting records for interviewers to call Additional call outcome codes to appear in the list that is displayed for interviewers Whether interviewers can retrieve specific participants from the sample database Whether the next participant for an interviewer should be selected as soon as the interviewer becomes available rather than requiring the interviewer to click a button to request the next contact Whether the project uses an autodialer and if not whether interviewers can use modems to dial phone numbers automatically If an autodialer is used you can specify a number of settings such as whether predictive dialing should b
458. tomatically click Start Dialing or Next Contact if you want to make another call or Exit to close the Phone Participants activity Multiple choice questions When the question is followed by a list of answers you must choose the answer from the list Some questions require that only one answer is selected from the list whereas other questions allow more than one answer to be selected The way in which you make the selection depends on whether the interview can be conducted using the keyboard only or whether the mouse must be used as well m For interviews that require the keyboard only All the answers in the list are numbered If only one answer can be selected from the list the numbers will be enclosed in parentheses for example 3 If more than one answer can be selected the numbers will be enclosed in brackets for example 3 To select an answer press the appropriate number key To select multiple answers press the appropriate number keys in any order The answer or answers that you select will be highlighted in the question m For interviews that use the mouse If only one answer can be selected from the list a radio button is displayed next to each answer If more than one answer can be selected a check box is displayed next to each answer To select an answer click on the appropriate radio button or check box To cancel a single choice answer select a different answer To cancel a multiple choice answer select the same an
459. toring is not allowed 281 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Note In the windows showing the current and previous questions it s possible but not recommended to modify the answers and click on the navigation buttons This has no effect on the interview in progress but might cause the question to disappear from your screen Your screen will be refreshed when the interviewer navigates to another question Interviewer Server Administration automatically creates an audit record in the mrUserData database to store details about the period in which you have the Monitor tab open This period is sometimes referred to as the monitoring session To add a comment to the audit record type it in the Document Ref field in the top half of the Monitor tab When you navigate away from the Monitor tab your comment is added to the audit record For more information search the IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library documentation for the topic Interviewer Server Administration Audit Trail The bottom half of the Monitor tab also contains some buttons which are described in the table below Button Description lb Pause monitoring Note that this button pauses visual monitoring but does not mute audio monitoring db Resume monitoring Monitoring Silent Calls If the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server projects that you have access to use an autodialer you can mo
460. uage that will be used as the default primary base language for all new questionnaires that you create Current questionnaire options Primary language The primary base language for the current questionnaire Build displays this at the top of the Edit Advanced and Presentation tabs Default presentation style The page layout template file to be used as the default for all questions in the current questionnaire To assign a different template to a particular question select it using the question s Presentation tab 14 Chapter 1 Answer prompt Interviewer Server prompts for numeric and text responses using the word Answer To use a different prompt for the current questionnaire select the radio button next to the empty text box and type the prompt in the box To Set Options Choose Tools gt Options This opens the Options dialog box Choose or set the options you want to use as defaults Click OK Display Options for the Overview Tab gt The Overview tab displays a summary listing of the all the questions in the questionnaire and their response lists Although this a useful things to have it can become a little unwieldy in questionnaires with many questions or where questions have long single choice or multiple choice response lists The Display options box in the top right corner of the tab lets you reduce the amount of detail displayed in order to increase the number of questions visible per page You have t
461. ually the interview terminates Counter There is no target for this quota so there will be no quota control but the number of respondents belonging to the quota will be counted gt In Description type a short description of the expression gt To save the definition choose File gt Save Note You must give the mqd file the same name as the project and save it in the project s source directory otherwise the activation process will fail when the scriptwriter tries to activate the project Defining Quotas for Categorical Variables When the Filter on Categorical Variable dialog box appears do the following gt From the Include cases where drop down list choose the inclusion criteria for the categories that define the quota characteristics gt In categories are selected choose the characteristics that respondents must have in order to be included in the quota You can select multiple categories by holding down Ctrl while you click 325 IBM SPSS Data Collection Quota Setup Defining Quotas for Numeric Variables When the Filter on Numeric Variable dialog box appears do the following gt From the Include cases where the value is drop down list choose the selection criteria for this quota gt In the number box on the right type the value to which the criteria apply Defining Quotas for Text Variables When the Filter on Text Variable dialog box appears do the following gt From
462. umbers in the form Major Minor where Major is the number of the major version and Minor is the number of the minor version Changes in the major version number indicate that the structure of the case data has changed for example variables or categories have been added or deleted whereas changes in the minor version number indicate that the changes affect the metadata only for example a question text has been changed Version names are created automatically when a version is locked A version that has not been locked is always called LATEST Created by The ID of the user who created the version Created Date This shows the date and time at which the version was locked Description When present this is a text that gives information about the version Languages Select the language you want to use You can change the language only if there is more than one language defined 271 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Contexts Select the user context you want to use The user context controls which texts are displayed For example select Question to display question texts or Analysis to display shorter texts suitable for displaying when analyzing the data LabelTypes Select the label type you want to use You should generally select the Label option Version Expressions When you open a metadata mdd file you can specify the version or versions you want to use This topic describes the syntax that you
463. unanswered calls that were returned to the RECALL queue are shown against an interviewer ID called __Autodial whose figures are included in the Base statistics 237 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide The second table shows some additional statistics for each interviewer as follows Completes per hour This shows the average number of calls made during each hour of connect time that resulted in a call outcome in the Completes group If the total connect time is less than one hour this figure shows the number of calls that would be made in one hour if the interviewer continued at the same rate Completes Attempts This shows the ratio as a decimal between zero and one of the number of calls that resulted in a call outcome in the Completes group compared with the total number of calls m Refusals Terminates This shows the ratio as a decimal between zero and one of the number of calls that resulted in a call outcome in the Refusals group compared with the number of calls that resulted in a call outcome in the Terminates group m Refusals Recalls This shows the ratio as a decimal between zero and one of the number of calls that resulted in a call outcome in the Refusals group compared with the number of calls that resulted in a call outcome in the Recalls group m Response This shows the ratio as a percentage of the number of calls that resulted in a call outcome in the Completes group compared
464. unusable Records in this group require effort beyond a change in a supervisor setting to become usable This includes records past their expiration time or records that are set to be recalled beyond their expiration time Refused Participant records are active but can only be retrieved by refusal converters 248 Chapter 7 Active Participant records that have been called at least once but are still available for dialing on online surveying Fresh Participant records that have not been called and are available for dialing Pre load Participant records that have not been used but are not available due to their queue Reached call limit Participant records that are currently unusable but could be brought back by changing the call limit MaxTries Note that this group must take into account Day Parts if they are in effect x Reached masz a O o Eee eeo pe ee ee 100 100 100 100 GMT Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh E23 22 ea Lisbon London 85 39 41 Sa men ab EE ue a Ljubljana Prague 95 GMT 01 00 Brussels Copenhagen Madrid Paris so 8613 19428 ze 105 29 GMT 01 00 Amsterdam Berlin Bern Rome EIRINN ca Stockholm Vienna 110 17 17 1071 1672 3787 ee Review Calls Cross tabulates the data in two columns of the history table to produce a calling profile Variables that you can use in the tabulation are Queue TryCount Userld and CallOutcome As an example a table of Userld by
465. use to specify the version or versions You can specify a single version using its name Version names are made up of a combination of the major version and minor version numbers in the form Major Minor where Major is the number of the major version and Minor is the number of the minor version Changes in the major version number indicate that the structure of the case data has changed for example variables or categories have been added or deleted whereas changes in the minor version number indicate that the changes affect the metadata only for example a question text has been changed Version names are created automatically when a version is locked A version that has not been locked is always called LATEST You can open the latest minor version that belongs to a specified major version by entering the major version number followed by a colon For example if there are minor versions 2 1 2 2 and 2 3 specifying 2 will open minor version 2 3 You can use an expression to open a superset sometimes called a superversion of two or more versions The order in which you specify the versions determines the order of precedence that is used when there is a conflict between versions The rightmost versions in the expression take precedence over the leftmost For example if a category label differs in the versions you select the text in the version with the highest precedence will be used However the order of questions and categories is alw
466. v2 v3 v4 Specifies individual versions vl v2 Specifies an inclusive range of versions y v2 Excludes a range of versions Specifies the most recent version You can specify a combination of individual versions and ranges to include or exclude For example the following specifies version 3 2 and all versions from 4 5 to 7 3 with the exception of versions 7 through 7 2 3 2 4 5 7 3 47 7 2 When there is a conflict between the versions the order of precedence is taken from the order in which versions are specified in the expression with the rightmost versions taking precedence over the leftmost For example if a category label differs in the versions you select the text in the version with the higher precedence will be used However the order of questions and categories is always taken from the most recent version and there is special handling of changes to loop definition ranges and the minimum and maximum values of variables information see the topic Version Expressions on p 271 Latest Select this option if you want to use the most recent version All Select this option if you want to use a combination superset of all of the available versions This is sometimes called a superversion Versions A list of all of the versions that are available For each version the following information is shown m Name The version name Version names are made up of a combination of the major version and minor version n
467. variable for use elsewhere in the questionnaire For this reason the response list for the hidden question often consists of all the responses to the questions that are to be merged Note Because they are not displayed hidden questions are not valid in question groups gt In Number Type choose either Integer or Real depending on the type of numeric answer you want to accept gt Inthe Minimum Value and Maximum Value boxes type the range of values to accept as valid responses See Question Limits for information about the range of values you can use for numeric responses gt Ifyou want to allow No Answer Don t Know or Refuse to Answer as special responses to this question do the following m In Special Responses select the responses you want to allow m Ifyou want a response to be displayed with a text other than the one shown on this tab type the text in the Text box m To define routing for a special response select the routing destination from the GoTo dropdown list for that response If you want to skip forwards in the questionnaire you must define the question you want to route to before you can select it from the dropdown list To Set Presentation Options Select the Presentation tab Primary Language English United States 2 age Apply Undo Page Presentation Style g Previous Insert tem gt In Presentation Style select a layout template m Click the button next to th
468. vate the project Note Build has built in options for activating and testing questionnaires which you can use instead of the corresponding steps listed here Set up parameters for telephone interviewing If the project is to be used for telephone interviewing run Phone Surveys to assign values to the various telephone interviewing parameters used by the Sample Management script You can also use this activity to customize the call outcome list for the project to specify which fields in the participant records can be seen and edited by interviewers and to specify that the project will use an autodialer to call participants For more information about using autodialers see Dialer Administration Edit the Sample Management Script If there are errors in the Sample Management script use Participant Rules to make the corrections If testing shows that there are errors in the questionnaire or you want to make changes for other reasons return to Build or the authoring product you are using make your changes and reactivate the project You can do this as many times as necessary until the test interviews produce the results you require Translate the questionnaire Once you are satisfied that the test interviews are working correctly you can translate the questionnaire if the project requires multilingual interviewing Interviewer Server Administration does not has a translation tool so you will need to download the mdd file onto your compu
469. vation type Displays the status for the current activation When applicable the drop down list allows you to select which activation types display on the Activation History tab Options include m All Activate the activation history for activations submitted via the IBM SPSS Data Collection Activation Console m Launch the activation history for activations submitted via the IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server s Launch activity m Promote the activation history for activations submitted via the Interviewer Server s Promote Project activity Activation history The drop down list allows you to select which activations display in the Activation History tab Options include m All E Successful activation E Failed activation Activation status The check boxes allows you to select the activation status to display in the Activation History tab Options include m Active m Inactive m Test Project Allows you to define specific projects to display in the Activation History tab Click Find to locate questionnaire projects on the Interviewer Server Use the Add gt gt and lt lt Remove buttons to select which projects will display in the Activation History tab User Allows you to define projects activated by specific users to display in the Activation History tab Click Find to locate users on the Interviewer Server Use the Add gt gt and lt lt Remove buttons to select which users
470. ver Administration However if the position settings for a telephone interviewer station specify that the station can be used only for manual or modem dialing the Start Dialing button will not be usable on that station Phone numbers used for autodialing must contain only the digits 0 to 9 and optionally preceded by a plus to present the international access code In addition the phone number can contain the visual separators SPACE and Visual separators are not allowed before the first digit If you select this option you might also need to change the settings on the Autodialer Settings tab For more information about dialers and positions see Dialer Administration Using a Modem to Dial Phone Numbers To allow interviewers to use modems to dial phone numbers select Modem Show Dial Contact button on the Interviewer screen from the Dialing Options drop down list The Dial Contact button on the main screen of the Phone Participants activity will then be usable When interviewers click that button the phone number displayed in the main screen will be dialed automatically by the modem Note that the modem option will work only for phone numbers that are formatted as follows Country RegionCode Area CityCode SubscriberNumber For example 44 12 3456 7890 for a subscriber in the United Kingdom In addition a separate software installation is required on each telephone interviewer station that will use the modem opt
471. ver on Windows 2000 you may also need to add the project language in which you are working to your regional settings in order for this encoding to process the element texts for categorical filters correctly You will know if you have to make this change because when you choose a single or multiple response variable as a filter the element selection frame will display boxes instead of text for the element labels To Add a Language to your Regional Settings gt From the Control Panel select Regional Options gt On the General tab in Language Settings for the System select the language that is being Phone displayed incorrectly Use the Phone activity to produce the following reports for your telephone interviewing project For more information about customizing these reports or running them outside of the Phone activity see the notes at the end of this topic Call History Based The following reports are based on the project s call history data Answer Time Distribution Busy Wait and Idle Time Busy Wait and Idle Time Across Projects Call Outcome Status Dialer Statistics Interviewer Statistics Interviewer Statistics Across Projects Silent Call Statistics Sample Based The following reports are based on the project s sample data Appointments Distribution Appointments Summary Call Outcome by Segment 231 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide Calls by Segment Incidence Statist
472. ver on which the participant database is located The Browse list contains only those servers that are present in your current domain If you want to use a server in another domain you must enter its name manually Database The name of the participant database The Browse list displays the names of databases that you have permission to use and that exist on the chosen server Table The table in this database that contains the participant records for this project The Browse list displays the names of tables in the chosen database Fields The columns of participant information to use from this table The Browse list shows the column names present in the chosen table Sample Management requires columns labeled Zd queue active and serial to function properly Authentication Fields The columns that are to be used for authenticating the participant record associated with an inbound call before allowing an interview to start The fields displayed in the browse list are those that you selected in Fields Script The Sample Management script for the project You can either select a predefined script from a list or load a script of your choice using the Browse button 112 Chapter 7 Note Sample management scripts are currently implemented as mrScript and should therefore have the mrs extension Script Type The script type either IBM SPSS Data Collection or VBScript This box is displayed only if you have permission to edit sample
473. viewers The number of interviewers who are using an autodialer Waiting Interviewers The number of interviewers who are using an autodialer and are waiting to be connected to a participant This figure is shown only if the project is using the autodialer in predictive or group mode Silent Calls The percentage of silent calls that are occurring This figure is shown only if the project is using an autodialer in predictive or group mode The figure is an average of the silent call percentage figures for all of the interview session engines being used by this project Each engine s silent call percentage figure is based on the period since the engine was last restarted or the percentage figure was last reset Mode The current dialing mode being used by the autodialer The possible values are Predictive Not predictive and Extension For more information about the difference between predictive not predictive group and extension dialing use the search function in the IBM SPSS Data Collection Developer Library documentation to search for the text How Does Autodialing Work and in the search results open the topic with that title Customizing the Dialing Activity Display You can change the Dialing Activity display to show or hide the dialing groups associated with each Interviewer Server project If dialing groups are hidden the Dialer Group and Engine columns will not appear in the Dialing Acti
474. viewers to display Display All Display Selection Real Time Display Interviewer Id Description Completed Suspended Successful Sync Attempted Sync 0 11 25 2007 12 26 05 PM 11 25 2007 12 26 05 PM 6 11 26 2007 10 28 26 AM 11 26 2007 10 28 26 AM user for MI doc team 0 11 26 2007 10 58 23 AM 11 26 2007 10 58 23 AM Interviewer Id The IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server Administration user ID of the interviewer Description The Interviewer Server Administration description of the user Completed Number of interviews the interviewer has completed on the selected project Suspended Number of interviews the interviewer has started but not completed on the selected project 302 Chapter 1 Successful Sync Date and time of the last successful synchronization by the user Attempted Sync Date and time of the last attempted synchronization by the user Activation History The Activation History activity allows you to monitor project activation status The activity provides options for viewing pending and completed activations and creating activation history filters The activity is composed of the following tabs m Activation History Tab allows you to view the status of both pending and completed activations m Filters Tab provides options for filtering questionnaire activation history Activation History Tab The Activation History tab allows you to view the status of both pending and completed act
475. vity display gt In the toolbar at the top of the Interviewer Monitoring main page click the Table Setup button as shown below Figure 1 72 Table Setup button oA State No Description 1 Tablet 283 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide This opens the Real Time Display Setting dialog box as shown below Figure 1 73 Real Time Display Setting dialog box Real Time Display Setting Web Page Dialog Interviewer Monitoring Table Options Display Number of records per screen ail Table Setup Available Fields Displayed Fields Interviewer Id Project Id Session Time Display order Add gt gt Idle Time in table Busy Rate Move Up Contacts Since Last _ Remove completed Move Down Project Type Interview Time Is Monitored Question Id Question Time gt 5 Sort table b Select all Interviewer Id Dialer Monitoring Table Options Table setup 9 Display projects and groups G Display projects only Sort table b Project z gt In Dialer Monitoring Table Options choose whether you want to display projects and their associated dialing groups or just the projects gt In the Sort table by drop down list choose the sort order of the projects in the Dialing Activity display gt Click OK Note For information about using the other settings in the Real Time Display Setting dialog box see Customizing the Real Time Display Resetting the Silen
476. wing frame click Engine Status gt To see the names of the names of the projects for which interviews are running click the plus button to the left of the projects count To return to the summary display click the minus button Project Status The Project Status report covers all projects for which interviews are currently in progress The report shows the project s name the version of the questionnaire file being used the number of engines that are running interviews for that project and the number of live and test interviews in progress If interviews are in progress for projects that you cannot access the report shows an Other Projects entry for the engines running those interviews This gives the total number of live and test interviews in progress for all those projects combined Interviewing Project Status Engine Status Shows the status of all interviewing engines and all the current load Project Status Project Status Report 2 engines 31 1 Test http KI BEN mrlEngwSi 20 0 Test http KI CLOVER mrlEngwS1 11 1 Test http KI BEN mrlEngwS1 0 2Test P2 http KI CLOVER mrlEngwS1 6 0 Test P6 H2 engines 28 0 Test Other Projects http KI BEN mrlEngwS1 0 1Test The report is a snapshot of activity at the point you request it Refresh the report periodically to see up to date figures To View the Project Status Report 296 Chapter 1 gt In the Interviewing frame click P
477. with are case insensitive With Ends with you must type the text in the same case that it appears in the case data otherwise the filter will fail Filtering on a Grid Variable The grid is presented already sliced into its various subquestions Choose the variable that represents the subquestion on which you wish to base your filter If the variable is a single or multiple choice grid the slice will be a single or multiple choice variable and you can choose the responses on which to filter If the grid contains numerics the logic operators for a numeric are displayed If the grid contains single or multiple choice responses the logic operators for those variable types are displayed Clearing Filters Clear Filter removes the filter from the table and refreshes the table so that it is no longer filtered To Clear the Current Filter gt Select Clear gt Clear Filter Interview Filters If you have a suitable dataset such as a dataset collected in IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server the Interview Filter option is available Interview Filter lets you include only interviews with certain statuses in tables and charts The filter is applied before any other filters that you may define and remains set even if you clear all other filters For example you can set the interview filter to include only interviews that were successfully completed and can then create a number of tables using case data filters such as age or ge
478. ws the number of participant records that are not in the ACTIVE APPOINTMENT RECALL TIMED OUT TRANSFER_TO_WEB or FRESH queues Completes Total attempt records This shows the ratio as a decimal between zero and one of the number of participant records in the COMPLETED queue compared with the number of records that are not in the FRESH queue m Completes Resolved This shows the ratio as a decimal between zero and one of the number of participant records in the COMPLETED queue compared with the number of records that are Resolved as defined above m Resolved Total attempt records This shows the ratio as a decimal between zero and one of the number of participant records that areResolved as defined above compared with the number of records that are not in the FRESH queue 247 IBM SPSS Data Collection Interviewer Server User s Guide 19920 lt ee E ame irae E woo a ome E mal 4 915743 87 Queue Completes Total attempt records 012 Completes Resoved ois Queue Status By Time Zone This report displays the queue status for each available time zone The queue status can help a supervisor decide how many participant records are available and what can be done to make more records available Base The total number of participant records Completed Interviews that have been completed on the participant records Unusable Participant records that have been called and found to be
479. x Routing Items iO ce Single Response Question Multiple Response Question E numeric Question El C Text question E C Display Text Ez C Single Response Grid E c Multiple Response Grid E Numeric Grid m Click Import from Library This displays the Select dialog box Upload Download Fiename Filemask mad Select Close Folders Name Type Date E Root Detailed Employee Satisfaction Questionnaire mdd mdd 6 2 2004 11 26 44 AM Role Library OPMAdmins Employee Exit Questionnaire mdd mdd 4 19 2004 9 17 46 PM I Shared Library Simple Employee Satisfaction Questionnaire mdd mdd 6 2 2004 10 13 36 AM Teamwork Questionnaire mdd mdd 6 2 2004 10 11 26 AM 9 Customer Satisfaction Training and Development Questionnaire mdd mdd 6 2 2004 10 27 10 AM Demographics Human Resources Products and Services Ratings and Frequencies Website Or m On the Overview tab select the item above which you want to insert the library file m Choose File gt Insert gt From Library This displays the Select dialog box 50 Chapter 7 gt In the Folders frame navigate to the folder containing the file you want to import gt In the file list double click on the filename Build inserts the items from the library file at the current point in the questionnaire Copying Pictures and Presentation Te
480. xample the Data Model classifies all whole numbers integers as Long while an SQL database will classify them as either int or smallint depending on the length of the number If it is important that the columns are created with particular data types in the database you can examine and change the columns definitions using your database application s tools once the participant records have been loaded gt In Length enter the maximum size of this column in the sample table gt Click the Update symbol the blue check mark to save the change or the Cancel symbol the red cross to cancel it Replicates Replicates are a mechanism for making sets of participant records available for dialing The sets of participant records can be grouped based on a particular meaning specific day of the week for example or may be arbitrary groups representing a portion of the available participant records The record sets are defined by applying replicate identifiers to each participants record s Queue field These identifiers allow you to determine which replicates are being dialed 92 Chapter 1 Replicates are simply different queues for example you could specifyQueue REPLICATE1 for the first replicate or Queue MIDWEST1 for the region specific replicate Uploading participant records that contain replicate identifiers does not make them immediately available for dialing You must first release the replicates by updating the participan

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

ASRock EP2C602-4L/D16 Owner's Manual  Approx APPMPR1TDT  図面・資料  Owner`s Manual  Bedienungsanleitung de Instruction manual en Mode  G 22 - Walther  Moules pour dalles et bordures de jardin  Samsung YP-P2JCB Εγχειρίδιο χρήσης  Daikin FTXZ25N air conditioner  1 MANUAL DE UTILIZAÇÃO DO MÓDULO DA FARMÁCIA AGHU  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file